13. Rectifier shall be operated with 115/230 volt, single phase, 60 hertz AC input.
B. Mixed Metal Oxide Anodes
1. MMO M124 Anodes (Manufacturer: Corrpro Inc., or approved equal) having the dimensions listed below:
a. Length: 48 inches, minimum.
b. Outside Diameter: 1.25 inches, minimum.
c. Weight: 27 pounds, minimum.
2. Anode wires shall be #8 AWG seven strand copper conductor with HALAR insulation. The cable connection to the anode shall be center connected with a cable factory bonded to the anode using a double compression crimp and sealed in a block of resin to provide maximum robustness and prevent water penetration with the copper conductor.
3. Anode hole surface box shall comprise 10 inch I.D. x 12 inch high concrete traffic boxes with cast iron covers, rated H-20, model G5 by Christy or approved equal. The cast iron cover shall be permanently marked “ANODE”.
Cathodic Protection
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16200-3 C. Deep Anode Hardware
1. Anode centralizers that secure the anode to the vent pipe shall be used. Each shall have two vent pipe clamps as shown in the project drawings.
2. Anode well casings shall be used per drilling requirements, if necessary.
3. Anode well sealant of “Portland Cement” shall be installed above the coke breeze as per the project drawings.
4. The top of the anode well sealant shall be completed to approximately two feet (2 ft.) below grade. A 2” schedule 80 PVC conduit will stub out above the top of the sealant and will route anode leads from the well to the adjacent anode junction box.
5. Plastic vent pipe shall be used from the bottom of deep anode groundbeds to the surface to dissipate and vent generated gasses from the anode groundbed. The material shall be plastic and chemically resistant to chloride gases. The diameter shall be 2-inch for deep wells. The vent pipe in the active column shall be slotted (AllVent™) as manufactured by Loresco International or approved equal. The vent pipe above the earth contact backfill shall be solid walled pipe. The plastic vent pipe shall extend above grade and the vent outlet shall be screened and installed in an inverted manner adjacent to the rectifier/junction box.
D. Junction Box
1. Terminal boards shall be mounted inside a NEMA 3R rated Junction Box. Junction boxes shall be post mounted below the rectifier with RGS conduit.
2. Electrical panels shall be 0.25" minimum thickness of laminated phenolic board. The panel fittings shall include compression cable terminals, copper bus bars and current measurement shunts rated 50mV/50A (0.001 ohm) manufactured by Holloway or approved equal.
E. Galvanic Anodes
1. The anodes at the test stations shall consist of 32lb. High Potential Magnesium anodes as manufactured by Corrpro or approved equal.
2. Length 30 inches, dimeter 8 inches.
3. Anode Ingot Composition
Aluminum 0.010% Max.
Manganese 0.50 - 1.3%
Copper 0.02% Max.
Nickel 0.001% Max.
Iron 0.03% Max.
Total Other Impurities 0.05 Each or 0.30% Max.
Magnesium Balance
4. The anode lead wire shall be No. 12 AWG, seven stranded copper conductors with THHN insulation.
The cable connection to the anode shall be cable factory bonded to the anode using a double compression crimp and sealed in a block of resin to provide maximum robustness and prevent water penetration to the copper conductor.
5. Prepackaged anode backfill shall have the following composition: 75% Gypsum, 20% Bentonite, 5% Sodium Sulfate.
2.3 TEST PANEL
A. A phenolic test panel shall be used for making electrical connections between the pipeline and anodes, and for the cable terminations for the pipe leads and reference electrodes as shown on the drawings.
B. Panel boards shall be 0.25" minimum thickness of laminated phenolic board. The panel fittings shall include compression cable terminals, copper bus bars and current measurement Holloway RS shunts or approved equal.
Cathodic Protection
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16200-4
2.4 TEST STATION BOXES
A. Test station terminal boards shall be mounted inside a Christy G5 flush to grade traffic box with cast iron lid marked “CTS WATER”.
2.5 CABLE
A. Test cables shall be single conductor size #8 AWG, HMWPE insulated, High Molecular Weight Polyethylene jacketed cable suitable for direct burial.
B. All cable conductor sizes and insulator colors shall be as indicated in the cathodic protection drawing details.
All cables shall be free of splices unless specifically indicated in the drawings.
2.6 INSULATING FLANGE KITS
A. The insulating materials shall be of the type designated by the manufacturer as suitable for the operating temperature and pressure of the applicable service. The insulating flange kits shall be installed by the pipefitters. The flange kits shall comprise the following:
1. Insulating Gasket: All gaskets shall be full face type of minimum 1/8” thickness dielectric made of laminated G-10 with neoprene on each side of gasket.
2. Insulating Sleeves and Washers: Insulating stud sleeves and washers shall be one-piece construction made of G-10 material with dielectric strength not less than 500 volts per mil, and compressive strength not less than 172.3 Mpa (25,000 psi).
3. Steel Washers: Steel washers shall be 1/8” thick grade 316 stainless steel.
4. Manufacturers: Products shall be manufactured by PSI, Central Plastics, APS or an approved equal.
2.7 THERMOWELD EQUIPMENT
A. Manufactured by Continental or Erico. Materials used to be selected and used per manufacturer’s instructions and guidelines.
2.8 PIN BRAZING EQUIPMENT
A. Structure connections (where required shall be pin brazed using “Safetrack” or BAC brazing guns and pins, coated with Carboline SplashZone coating.
2.9 CABLE IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A. All cables in test stations shall be identified as shown in the drawings. Labeling shall consist of 1-inch Dia.
Brass I.D. tags nylon wire tied to each cable.
2.10 CABLE WARNING TAPE
A. All buried cables shall have plastic warning tape installed a minimum of 12 inches above the top of the cables for the entire buried length of the cables. The warning tape shall be at least three inches wide and shall be yellow with black lettering with the legend "CAUTION, CATHODIC PROTECTION CABLES BURIED BELOW" in three-inch high lettering printed at a minimum of seven-foot intervals along the entire buried length of the cable.
2.11 COPPER-COPPER SULFATE REFERENCE ELECTRODES
A. The permanent copper-copper sulfate (Cu/CuSO4) reference electrodes shall not be susceptible to chloride contamination and rated to deliver accurate potential measurements for up to 30 years.
Cathodic Protection
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16200-5 C. The reference electrode shall be composed of a copper element, which is immersed in a glass tube containing supersaturated copper sulfate solution.
D. Each reference electrode shall be tested for electrical potential and resistance prior to shipping. The measurements obtained from these tests are recorded and included with each cell, and cells which do not meet or exceed established performance thresholds are rejected.
E. The reference electrode shall provide an accuracy of ±5 millivolts.
F. The reference electrode shall be provided with #14 AWG HMWPE insulation. The lead wires shall be continuous without splicing.
G. The copper-copper sulfate (Cu/CuSO4) reference electrode shall be model Permacell Plus-B as manufactured by Corrpro or an approved equal.
2.12 PIPE BONDING CABLES
A. All bonding cables shall be of the materials and quantity as shown in the drawings.
B. Pipe must be bonded at all joints that are not welded. This applies across all appurtenances except for insulating joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECTIFIER AND JUNCTION BOX
A. Location: Install rectifier enclosure and junction box in locations as indicated in the cathodic protection design drawings. Place the enclosure to allow ready access to the side of the enclosure for testing and routine maintenance.
B. Terminate all anode cables at the junction box and all structure and anode header cables at the rectifier in accordance with the cathodic protection drawings. The vent pipe shall be terminated adjacent to the rectifier/junction box location.
C. Electrical Grounding: The rectifier shall be electrically grounded to a suitably sized ground rod in accordance with NEC and other applicable electrical codes.
3.2 DEEP ANODE GROUNDBED
A. Permits: The CONTRACTOR shall obtain well drilling permits required by all applicable City, County and/or State agencies.
B. Field Location: Location of the anode wells are approximate. Exact anode well placement shall be determined and verified in the field by the CONTRACTOR’s engineer and the CITY’s representative if applicable.
C. Anode Hole Drilling: The anode bore hole shall be 10 inches diameter and to the depth shown on the Drawings. Drilling shall be accomplished with rotary bit. Driller shall use standard techniques (i.e. trough and vacuum truck) to capture and contain the drilling fluids, mud and cuttings at the top of the hole. The driller shall select the type and consistency of drilling fluids to be consistent with soil characteristics. The drilling rig shall be leveled to provide a round, straight and plumb anode hole.
D. Anode Installation: The anodes shall be centered in the hole and spaced as per the design drawings. The lead wires shall be pre-marked for the nominal anode depth. The final depth shall be recorded with the first anode in the hole (i.e. the bottom anode) identified as anode number one (1). The anode lead wires shall not be damaged during handling or lowering into the hole. Under no circumstances shall the anode Cathodic Protection
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16200-6 lead wires be clamped or pinched around another object while lowering. If the insulation for any anode lead wires is cut, broken, or nicked, the complete anode shall be rejected and shall be removed from the job site. The CONTRACTOR shall replace all damaged anodes at no additional expense to the CITY.
E. Anode Column Backfill: The anode backfill shall be coke breeze slurried above-grade and then pumped into the hole after the anodes are installed. The backfill shall be pumped from the bottom of the hole up using a pipe that is the length of the anode hole. The pipe shall be removed from the hole after the installation is complete. Installation of the coke breeze backfill shall be uniform with no voids around the anodes.
F. Inactive Column Backfill: Portland cement seal shall be installed into the anode hole after the backfill has settled.
G. Precautions: The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions to avoid entrance of foreign matter into the hole, movement of soil strata, or collapsing of the hole during the progress of the work. Should movement of soil strata or collapse of the drilled hole interfere with proper completion of the anode groundbed, the CONTRACTOR will recover the wires and anodes and ream or re-drill the hole.
H. Mud and Cuttings: Drilling mud, cuttings and other waste shall be disposed of onsite in a manner which complies with the rules and regulations of the State, City and County.
3.3 GACP ANODE BEDS
A. Sacrificial anodes shall be installed in selected excavation sites in trenches horizontal to the piping in accordance to the cathodic protection design drawings.
B. Specifically, the anode trench shall be of width and depth to properly accommodate the anodes.
C. The anodes must never be lowered or suspended by their cables, anodes shall be lowered into the trenches using suitably sized ropes.
D. The anodes must be thoroughly soaked with water as each anode is installed using a minimum of 10 gallons of fresh water per anode.
E. After installing the anodes, the trench shall be backfilled to grade using stone and clod free native material.
F. Any compaction at the excavation shall be in accordance with the standards and requirements of the permitting agency.
3.4 ANODE CABLES
A. Unless specified in civil specifications, dig a 6 (or 12) - inch wide x 24- inch deep trench from the anode bed to the test station box location.
B. Route the anode cables to at least 24” below grade.
C. Leave slack in the cables at both ends and avoid damage to the cable during installation.
3.5 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Depth: Install all underground wires and cables a minimum of 24 inches below final grade with a minimum separation of 6 inches from other underground structures.
B. Backfill over wire: All buried cables shall have plastic warning tape installed a minimum of 12 inches above the top of the cables for the entire buried length of the cables.
3.6 TERMINAL PANELS
Cathodic Protection
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16200-7 A. Location: Install GACP test station enclosure in locations as indicated in the cathodic protection design drawings, generally immediately adjacent to the anode bed behind the curb to allow ready access for testing and routine maintenance.
B. Terminate all cables at the test station panels in accordance with the cathodic protection drawings.
3.7 INSULATING FLANGE KITS
A. This section applies to the installation of new or the repair/refitting of existing flange kits on below grade flange locations.
B. Below Grade Insulating Flange Kits: There shall be pipe flanges with insulating flange kits installed as indicated in the drawings. These pipe flanges shall be dedicated solely to cathodic protection electrical isolation.
C. The insulating flange kits shall be installed by the CONTRACTOR installing the pipeline, pipe fittings and pipe flanges.
3.8 CABLE IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A. Brass identification tags shall consist of 1-inch Dia. tags nylon wire tied to each cable. Tags shall be marked/stamped with: “#P” (with a number indicating pipe size in inches), “REF” for reference electrode cables, and “A#” (with a number dedicated to each anode) for anode cables.
3.9 EXOTHERMIC WELDING
A. Negative cable connections to specified buried piping shall be accomplished by exothermic welding.
Connections shall be on the top of the pipe between the 11 and 1 o’clock position.
1. Observe proper safety precautions, welding procedures, exothermic weld material selection, and surface preparation as recommended by the exothermic weld manufacturer.
2. Ensure there is adequate ventilation in the area of the welding.
3. Ensure that the structure wall thickness is of sufficient thickness that the exothermic weld process will not damage the integrity of the structure.
4. Clean a 4-inch by 4-inch space on the structure surface to a bright, shiny, metallic surface free of all serious pits and flaws by use of a mechanical grinder or a file.
5. Connect wire directly to the structure by use of exothermic weld kits in accordance with the kit manufacturer's instructions.
6. Remove all weld slag from the weldment with a wire brush.
7. Visually inspect the weld for size, material leakage, exposed conductor, porosity, color, and surface finish.
8. Check and verify adherence of the bond to the substrate for mechanical integrity by pulling and applying steady tension on the cable while striking the side of the weld once with a 2-pound hammer with a shearing blow.
9. Any welds that break loose or show signs of poor quality shall be removed and re-welded.
10. If the portion of rejected welds is more than 5 percent or 3 during one work day the CONTRACTOR shall stop welding and thoroughly review the weld kit manufacturer's installation instructions and inspection guide to reduce the number of rejected welds.
11. Install a weld cap over the weld.
Cathodic Protection
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16200-8
12. Apply protective coating material to all exposed areas, welds, and conductors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The coating shall overlap the structure coating a minimum of 1 inch.
Allow sufficient time to dry before back filling.
13. Allow sufficient slack in the lead wire to compensate for movement.
14. Pipe test wires shall be wrapped under and looped through itself to provide stress relief.
15. Protect wires from damage until final backfill and termination in junction box.
3.10 PIN BRAZING
A. Method: Attach negative cables and bond cables to the structures by pin-brazing. Prior to pin brazing, measure the pipe wall thickness using an ultrasonic thickness gauge in the presence of the CITY to determine if the pipe wall thickness is suitable for pin brazing.
B. Preparation: Clean and dry the structure surface to which the negative cable is to be attached.
1. Use a grinding wheel to remove all dirt, coating, oxide and mill scale from the structure surface over an area approximately 3 inches square.
2. Use a solvent to remove oil and grease, if necessary. Clean the surface to bright metal. Repeat preparation of an adjacent area for the test lead attachment.
3. Remove approximately 1 inch of insulation from each end of the wires to be pin brazed, exposing clean, oxide-free copper.
C. Brazing: Pin braze negative cables to structure as follows:
1. Using the proper size pin and ferrule as recommended by the Safetrack operation manual. Load both pieces into the brazing gun.
2. Press the brazing gun to the structure and pull trigger to begin brazing. The brazing gun must be held steadily during the brazing process.
3. Remove brazing gun without pulling the trigger. Knock the shank off the brazing pin using a light tap from a hammer.
4. Attach lugged wire lead to pin, and secure with locking nut.
5. Apply Carboline SplashZone onto pin brazes below grade in a 1/8” to ¼” thick layer, ensuring that all cracks and gaps are filled.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. All excavations, trenching, backfilling, compacting and regarding shall be in accordance with applicable contract civil specifications and drawings, with the project specifications and with local jurisdictional authority requirements.
3.3 TESTING AND RECORD KEEPING
A. All testing shall be carried out by a NACE level CP-2 qualified engineer or higher under the supervision of a qualified (NACE CP Specialist or Corrosion PE) and experienced personnel employed by a company normally engaged in cathodic protection.
B. Electrical Isolation: Insulating flanges shall be tested for correct operation prior to tape wrapping or coating and backfilling using a “Gas Electronics model 601 Isolation Flange Tester”. The insulating flange tester shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. If the flange kit passes the isolation test, then it can be wrapped (or coated) and buried as applicable. If the insulating flange fails the test, then it shall be repaired or replaced by the CONTRACTOR and then retested to confirm proper operation. Records shall be retained and submitted to the district.
Cathodic Protection
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16200-9 C. Pipe Lead Wire Integrity Tests: After the pipes or fittings are buried, all new test and structure wires shall be tested for their integrity and electrical continuity with the pipeline. Any damaged or broken wires shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR and retested. All records shall be retained and submitted to the CITY.
D. Cathodic Protection Surveys: The following minimum tests shall be carried out for each new cathodic protection system installed:
1. Visually inspect the installations for compliance with the cathodic protection design drawings and specifications.
2. Record “Native” (as found) structure-to-electrolyte potentials for all pipes (at all test leads at the test station) and structures.
3. For ICCP systems: terminate all cables at the appropriate terminals inside the junction box and rectifier. For GACP systems: connect the pipe structure wire to the panel board bus bar and record “ON” structure-to-electrolyte potentials at piping terminals in the junction box,
4. For ICCP systems: Energize the rectifier and adjust current output with the taps. Adjust as needed depending on polarization characteristics and allow system to polarize for a minimum of 48 hours.
For GACP systems: Leave the anodes connected for a minimum of 24 hours for the structures to polarize.
5. Install current interrupters at the test stations (use GPS type interrupters to synchronize the interruption cycles of all rectifiers influencing the subject pipelines as needed) and carry out an On/Instant (Polarized) Off structure-to-electrolyte potential survey at all pipe terminals.
6. Submit the commissioning report with tabulated data, conclusions and recommendations to the CITY.
7. Submit as-built drawings to the CITY.
8. The CONTRACTOR shall repair all deficiencies prior to final acceptance at no cost to the CITY.
3.4 CLEAN UP
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for clean-up and removal of all debris, extra material, and equipment utilized for installation of the cathodic protection system. - END OF SECTION -
Service and Distribution
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16400-1 SECTION 16400
SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Requirements specified in Section 16000 form a part of this Section. This Section outlines the electrical work for underground or overhead power service and power distribution.
B. Related Section: Section 16902 – Electrical Controls C. Power Service: The underground or overhead service shall be complete and as shown on the Drawings. The service installation shall conform with the power company service requirements.
D. Distribution: The power distribution system shall include equipment installations and underground or overhead wiring installations as shown on the Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for the CITY's approval material lists, shop drawings, factory test reports, and technical data to the extent required in Section 16010.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide all the equipment and materials, and complete all of the power service, power distribution and grounding installations as indicated, specified and required. Sizes of equipment shown on the Drawings and space allowed for the equipment are based on equipment manufactured by only one of the listed acceptable manufacturers. The manufacturers and models listed in this Section of the Specifications are acceptable providing they conform to the Specifications and that the equipment and materials provided fit properly in the available space. Refer to Section 16111 for conduits, Section 16123 for 600 Volt Class Cable, and Section 16195 for Electrical Identification.
2.2 SERVICE EQUIPMENT
A. Provide the metal enclosed, service equipment as shown on the Drawings, specified in Section 16160 and in accordance with the power company service requirements. The low voltage equipment shall be manufactured by Square D, Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, Allen Bradley, or approved equal. Service equipment shall be part of the motor control center assembly as shown on the Drawings. All sections must meet VERNON POWER UTILITY requirements.
B. Metering Section shall be full height, free standing and equipped with meter sockets, copper busses, main circuit breaker and ground fault protection as indicated. The meter sockets shall be provided for the power company self contained meter or meters that shall be connected to instrument transformers as required. Must meet VERNON POWER UTILITY requirments.
C. Pull Section shall be totally metal enclosed, full height, free standing and equipped with copper busses and connectors for the underground service conductors. Must meet VERNON POWER UTILITY requirements.
D. A main circuit breaker shall be used as a service disconnect in the service equipment as shown on the Drawings.
E. Nameplates shall be provided for the service equipment. Refer to Section 16195 for nameplates.
F. Double Hasp shall be attached on a gasketed hinged door of outdoor equipment for two padlocks.
Service and Distribution
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16400-2 G. Grounding shall meet the requirements of Section 16170.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide all the equipment installations and wiring installations including connections and interconnections for the power service and distribution as indicated, specified and required. Assure proper fits for all equipment and materials in the spaces shown on the Drawings.
B. Earthwork, Concrete and Painting: The required work for excavations, backfills, concrete and painting shall be provided for the electrical installations.
1. Earthwork shall be performed for handholes, pull boxes, underground conduits, poles, guys, grounding, equipment foundations and supports as indicated and specified.
2. Concrete shall be provided for electrical equipment foundations and supports, and conduit encasements as indicated and specified in Division 3.
3. Painting shall be provided for all installations having unfinished surfaces as specified in. Field damaged factory finishes on equipment shall be touched-up with paint that is equal in quality and color to the original factory finish.
C. Handholes and Pull Boxes: Precast concrete handholes and pull boxes shall be installed in excavations as shown on the Drawings and as required.
1. Accessories shall be installed, which include pull eyes and required hardware.
2. Covers shall be installed on all handholes and pull boxes.
D. Service Equipment: Install the metal enclosed service equipment and wiring as indicated, specified and required.
1. Equipment shall be installed level and securely attached to the concrete foundation with anchor bolts.
The sections shall be joined together with bolts, washers and nuts to form a unit assembly.
2. Wiring installations shall be complete and in accordance with the power company service requirements.
3. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic and attached to clean surfaces of the metal enclosures with an adhesive or equal.
E. Grounding: Install all the equipment, materials and wiring to complete the equipment, structural, lightning and system grounding installations as shown on the Drawings, specified and required.
F. Panelboards and Switchboards: Install the metal enclosed panelboards and distribution switchboards as indicated, specified and required.
1. Equipment shall be installed level and securely attached to the concrete foundations, floors and walls with anchor bolts.
2. Wiring installations shall be complete, including all connections.
3. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, and attached to clean surfaces of the metal enclosures with an adhesive.
G. Checking, Adjusting and Testing: Provide all checking, adjusting and testing operations on equipment and complete installations as specified in Section 16100.
- END OF SECTION -
Low-Voltage Distribution Switchboards
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16429-1 SECTION 16429
LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS (GROUP MOUNTED)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install, where indicated, a free-standing, dead-front type low-voltage distribution switchboard, utilizing group mounted circuit protective devices as specified herein, and as shown on the contract drawings.
B. Related Section: Section 01300 – Submittals
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The low voltage distribution switchboards and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable following standards:
1. NEMA PB-2
2. UL Standard 891.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The following information shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review:
1. Master drawing index
2. Front view elevation
3. Floor plan
4. Top view
5. Single line
6. Schematic diagram
7. Nameplate schedule
8. Component list
9. Conduit entry/exit locations
10. Assembly ratings including:
a. Short-circuit rating
b. Continuous current
c. Voltage
11. Major component ratings including:
a. Voltage
b. Continuous current
c. Interrupting ratings
12. Cable terminal sizes.
13. Busway connection
14. Connection details between close-coupled assemblies
15. Composite floor plan of close-coupled assemblies
16. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.
Low-Voltage Distribution Switchboards
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16429-2
17. Calculation of flash protection boundary and require personal protective equipment B. Submit copies of the following information for record purposes:
1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Section 1.4
2. Wiring diagrams
3. Certified production test reports
4. Installation information
5. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details C. The CONTRACTOR or the equipment manufacturer shall determine and submit the calculation to the CITY the arc Flash Protection Boundary (FPB) and the recommended Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the circuit protective devices within the assembly.
B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified.
C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the ENGINEER, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. The low-voltage switchboard shall be UL labeled.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Copies of the equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information:
1. Instruction books and/or leaflets
2. Recommended renewal parts list
3. Drawings and information required by section 1.04.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cutler-Hammer
B. General Electric
C. Engineer approved equal
Low-Voltage Distribution Switchboards
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16429-3
2.2 RATINGS
A. The assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short-circuit rating as indicated on the Plans.
B. Voltage rating to be as indicated on the Plans.
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Switchboard shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly.
The sides and rear shall be covered with removable bolt-on covers. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide adequate ventilation within the enclosure.
B. All sections of the switchboard shall be rear aligned with depth as shown on the drawings. All protective devices shall be group mounted. Devices shall be front removable and load connections front accessible enabling switchboard to be mounted against a wall.
C. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means.
D. The switchboard shall be equal to Cutler-Hammer type Westinghouse Pow-R-Line C utilizing the components herein specified and as shown on the drawings.
E. The switchboard shall be UL listed.
F. The manufacturer shall determine and label the Flash Protection Boundary (FPB) and required Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
2.4 BUS
A. All bus bars shall be silver-plated copper. Main horizontal bus bars shall be mounted with all three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. Bus sizing shall be based on NEMA standard current density of 1000 amps per square inch.
B. Provide a full capacity neutral bus where a neutral bus is indicated on the drawings.
C. A copper ground bus (minimum 1/4 x 2 inch), shall be famished firmly secured to each vertical section structure and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard.
D. All hardware used on conductors shall be high-tensile strength and zinc-plated. All bus joints shall be provided with conical spring type washers.
2.5 WIRING/TERMINATIONS
A. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboard shall be furnished as required.
Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturers wiring diagrams. Wiring diagrams shall contain terminal and wire numbers.
B. Mechanical-type terminals shall be provided for all line and load terminations suitable for copper or aluminum cable rated for 75 degrees C of the size as indicated on the Plans.
C. Lugs shall be provided in the incoming line section for connection of the main grounding conductor.
Additional lugs for connection of other grounding conductors shall be provided as indicated on the Plans.
D. All control wire shall be type SIS, bundled and secured with nylon ties. Insulated locking spade terminals shall be provided for all control connections, except where saddle type terminals are provided integral to a device.
Low-Voltage Distribution Switchboards
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16429-4 All current transformer secondary leads shall first be connected to conveniently accessible short-circuit terminal blocks before connecting to any other device. All groups of control wires leaving the switchboard shall be provided with terminals blocks with suitable numbering strips. Provide wire markers at each end of all control wiring.
2.6 MOLDED CASE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Main and feeder protective devices shall be molded case circuit breakers with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics and shall have ground fault protection where indicated, or as required by NEC.
B. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make/quick-break overcenter switching mechanism that is mechanically trip-free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy, and arc extinction shall be accomplished by means of DE-ION arc chutes. A push-to-trip button on the front of the circuit breaker shall provide a local manual means to exercise the trip mechanism.
C. Circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Where indicated on the Drawings, circuit breakers shall be UL listed for series application.
E. Where indicated on the Drawings, circuit breakers shall be current limiting.
F. Circuit breakers 400 ampere frame and below shall be thermal-magnetic trip units and inverse time-current characteristics. Circuit breakers 600 ampere through 1200 ampere frame shall be microprocessor-based RMS sensing trip units. Circuit breakers 1600-ampere through 2500-ampere frame shall be microprocessor-based RMS sensing trip units.
G. On circuit breakers 800 amps and larger, a trip button and integral current reading display shall be provided H. Where indicated, provide circuit breakers UL listed for application at 100% of their continuous ampere rating in their intended enclosure.
I. Provide lamicoid labels for feeder circuit breakers that provide a descriptive name, as identified on the Drawings, of the load being served. Include circuit number and circuit breaker trip rating.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide shunt trips, bell alarms and auxiliary switches as shown on the contract drawings.
B. Circuit Breaker Energy Monitoring.
C. Centralized Local Monitoring.
D. Provide transient voltage surge suppression as specified in Section 16505 andindicated on the Plans.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
A. Key interlocks shall be provided as indicated on the Plans or required for safe equipment operation.
B. Control power transformers with primary and secondary protection shall be provided, as indicated on the Plans, or as required for proper operation of the equipment.
C. Each section of the switchboard shall be provided with a space heater, thermostatically controlled. Power for the space heaters shall be obtained from a control power transformer within the switchboard. Supply voltage shall be 120 volts AC.
Low-Voltage Distribution Switchboards
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16429-5
2.0 ENCLOSURES
A. Indoor NEMA 1 Enclosure
B. Outdoor NEMA 3R Enclosure
1. Outdoor enclosure shall be non-walk-in and meet applicable NEMA 3R UL requirements.
2. Enclosure shall have flat roof sloping roof downward toward rear.
3. Outer sections shall be the same widths as indoor structures, except each end of the outdoor assembly shall have an end trim.
4. The enclosure shall be provided with bolt-on rear covers for each section.
5. Doors shall have provisions for padlocking.
6. Ventilating openings shall be provided complete with replaceable fiber glass air filters.
7. Provide space heaters thermostatically controlled for each structure with adequate wattage to prevent the accumulation of moisture.
8. Power for space heaters, lights and receptacles shall be obtained from a control power transformer within the switchboard. Supply voltage shall be 120 volts AC.
2.10 NAMEPLATES
A. Engraved nameplates, mounted on the face of the assembly, shall be furnished for all main and feeder circuits as indicated on the Plans. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black characters on white background.
Characters shall be 3116-inch high, minimum. Nameplates shall give item designation and circuit number as well as frame ampere size and appropriate trip rating. Furnish master nameplate giving switchboard designation, voltage ampere rating, short-circuit rating, manufacturer's name, general order number, and item number.
B. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams.
2.11 FINISH
A. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchboard shall be properly cleaned and provided with a rustinhibiting phosphatized coating. Color and finish of the switchboard shall be ANSI 61 light gray.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 FACTORY TESTING
A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards.
1. The switchboard shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted, and tested at the factory. After assembly, the complete switchboard will be tested for operation under simulated service conditions to assure the accuracy of the wiring and the functioning of all equipment. The main circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 2200 volts for one (1) minute between live parts and ground, and between opposite polarities. The wiring and control circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 1500 volts for one (1) minute between live parts and ground.
B. The manufacturer shall provide certified copies of factory test reports.
Low-Voltage Distribution Switchboards
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16429-6
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall install all equipment per the MANUFACTURER'S instructions, Contract Documents, and National Electrical Code.
B. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of being moved into installation position and bolted directly to the floor without the use of floor sills provided the floor is level to 1/8 inch per 3-foot distance in any direction. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.
3.3 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. Provide the services of an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer to make site visits to supervise the field testing and installation to be performed by the CONTRACTOR. The manufacturer’s representative shall state in writing that the equipment has been correctly installed and tested.
B. Perform the following minimum tests and checks before energizing equipment:
1. Megger terminals and busses for grounds after disconnecting devices sensitive to megger voltage.
2. Inspect all mechanical and electrical interlocks for proper operation.
C. Perform any other tests recommended by the equipment manufacturer and other tests as described in this specification.
D. The manufacturer’s representative shall supply results of all factory and field tests in writing for submittal to the Engineer.
E. The manufacturer shall supply test results to confirm that the assembly design has been tested to substantiate conformance with the applicable ANSI and NEMA Standards.
F. Touch-up paint all chips and scratches with manufacturer supplied paint and leave remaining paint with CITY.
G. The CONTRACTOR shall perform field adjustments of the protective devices as required to place the equipment in final operating condition. Necessary field settings of devices, adjustments, and minor modifications to equipment to accomplish operational condition shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the CITY.
-END OF SECTION -
Disconnect Switches
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16440-1 SECTION 16440
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers electrical disconnecting switches.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents prior to installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty safety switches with a quick-make, quick-break operating mechanism, with full cover interlock, and indicator handle. The disconnect switches shall be furnished with fuses of the size indicated on the Plans. One set of spare fuses shall be furnished for each fused disconnect switch. Disconnect switches shall be NEMA type HD heavy duty construction, UL 98 listed.
B. Enclosures shall be rated NEMA 12 for indoor use, and NEMA 3R for outdoor use, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans.
C. Disconnect switch handle shall be padlockable.
D. Disconnect switches in the corrosive areas as indicated on the Plans, shall be NEMA 4X, 304 stainless steel.
E. Disconnect switches shall be as manufactured by Square D, Cutler Hammer, Allen-Bradley, General Electric, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Disconnect switches shall be installed as indicated on the Plans.
B. Provide grounding per NEC, and Section 16170.
- END OF SECTION -
Transformers – Dry-type
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16461-1 SECTION 16461
TRANSFORMERS - DRY TYPE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers dry type transformers used for low voltage, single and three phase, power distribution and lighting.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents prior to installation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ANSI C57.12.01, General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers B. NEMA ST 20, Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications C. UL 506, Standard for Specialty Transformers
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 DISTRIBUTION - LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING AND POWER
A. Transformers shall be premium high efficiency quiet type, and shall be installed where indicated on the Plans.
The primary winding of the transformers shall have two 2-1/2 percent taps above, and below normal.
B. The transformers shall have a BIL of 10 KV with a temperature class of 185 degrees C for transformers up to 25 KVA, and a temperature class of 220 degrees C for larger transformers.
C. The sound level shall not exceed 44 dBa measured at 5 feet from the transformer after installation. Core and coil assemblies 30 KVA and larger, shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolators, designed to reduce harmonics generated noise.
D. Transformers shall be types manufactured by Westinghouse, Hevi-Duty, or equal.
2.2 FERRO RESONANT ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS
A. Ferro resonant isolation transformers shall be provided where indicated on the Plans. Regulation shall be +3 percent for an input range of +10 percent. Common mode noise rejection shall be better than 120 dB with transverse mode noise rejection better than 60 dB. Voltage spike attenuation shall be better than 250:1.
B. Isolation transformers shall be as manufactured by Shape Magnetronics, Control Concepts, inc., or equal.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Transformers shall be installed as indicated on the Plans, and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. CONTRACTOR shall provide painted metal wall brackets, when required.
B. Grounding shall be provided per NEC, and Section 16170. - END OF SECTION -
Panelboards
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16470-1 SECTION 16470
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers electrical panelboards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and the Contract Documents prior to installation.
B. Panel layout with alphanumeric designation, branch circuit breaker sizes and types, AIC rating, bus sizes, and other characteristics.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NEMA PB-1, Panelboards
B. NEC
C. UL67, Panelboards
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS
A. Dead-front panelboards, including lighting distribution and control panels, shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the Plans. Buses shall be copper. Mounting and type of enclosures shall be as indicated on the Plans. Where not indicated, indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 12 and outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 4.
The minimum interrupting capacity of any device shall be as indicated on the Plans.
B. Protective devices shall be replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. Wire connectors shall be suitable for wire sizes indicated. Branch circuits shall be numbered as indicated on the Plans, and a complete typed circuit schedule shall be furnished under a transparent cover, and affixed to the panel. Phase busing shall be full height without reduction. Two hundred percent neutral bars shall be included on 120/208V, 3 phase, 4 wire panels only, and shall have suitable lug for each outgoing circuit requiring neutral connection. Spaces for future protective devices provided in lighting panels shall be bused for the maximum device that can be fitted into them.
C. Panelboards shall be finished with a primer, rust resistant phosphate undercoat and two coats of oven baked enamel with finish ANSI grey. Doors shall not uncover any live parts, and shall be hinged and have latches that require no tool to operate. Panelboard doors shall be lockable. Lock and two keys shall be furnished.
D. Each panelboard shall have, on the outside of the door, a lamicoid nameplate with 3/4 inch letters as specified elsewhere in these Contract Documents.
E. Panelboards shall be manufactured by Cutler Hammer, General Electric, or equal, F. Panelboards shall be service entrance rated where required, and as shown on the Plans.
Panelboards
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16470-2 PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Panelboards shall be installed as indicated on the plans and according to manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide grounding per NEC, and Section 16170.
C. CONTRACTOR shall verify all NEC clearance requirements prior to installation. - END OF SECTION -
Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16476-1 SECTION 16476
LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install, low voltage circuit breakers, as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents prior to installation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The breaker manufacturer's facilities shall be ISO 9001 certified.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Circuit breakers shall be manufactured by Cutler-Hammer, Allen-Bradley, General Electric, or equal.
B. Circuit breaker frame, trip, short circuit, and interruption ratings shall be as indicated on the Drawings, except that they shall be coordinated with the ratings of the equipment actually furnished, and shall be modified where necessary to suit the equipment. Circuit breakers to be used in motor control centers shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Where no indication of type is given on the Drawings circuit breakers protecting motors shall be motor circuit protectors, and other circuit breakers shall be molded case type.
C. Circuit breakers for mounting in motor control centers, or for separate mounting shall be of the air-break type, quick-make and quick-break, 600 volt, with number of poles as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Each pole of the circuit breaker shall provide inverse time delay, and instantaneous circuit protection.
E. The breakers shall be operated by a handle, and shall have a switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle, so that the contacts cannot be held closed against short circuits, and abnormal currents.
Tripping due to overload, or short circuit shall be clearly indicated by the handle automatically assuming a position between the manual ON and OFF positions. Latch surfaces shall be ground and polished. Poles shall be constructed so that they open, close, and trip simultaneously.
F. Breakers must be completely enclosed in a molded case. Non-interchangeable trip breakers shall have their covers sealed; interchangeable trip breakers shall have the trip unit sealed to prevent tampering. Ampere ratings shall be clearly visible. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy. Arc extinction must be accomplished by means of arc chutes. The minimum interrupting ratings of the circuit breakers shall be at least equal to the available short circuit current at the line terminals.
G. Circuit breakers shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 489.
H. Molded case circuit breakers shall be ambient temperature compensating that provides inverse time delay overload and instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a thermalmagnetic element. Compensation shall be accomplished by a secondary bi-metal that will allow the breaker to carry rated current between 25 degrees C and 50 degrees C with tripping characteristics that are approximately the same throughout this temperature range.
Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16476-2 I. On breakers with interchangeable, thermal, adjustable magnetic trip, the accessibility and position of the adjustment knob shall not be changed from those on the standard breaker.
J. Unless mounted in a switchboard, or panelboard, circuit breakers shall be housed in a NEMA rated enclosure as described elsewhere in these specifications.
K. Provide circuit breakers with shunt trip mechanisms where shown on the Drawings.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Circuit breakers shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and per manufacturer's instructions. - END OF SECTION -
600 Volt Fuses
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16477-1 SECTION 16477
600 VOLT FUSES
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers the requirements for protective fusing on this project. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install fuses and fuse holders per the Drawings and equipment manufacturers recommendations.
B. This specification includes the general requirements for various types of fuses whether they are shown on the Drawings or not. If fusing is required by codes or manufacturers recommendations, but not shown on the Drawings, this specification shall apply to the type of fusing provided by the CONTRACTOR.
C. Types of fuses specified in this section include the following:
1. Class L time-delay.
2. Class L fast-acting.
3. Class RK1 time-delay.
4. Class RK1 and Class J current-limiting.
5. Class RK5 time-delay.
6. Class K5 time-delay, noncurrent-limiting.
7. Class T current-limiting.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The fuse manufacturer's facilities shall be ISO 9001 certified.
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable provisions of UL 198D, "High-InterruptingCapacity Class K Fuses". Provide over-current protective devices which are UL-listed and labeled.
B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of fusible devices.
C. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI C97.1 "Low-Voltage Cartridge Fuses 600 Volts or Less".
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data on fuses, including specifications, electrical characteristics, installation instructions, furnished specialties and accessories in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and the Contract Documents. In addition, include voltages and current ratings, interrupting ratings, current limitation ratings, time-current trip characteristic curves, and mounting requirements.
1.5 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering fusible devices which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Bussmann, Gould-Shawmut, Reliance, or equal. 600 Volt Fuses
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16477-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average time-current and peak letthrough current characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, and constructed in accordance with published product information, and with industry standards and configurations.
2.2 CLASS L TIME-DELAY FUSES
A. Provide UL Class L time-delay fuses rated 600-volts, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting transformers, motors, and circuit-breakers.
2.3 CLASS L FAST-ACTING FUSES
A. Provide UL Class L fast-acting fuses rated 600 volts, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting service entrances and main feeder circuit-breakers.
2.4 CLASS RK1 TIME-DELAY FUSES
A. Provide UL Class RK1 time-delay fuses rated 600-volts, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting motors and circuit-breakers.
2.5 CLASS RK1 CURRENT-LIMITING FUSES
A. Provide UL Class RK1 current-limiting fuses rated 250-volts, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting circuit-breakers.
2.6 CLASS J CURRENT LIMITING FUSES
A. Provide UL Class J current-limiting fuses rated 600-volts, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating.
2.7 CLASS RK5 TIME-DELAY FUSES
A. Provide UL Class RK5 time-delay fuses rated 600-volts, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting motors.
2.8 CLASS K5 ONE-TIME FUSES
A. Provide UL Class K5 one-time fuses rated 250-volts, 60 Hz, with 100,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting non-inductive loads.
2.9 CLASS T FUSES
A. Provide UL Class T fuses rated 600-volts, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protection of physically small devices.
600 Volt Fuses
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16477-3 PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fuse types and sizes shall be as indicated on the Plans. Fuses shall be installed in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC) requirements and the manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install fuses in proper fuse holders.
C. Where fuses are installed in the motor starters, fuses shall be sized to match the actual motor full load current.
D. Where fuses are installed in disconnect switches at HVAC units, the fuse sizes shall be sized to meet the HVAC manufacturer's requirements.
E. Fuses for control transformers shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
F. Fuses shall be installed with the labels clearly visible.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prior to energizing fusible devices, test devices for circuit continuity and for short-circuits.
3.3 SPARE PARTS
A. Furnish 3 spare fuses of each size and type.
-END OF SECTION -
Motor Controllers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16480-1 SECTION 16480
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. A motor controller is any device or group of devices normally used to start and stop a motor by making and breaking the motor circuit current. The motor controller and devices that make up the motor controller shall be governed by items indicated on the Plans, or elsewhere within these specifications.
B. Types of motor controllers specified in this section include the following:
1. Combination.
2. Fractional HP manual.
C. This section applies to motor controllers rated 480 V and below.
1.2 CODE AND STANDARDS
A. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Articles 220, 250, and 430, as applicable to installation, and construction of motor controllers.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 70E, "Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace."
C. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 486A and B, and UL 508, pertaining to installation of motor controllers. Provide controllers and components which are UL-listed and labeled.
D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standard ICS 2, "Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays" and Pub No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)," pertaining to motor controllers and enclosures.
1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit maintenance data and parts list for each motor controller and component; including troubleshooting maintenance guide. Also, provide product data and shop drawings in a maintenance manual, in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data and installation instructions on motor controllers.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of motor controllers showing accurately scaled equipment locations and spatial relationships to associated motors and equipment.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit power and control wiring diagrams for motor controllers showing connections to electrical power panels, feeders, and equipment.
D. Submittal documents shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and other requirements of the Contract Documents.
Motor Controllers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16480-2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor controllers and ancillary components that comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation.
2.2 ELECTRONIC OVERLOAD RELAYS
A. Electronic overload relays shall be provided with the motor starters. The overload relay shall be a 3-pole solid state device that monitors all 3 phases of the motor current. The unit shall detect overcurrent, phase current imbalance, phase loss, and trip after an adjustable time from 3 seconds to 30 seconds.
B. The overload relays shall be field selectable to Class 10, 20 or 30, ambient temperature compensated, and shall have an LED trip indicator. The unit shall have a manual and automatic reset feature, and a normally closed contact for control.
C. Each module shall provide individual trip indication and reset for each trip condition, visible without opening the motor control center compartment door. Provide a normally open auxiliary contact for remote trip indication.
D. Solid state circuits shall be completely protected from damage arising from line transients and voltage spikes.
E. Electronic Overload Relays shall be equipped with TCP/IP or CIP communication protocol.
F. Electronic Overload Relays shall be as manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Cutler Hammer, or Engineer Approved Equal.
2.3 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS
A. Starters, Size 2 and larger, shall have arc quenchers on all load breaking contacts. Starters shall be suitable for the horsepower ratings specified. The CONTRACTOR shall verify the motor ratings, and coordinate the starter and overload trip ratings with the actual horsepower ratings of the motors installed. Extended overload reset buttons shall be mounted so as to be accessible for operation without opening the door of the enclosure.
Magnetic contactors shall be factory adjusted and shall be chatter free. Overload relays shall be electronic, as specified herein.
Starters shall be furnished complete with a 120-volt secondary control power transformer. Control circuit fuses shall be furnished both on the primary and secondary of the control circuit transformer. If there is no transformer, all live control power supply wires shall be fused.
D. Starters shall be designed to operate in ambient temperatures up to 600 C.
E. The minimum size starter shall be NEMA Size 1.
F. Magnetic Motor Starters shall be manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Square D, Cutler Hammer, or Engineer Approved Equal.
2.4 MANUAL STARTERS
A. Manual starters shall be rated for the motor load, and shall be equipped with built-in overloads.
B. Manual starters shall be provided with enclosures as indicated on the Plans, lockable handles that clearly indicate ON, OFF, and TRIPPED positions, pilot light, and positive, quick-make, quick break mechanisms.
Motor Controllers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16480-3 C. Manual Starters shall be manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Cutler Hammer, or Engineer Approved Equal
2.5 MOTOR PHASE FAILURE RELAY
A. The relay shall detect voltage values below an adjustable value, loss of phase, and phase reversal. The unit shall automatically de-energize the control circuits of the motors to be protected, when one or all three phase voltages drop below the set point. The unit shall have a nominal trip delay time of two seconds and a reset time of two seconds. The relay shall automatically reset upon restoration of the line voltage. Relays shall be MotorSaver, Time Mark Corporation, or Engineer Approved Equal.
2.6 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY
A. The motor protection relay shall be capable of the following as a minimum:
1. Phase loss
2. Low voltage (adjustable)
3. Phase reversal
4. Phase unbalance
B. The motor protection relay shall be equipped with the following as a minimum:
1. Adjustable trip delay (2 to 20 seconds)
2. Automatic reset
3. Transient protection (2500 volts for 10 ms)
C. Motor protection relays shall be set during the project startup according to the individual motor characteristics and application parameters. The motor protection relays for the motors with variable frequency drives shall be set as to prevent low voltage tripping.
D. The motor protection relays shall be MotorSaver Model 350, Time Mark Model 264, or Engineer Approved Equal.
2.7 SOLID STATE REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER
A. Furnish and install a solid-state reduced voltage starter (SSS) to provide motor soft start and soft stop, where indicated on the Plans. The starter shall be capable of operating with any standard NEMA design motor of the specified horsepower. The unit shall be self-contained, house the logic board, power switches, heat sinks, motor overload protection, control power transformer, and any applicable disconnect means in one enclosure.
B. Voltage rating to be 460V, 60Hz, 3 phase, +1- 20%.
C. Operating temperature shall be 0 degrees to 50 degrees C, 5 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing. Derate 33% for each 10 degrees C over 50 degrees C to a maximum of 70 degrees Celsius.
D. Built in overload protection shall shut down and disable the starter until reset.
E. There shall be three pairs of inverse parallel SCRs. Each SCR shall be rated to block 2.5 times the nominal line to line voltage. The SCRs shall be sized to handle locked rotor current: 6 times full load current for 10 seconds on a cold start at 50 degrees C.
F. The starter shall be installed as indicted on the Plans, and shall be supplied with properly sized input and bypass contactors, and controls as shown on the Plans.
Motor Controllers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16480-4 G. Adjustments and indicators shall be accessible from a digital keypad with LCD panel. Indications shall include control power on, motor on, motor starting, overload, motor on bypass, and current.
H. Power poles and logic assemblies to be removable as one piece assemblies. One logic assembly shall work in any size unit of a given line voltage. The logic assembly shall be conformal coated. The gate drive circuit shall be optically coupled for noise immunity and long life. The logic assembly and SCRs shall be noise immune per NEMA showering arc test for solid-state contactors.
I. The soft start unit shall be capable of voltage or current control. The voltage limit shall be adjustable from 30% to 80% of line voltage and the current control shall be adjustable from 200% to 600% of FLA. In the voltage control mode, the ramp time shall be adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds, and the unit shall have a soft stop feature, also.
J. The soft start shall have dry contact, form C, outputs available for internal faults, bypass contactor control, and run status.
K. Solid State reduced voltage starters shall be UL listed under UL508, and manufactured by Allen Bradley, Square D, Cutler Hammer, or Engineer Approved Equal.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
A. Install motor controllers in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices. Comply with applicable requirements of NEC, UL, and NEMA standards, to insure that products fulfill requirements.
B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code.
C. Install fuses, of sizes indicated, in each fusible disconnect switch, if any.
D. Prior to energizing motor controller equipment, check with ground resistance tester, phase-to phase and phaseto-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
E. Prior to energizing, check circuitry for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits.
F. Check rotation of each motor for proper direction.
G. Upon completion of installation of motor controller equipment and electrical circuitry, energize controller circuitry and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest to demonstrate compliance.
-END OF SECTION -
Motor Control Centers (MCC)
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16481-1 SECTION 16481
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install, ready to use, motor control centers for use as indicated on the Plans and specified herein.
B. Circuit breaker ratings, and modifications, shall be as indicated on the Plans.
C. MCP ratings, and modification, shall be as indicated on the Plans.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The motor control centers shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of Standards for Industrial Control No. ICS published by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. The following minimum information and drawings shall be submitted for review:
1. Plan, front, side views and overall dimension of each motor control center.
2. Weight.
3. Internal wiring diagram of each plug-in unit.
4. Internal wiring diagram of the motor control centers.
5. External connection diagram showing the wiring to the external controls and devices associated with the motor control center.
6. A one-line and a schematic diagram for each motor control center.
7. Bill of material list and Manufacturers Product Data.
8. Installation instructions.
9. Calculation of flash protection boundary and recommended personal protective equipment
10. Manufacturer's certification that the following items are capable of interrupting and/or withstanding the specified short circuit condition:
a. Bus bar bracing
b. Feeder tap units
c. Starter units
B. Product information shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
C. The CONTRACTOR or the equipment manufacturer shall determine and submit the calculation to the CITY of the arc Flash Protection Boundary (FPB) and the recommended Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC)
A. The motor control center fabricator shall be the manufacturer of the major components therein, such as circuit breakers and starters. Engineered motor control centers shall be by the component and housing manufacturer.
The manufacturer shall comply with equipment specifications contained elsewhere in these Contract Documents.
Motor Control Centers (MCC)
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16481-2 B. Each component, as well as the complete assembly, shall be constructed and tested in accordance with latest NEMA Standards for Industrial Control. The type of construction of the control centers shall be NEMA Class 11, Type B. Lifting eyes shall be provided on each section to facilitate handling.
C. Unit doors shall be mounted on the stationary structure and hinged on the side away from the vertical wireway. They shall be held closed with slotted thumbscrews.
D. Unit doors shall have positive action linkage with disconnect operating mechanism. Mechanism shall be designed so that it can be locked in the OFF position with up to 3 padlocks. When the handle is not padlocked, it shall be possible to open the door by releasing the door interlock with a small tool. The control units shall be of the plug-in type. When doors are closed, the operating mechanism shall clearly indicate the ON or OFF position of the disconnect, and the door interlock mechanism shall engage. The disconnect operating mechanism shall be designed against inadvertent operation when the door is open. Each plug-in unit door shall be provided with a nameplate, specified elsewhere herein, that indicates the circuit number and circuit name. The nameplate shall be attached to the door with brass or stainless screws.
E. It shall be possible to install up to 6 NEMA size one units in one vertical section. Units shall be completely enclosed with sheet steel. A small wireway shall be provided inside the unit, so all wiring can be laid in place without removing barriers or plates. Each vertical section that holds the units shall be rigidly formed of minimum 12 gauge, cold-rolled sheet steel. The vertical front-of-board-construction shall be supplied with minimum 20-inch depth.
F. Continuous horizontal wiring troughs shall be provided at both top and bottom of each section. These troughs shall line up to form a continuous wireway for the full length of the MCC. A large continuous, full-height vertical wiring trough shall be provided in the right side of each section.
G. All starter wiring, control, and power shall be terminated in terminal strips in this trough for size 2 and smaller starters. Size 3 and larger starters shall have control leads terminating on the terminal strips in the trough.
Terminal strips shall be split-type to facilitate wiring connections without disconnecting factory or field conductors. Terminal strips shall be rated to accept conductor sizes as indicated on the Plans.
H. Bus bars shall be silver plated copper, and shall be of the ampacity indicated on the Plans. Unit bus bar stabs shall insure high contact pressure. The vertical bus bars shall be effectively isolated from accidental contact by plastic insulating medium. Horizontal bus shall be silver-plated at every joint. The entire vertical bus shall be silverplated copper.
I. Bus bar supports shall be of high impact strength, non-carbonizing insulating material mounted on padded steel brackets and shall provide adequate dielectric strength and creepage distance. The bus structure shall be capable of withstanding short circuit current in accordance with NEMA standards, and as indicated on the Plans.
J. Horizontal bus amperage rating shall be as indicated on the Plans.
K. Each section shall be equipped with horizontal ground bus that shall be continuous across the MCC.
L. The MCCs shall be supplied as indicated on the Plans, and as specified herein and in accordance with NEMA Standard Pub. IS 1.1, latest edition. The MCCs shall be enclosed in NEMA Type 1 gasketed industrial use enclosures, unless otherwise shown. NEMA 3R enclosures shall provide sufficient depth for air conditioning units to be mounted on the end of the structures. If the MCCs contain VFDs or Solid State Starters that require cooling, their respective sections shall be louvered top and bottom, and fans shall remove heat from within the sections.
M. All metal surfaces and structural parks shall be given a phosphatizing, or equal, treatment prior to painting. The control centers shall then be given a gun-metal gray undercoat which is equal to zinc chromate. The exterior of the enclosure shall be finished in standard ANSI Grey.
Motor Control Centers (MCC)
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16481-3 N. Spaces for future combination starters shall have all the hardware necessary so that a future plug-in control unit can be installed without having to modify the vertical sections. The number of spaces for future control units shall be as indicated on the Plans.
O. Devices, such as, but not limited to, starters, circuit breaker, relays, timers, conductors, shall conform to other sections of these Contract Documents.
P. Provide customer metering instruments, as indicated on the Plans. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, metering units shall be electronic, capable of displaying volts line-to-line and line to-neutral, and amps per phase.
Q. The manufacturer shall determine and label the Flash Protection Boundary (FPB) and required Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
R. MCCs shall be as manufactured by Allen-Bradley, or Engineer Approved Equal.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The MCCs shall be erected in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and with the details specified herein.
B. Cables larger than No. 6 AWG, which hang from their vertical connections, shall be supported within 2 feet of the connection.
C. The motor overload relays shall be provided and sized based on the actual full load amperes of the motor connected to the starter. Motor overload relays shall be as manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Eaton, or Engineer Approved Equal
D. The motor circuit protectors shall be adjusted to the lowest settings that do not cause false tripping.
3.2 FIELD TESTS
A. MCCs shall be tested in accordance with Section 16000. - END OF SECTION -
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16482-1 SECTION 16482
LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, testing, troubleshooting, training and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install complete and operable variable frequency drives.
B. Coordination: Coordinate speed control, starting and acceleration torque requirements with the driven equipment. Submit an acceptance letter from the driven equipment and motor manufacturers stating that each variable frequency drive (VFD), will fully meet all starting and operating requirements of the respective driven equipment/motor combination. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating all VFD units with the driven equipment to obtain successful operation throughout the driven equipment speed range.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 16000 General Requirements.
2. Section 16481, Motor Control Centers.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below:
1. IEEE 519, Recommended Practice and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems.
2. ISO 9000, Quality Management Systems, Fundamentals and Vocabulary.
3. ISO 9001, Quality Management Systems, Requirements.
4. ISO 9002, Quality Systems, Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation and Servicing.
5. NEMA ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts.
6. NEMA ICS 7, Industrial Control and Systems Adjustable-Speed Drives.
7. NEMA MG 1, Motor and Generators.
8. UL 489, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.
9. UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Low-voltage variable frequency drive manufacturer shall have not less than five years of experience designing and regularly manufacturing and servicing substantially similar equipment to that required, and upon request, shall submit documentation of Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16482-2 not less than five installations in satisfactory operation for not less than five years each. Prototypes or newly introduced drive unit models will not be acceptable. b. Manufacturer shall be certified under ISO 9000, ISO 9001, or ISO 9002 for materials and equipment specified.
c. Manufacturer shall maintain factory trained and authorized service facilities within 100 miles of this project.
d. The manufacturer shall demonstrate, in writing, the Quality Assurance Program in use to certify key components. In-house manufacture of key components is desirable, and will be considered in evaluating acceptance.
e. For all required factory tests, low-voltage variable frequency drive manufacturer shall use a factory test facility that has calibrated its testing apparatus in the previous twelve months, and is staffed by qualified, experienced technicians. f. Approved Manufacturers:
1) Allen Bradley
2) Eaton
3) or Engineer Approved Equal.
B. Component Supply and Compatibility:
1. The VFD shall be 350 HP, 480V and equipped with a front end drive or active harmonic to meet the requirements of IEEE 519.
2. Drives specified under this Section employ a low switching frequency or pattern to minimize instantaneous rate of voltage change over time (dv/dt), and the adverse effects of potential bearing currents. Where alternate manufacturers are proposed, obtain manufacturer recommendations regarding bearing currents and provide equipment required at no additional cost.
3. Each low-voltage variable frequency drive shall be fully compatible with associated driven equipment and motors. Variable frequency drives shall be matched to specific load requirements for each system. Operation of variable frequency drive shall not overstress motor insulation.
4. To centralize responsibility and to ensure that all equipment is properly coordinated, variable drives specified under this Section shall be obtained from the Supplier of the associated driven equipment.
5. Similar components of drives associated with each system shall be products of a single manufacturer.
C. Certifications:
1. Certification of Compliance:
a. MANUFACTURER shall submit certification of compliance that the requirements of this Section shall be met by the MANUFACTURER. The certification shall be submitted on MANUFACTURER letterhead and shall be signed the person in charge of the product for this project. Certification by manufacturer's representatives shall not be acceptable without the signature of the manufacturer’s person in charge.
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16482-3 b. Certification shall be worded as follows:
1) "[Insert MANUFACTURER'S name] proposes to supply [Insert MANUFACTURER'S VFD name and model number] VFDs as specified herein, including all reference sections specified, and to supply all testing and services as specified in this Section. We have examined the Contract Documents and have a clear understanding of the requirements insofar as they affect the proposed products. We certify that the products shall be as specified herein, and shall operate satisfactorily under the conditions described in the Contract Documents and that the products meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.
_____________________________________ ________________
Authorized Signature & Title Date
c. List all exceptions, deviations or changes from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
d. Provide justification for exceptions, variations, deviations, or changes. CITY will determine whether exceptions, deviations, and changes are acceptable. Exceptions, variations, deviations, and changes may result in rejection of submittals and/or products.
e. Provide certification before submitting Shop Drawings for approval. Shop Drawings will not be reviewed prior to receipt of certification. f. Acceptance of certification shall not relieve responsibility for adequacy of all equipment and successful operation of equipment under all conditions specified herein. g. Submittal of certification shall not relieve equipment manufacturer, and Supplier of equipment to comply with Submittal requirements specified herein.
D. Tests:
1. Perform factory tests on each low-voltage variable frequency drive prior to shipping. Tests shall consist of simulating expected load to be driven by operating load through speed ranges specified for driven equipment, for minimum of two hours per drive unit.
2. Provide factory control and alarm tests on each drive unit by simulating each control signal and each alarm function to verify proper and correct drive unit action.
3. Perform specified tests in addition to standard factory tests typically performed.
E. Seismic Requirements: The Work shall comply with seismic requirements. Equipment manufacturer shall provide written certification of factory prototype test or shall use a shake table to show the completed assembly meets the seismic requirements for this project. Provide a seismic certificate stating the VFD unit has successfully passed the shake table test.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Dimensional information and construction details of enclosures. Enclosure details shall consist of exterior and interior front door with nameplate legends, interior door front and rear views, and terminal block layout.
b. Three-line power and control wiring diagrams.
c. Wiring diagrams showing the interconnection of conductors to all devices with terminal assignments.
d. Functional description of system operation.
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16482-4 e. VFD heat dissipation at full load, including heat rejection/cooling system. f. Fabrication, assembly and installation drawings, and wiring diagrams. Wiring diagrams shall comply with NFPA 79, Annex “D” standards. g. Complete list of components and catalogue identification. h. List of in-house manufactured key components.
i. Complete description of schematic and wiring diagrams and functional operation.
2. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer’s technical specifications, literature, illustrations, specifications and engineering data which indicate performance, dimensions, materials, size and weight.
3. Testing Plans:
a. Not less than thirty days prior to source quality control testing, submit descriptions of proposed shop testing methods, procedures, apparatus, and limitations. b. Not less than thirty days prior to field quality control testing, submit descriptions of proposed field testing methods, procedures, and apparatus.
B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Certificates:
a. Certification letters from low-voltage variable frequency drive manufacturer and motor manufacturer that the approved driven equipment has been reviewed and that variable frequency drive units and motors are compatible, and shall be provided in accordance with the Contract Documents and requirements of the driven equipment.
2. Source Quality Control Submittals:
a. Within five days of completing source quality control tests and inspections, submit test results with indication of whether all criteria of the Contract Documents for the specified equipment were met.
3. Field Quality Control Submittals:
a. Within five days of completing field quality control tests and inspections, submit test results with indication of whether all criteria of the Contract Documents for the specified equipment were met.
4. Manufacturer Reports:
a. Within five days of each visit to the Site by manufacturer’s representative, submit written report of reason for visit, problems encountered, solutions implemented, and remaining work.
5. Qualifications Statements:
a. Manufacturer, when requested by ENGINEER.
C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data:
a. Submit complete installation, operation and maintenance manuals including test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, list of recommended spare parts, and spare parts ordering information. b. Manuals shall include record drawings of control schematics, including point-topoint wiring diagrams. c. Include a listing of all programmable drive parameters and their settings at Substantial Completion. Submit parameters as both printed pages in the operations and maintenance manual and in electronic format on compact disc that can be directly uploaded to the drive in event of drive replacement or repair. d. Comply with Section 16000 General Requirements.
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16482-5 D. Maintenance Materials Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Spare Parts and Extra Stock Materials:
a. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and long-term storage spare parts and special tools for low-voltage variable frequency drives. Each set of spare parts and tools shall include manufacturer's recommended spare parts inventory for one year and include, at minimum, the following:
Item Quantity
1) Transistor and diode
modules with accessories
One per HP rating
2) Power supply module One per HP rating
3) Fans One per HP rating
4) Power fuses One set of each size and type used
5) Control power fuses Two sets of each size and type used 6) Pilot lights Two per ten of each type used
b. Furnish a list of recommended spare parts for an operating period of one year.
Describe each part, the quantity recommended, and current unit price. c. Conform with Section 16000 General Requirements.
1.5 SHOP TESTS
A. Each variable frequency drive (VFD) shall be tested at the manufacturer's facility.
B. In addition to the manufacturer's standard tests, each VFD, including all instruments, controls, solid state components, systems, and internal and external equipment which are a part of the VFDs shall be assembled, tested and thoroughly checked for proper operation of all functions and features. Simulated signals and loads shall be employed that shall simulate actual signals and loads, if they are a part of the final installation and are not included in this Section.
C. If the test results indicate that any VFD unit does not conform to specified and/or guaranteed performance, the unit shall be modified and retested, at no additional cost, until full compliance with specified and guaranteed performance can be demonstrated. CITY and/or ENGINEER shall be permitted to witness the retest.
D. No equipment shall be shipped until approval of all test reports.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery:
1. Deliver materials to the site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in- place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of the Work.
2. Conform with Section 16000 General Requirements.
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16482-6 B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading:
1. Packing:
a. Inspect prior to packing to ensure that assemblies and components are complete and undamaged.
b. Protect mating connections.
c. Cover all openings into enclosures with-vapor inhibiting, water-repellent material. d. Indoor containers shall be bolted to skids.
2. Upon delivery, check materials and equipment for evidence of water that may have entered equipment during transit.
3. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER of any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4. Handling:
a. Lift, roll or jack low-voltage variable frequency drive equipment into locations shown.
b. Variable frequency drives shall be equipped for handling required for installation.
Handle equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.
C. Storage and Protection:
1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all materials off the ground, using pallets, platforms or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
2. Store all electrical and electronic equipment, control panels, and like equipment and materials in heated buildings which have a concrete or wooden floor, a roof, and fully closed walls on all sides. Protect electrical and electronic equipment from contamination by dust, dirt and moisture. Maintain humidity at levels recommended by manufacturer for electric and electronic equipment.
3. Conform with Section 16000 General Requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE
A. System Performance:
1. Driven equipment to be controlled by a low-voltage variable frequency drive shall be provided with a customized variable frequency drive. Each drive unit shall include a variable frequency controller with associated controls for continuous speed adjustment and protection of the driven equipment. Output speed control of motor shall be continuous throughout speed range of two to 60 Hertz under variable torque load or constant torque as specified for the driven equipment.
2. Low-voltage variable frequency drives associated with each set of driven equipment shall be similar to each other.
3. Variable frequency drives shall be UL-listed or ETL-listed and designed, built, and tested in accordance with UL 489, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 7, and UL 508.
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16482-7
4. VFDs shall meet all requirements as outlined in the latest edition of IEEE 519 for total harmonic voltage and current distortion and as indicated in this Section. Individual or simultaneous operation of the VFDs shall not add more than three percent total harmonic voltage distortion while operating. Maximum allowable total harmonic current distortion limits for each VFD shall not exceed five percent as calculated and measured at the point of common coupling. The point of common coupling for all harmonic calculations and field measurements for both voltage and current distortion shall be defined as the nearest upstream motor control center or switchgear as applicable. A preliminary harmonic analysis must be submitted by the VFD manufacturer with Shop Drawings which includes all voltage and current harmonics up to the 99th harmonic; for this purpose cable lengths can be estimated on a conservative basis by the supplier. Compliance shall be verified with onsite field measurements of both the voltage and current harmonic distortion at the defined point of common coupling with and without the VFDs operating.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide low-voltage variable frequency drives by one of the following:
1. Approved motor control center manufacturer.
2.3 ENCLOSURE
A. As indicated on the plans, VFDs shall be motor control center mounted.
B. MCC section shall provide adequate cooling for components within and include positive ventilation.
C. Include thermal magnetic circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be in accordance with UL 489.
Switch handle shall be suitable for padlocking in the “open” position and be through-the-door type with handle height not exceeding six feet. Operation of switch shall be interlocked with door operation and shall remove the service supply from all internal components. Power devices shall be suitable for interrupting capacity of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. Include current limiting semi-conductor fuses where required for protection of solid state components.
D. MCC section shall include an operator interface for access to controller’s digital keypad and display. Mount on the front of the MCC section.
E. Equip with front with nameplates for identification of equipment and operating functions.
Nameplates shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems.
F. Equip with e terminal blocks suitably labeled for all internal and remote wiring requirements, plus twenty percent spare.
G. Conduit and cable entrances shall be from either top or bottom.
2.4 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLER
A. General:
1. Variable frequency controller shall be microprocessor-based, pulse width modulated design, suitable for operation on a 480-volt 3 phase, 60 hertz supply. Controller shall produce an variable AC voltage/frequency output to vary speed of driven equipment. VFDs operating motors 50 horsepower and larger shall be of the clean power type (18 pulse type or active front end type).
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16482-8
2. VFD power assembly shall be of the diode bridge rectifier front-end type to minimize electrical noise generation, shall operate at not less then 95 percent power factor over the full operating range.
3. Provide 90 Deg C rated power and control terminals.
4. Controller switching frequency shall be adjustable and allow operation at 5,000 Hertz or less. Controller technology shall include a switching scheme that reduces the dv/dt of output supply.
5. Equip controller with a three-percent DC bus reactor or input line reactor.
6. Controller’s solid state converter input section switching devices shall have 1600 volt PIV rating.
7. Overload rating of 110 percent variable torque, 150 percent constant torque for one minute.
8. RMS harmonic content of output current shall be less than five percent of fundamental current.
9. Able to withstand output terminal line-to-line short circuits without component failure.
10. VFD manufacturer shall acknowledge the approximate motor lead lengths shown on the plans. VFD manufacturer shall evaluate the application, include an appropriately sized output filter / long lead filter, determine switching frequency, etc. to accommodate the distance between the VFD and its motor. All components necessary for successful operation shall be provided and installed in each VFD’s motor control center cubicle/section. VFD cable shall be used between the VFD and the motor.
2.5 VFD CABLE
A. Variable Frequency Drive Symmetrical Type Cable:
1. Power Conductors: Three (3) annealed, tinned, stranded copper per ASTM B8, coated per ASTM B33.
2. Insulation: Black cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) per UL44.
3. Ground: Three (3) symmetrically placed bare annealed Class B stranded copper conductors per ASTM B3 and B8 whose cross-section areas shall add to equal the crosssection area of the power conductor size. The conductors shall be in direct contact with the shield and may be tinned or untinned.
4. Shield: Overall annealed 5 mil bare copper tape shield, 50% overlap for 100% coverage OR overall tinned copper braided shield and aluminum polymer tape for 100% coverage.
5. Jacket: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), oil resistant, per UL1277.
6. Voltage insulation: 2000V.
7. Cable size shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
8. Splices: Splices in VFD cables shall not be permitted.
9. Connections and Termination: cable and shield terminations and connections shall be in complete accordance with VFD, motor and cable manufacturers published requirements.
10. Manufacturers: General Cable CVTC-VFD; Southwire type TC VFD cable; or equal.
B. Operating Criteria:
1. Operating criteria shall be in accordance with the following:
a. Ambient temperature range of zero to 50 degrees C.
b. Operational humidity of up to 95 percent non-condensing. c. Altitude up to 1500 feet above sea level.
d. Nominal voltage of 480-volts plus or minus ten percent, three-phase, three-wire.
Include an under-voltage feature to allow trip-free operation down to 35 percent undervoltage.
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16482-9 e. Nominal frequency of 60 Hertz plus or minus three Hertz. f. Input power factor of 95 percent displacement power factor at all operating speeds. g. Efficiency of 96 percent at full speed and full load. h. Frequency accuracy: ±0.5 percent (at 25°C ±10°C).
i. Frequency range: 3 to 67 hertz, selectable by switch to 120 hertz (Except where otherwise indicated).
j. Volts per hertz ratio (V/HZ) adjustable for 3 to 60 hertz. k. For variable torque applications, overload capacity shall be one minute at 110 percent of continuous constant torque rated nameplate current. The inverter shall be designed to not be internally shutdown within the 110 percent overload operating range. For constant torque applications, overload capacity shall be one minute at 150 percent of continuous constant torque rated nameplate current. The inverter shall be designed to not be internally shutdown within the 150 percent overload operating range. l. Acceleration time: 1 to 3600 seconds adjustable.
m. Dynamic braking: 12 percent standard.
n. Ramp to stop: 1 to 3600 seconds adjustable.
o. Nominal horsepowers are indicated on the drawings, but the VFD shall be supplied with the necessary current ratings to properly operate the connected load. Coordinate with the approved manufacturer of the equipment / motor for required operating currents.
C. Features:
1. Controller shall have the following features:
a. Digital keypad and display module shall provide parameter setting, adjustments, and monitoring of control functions and faults. Display messages shall be in English. b. Integral Ethernet communication port shall be used to connect the VFD to the plant control system for status/monitoring using AB CIP protocol, as shown.
Communication port shall be included in the VFD electronics and shall be native to the drive. The use of signal converters or protocol bridges shall not be acceptable.
Control of VFDs shall be via hardwired connections with the plant control system. c. Independent acceleration/deceleration rates shall provide two to 600 seconds minimum.
When called to stop, motor shall decelerate to minimum speed before stopping. d. Power loss feature shall allow five cycle ride through capability for input supply interruptions.
e. Time delay automatic restart shall allow restart after controller fault conditions with programmable attempts.
f. Coasting motor restart shall allow controller to restart into a coasting motor without damage or tripping. Coasting motor restart feature shall allow switching from bypass mode to low-voltage variable frequency drive mode while operating, without shutdown. g. Isolated control inputs and outputs.
D. Protection:
1. Controller shall have protective functions as follows:
a. Input line metal oxide varistor transient protection. b. Electronic over-current trip instantaneous and inverse time overload protection with thermal memory retention.
c. Short circuit trip (hall-effect current transformer). d. DC bus overvoltage trip.
e. DC bus fuses.
f. Over-temperature trip temperature protection.
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16482-10 g. Current limit trip protection. Current limit circuitry shall automatically phase back voltage and frequency to decrease current to 110 percent of the drive rated capacity.
This shall be programmable based on motor full load amps. h. Input line over- and under-voltage trip protection with automatic restart on voltage recovery.
i. Momentary power failure trip (greater than ten milliseconds) with automatic restart. j. The drive units shall be able to withstand phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground shorts without damage to the drive unit.
k. Ground fault trip protection.
l. Fault trip conditions, except short time or momentary line voltage loss or line voltage momentary dip, shall lock out the control. Resetting of control after fault trip shall be manual by a door-mounted pushbutton.
m. Auto restart shall be a standard feature of the drive as follows:
1) Auto restart shall be enabled or disabled by programming or jumper selection. 2) On auto restart selection, the microprocessor shall determine, in the event of a fault, if a restart should be attempted. A restart shall be attempted under the following conditions:
a) Undervoltage (UP): Every time as soon as voltage returns to a safe level.
Fault relay shall not be activated.
b) Input Overvoltage (OPS): Every time as soon as voltage returns to a safe level. Fault relay shall be activated for the duration of the high voltage condition.
c) Overcurrent (OC): Five attempts in 30 seconds. After the fifth OC, the drive shall trip out and latch the fault relay.
n. A restart shall not be attempted for any other type of fault and the drive shall trip out immediately, activate the fault relay, and make the information available on the display until the drive is reset by pressing the reset button or removing control power. o. An undervoltage condition of less than 30 ms duration shall not affect drive operation. If main power falls below 85 percent of rated voltage for longer than 30 ms while control power is retained, the drive shall forcibly decelerate the load in an attempt to force a higher bus voltage through regeneration to allow the drive to "ride through" the undervoltage condition for up to 70 additional milliseconds for a total "ride through" of up to 100 ms for very high inertia loads. The manufacturer shall provide an option which allows control power to be maintained for 100 ms in the event of a power failure. If the drive drops out, it shall automatically restart upon restoration of full rated voltage, as previously described.
2.6 OUTPUT / LONG LEAD FILTER
A. General:
1. Provide output filter to prevent overstressing motor insulation system and to accommodate the approximate motor lead lengths shown on the plans.
B. Features and Criteria:
1. Filter shall be three-phase, 600-volt class motor-protecting type consisting of suitable values of inductance, capacitance and resistance to form a damped, low pass filter.
2. Filter shall be low-loss type specifically designed to reduce voltage wave form dv/dt. Filter shall allow cable lengths at minimum exceeding actual application distances with waveform resulting in voltage spikes at motor terminal that are within NEMA MG 1 Part 31 voltage stress levels.
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16482-11
3. Filter shall be suitable for mounting within low-voltage variable frequency drive cubicle / section.
2.7 GENERAL CONTROLS
A. General:
1. Equip each low-voltage variable frequency drive control system with relays, switches, fuses, indicating lights, and components required for a complete, functional system.
2. Variable frequency drive control shall be powered from a suitably sized and protected control power transformer. Transformer shall be sized to power motor space heaters, where applicable. Coordinate to obtain motor space heater wattages, if applicable. Motor controllers shall be provided with circuitry such that the motor space heater shall be energized when the motor is not energized
3. Variable frequency drive control shall include status indicators, controller, and system fault condition displays and operating controls. Provide status indicators and operating controls associated with drive control on front door of enclosure.
4. Control arrangement shall be such that variable frequency drive internal electronic supply voltage is isolated from field wiring.
B. Control and Pilot Devices:
1. The front of each VFD compartment shall contain each equipment’s operator devices and nameplates as substantially specified herein. Operator devices (pushbuttons, push-to-test LED pilot lights and switches) shall be heavy duty, 30.5mm, round, NEMA 4X noncorrosive type as manufactured by the approved variable frequency drive manufacturer.
Use control relays and timing relays as manufactured by the approved variable frequency drive. Control/timing relay contacts shall be rated for 10A at 120VAC/24VDC.
C. Wiring and Device Identification:
1. Provide control wiring and device identification for each low-voltage variable frequency drive:
a. Identify all control conductors with permanent type wire markers. Each wire shall be identified by a unique number and shall be attached to wire at each termination point. b. Identify each control device with permanent type marker. Each device shall be identified by a unique number and shall be attached to each device. c. Numbering system for each wire and control device shall be identified on wiring diagrams and shall reflect actual designations used in the Work.
2.8 VFDS INTEGRAL TO MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
A. General: The supplier of the motor control centers shall supply the integral VFDs as substantially specified herein. Each VFD shall be mounted in its own MCC cubicle containing all ancillary devices. The VFDs shall be factory wired and tested as a complete package, consisting of the VFD, logic control devices, operator interface devices, instruments and equipment as required for successful operation.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16482-12 A. Examine conditions under which the Work will be installed and notify in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions and in conformance with Laws and Regulations, and the Contract Documents.
B. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, install equipment on a 4 inch thick (nominal) concrete pad.
Pad shall extend approximately 3 inches on both sides and back and not more than 1 inch in front, with chamfering. Install support channels in concrete according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts shall be furnished in this Section.
C. Install equipment with sufficient access and working space provided for ready and safe operation and maintenance.
D. For installations against masonry walls, provide an insulation board, 1/4-inch minimum thickness, between equipment and wall for corrosion protection. Trim board neatly within outline of equipment.
E. Install all terminations, lugs, and required appurtenances necessary to properly terminate power supplies.
F. Install control wiring terminations and appurtenances necessary to complete installing control and monitoring devices.
G. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, replace all enclosure filters and frames provided under this Contract with new filters and frames, except expanded metal filter types. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, clean expanded metal filters.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests:
1. After installation, inspect, adjust, and test each low-voltage variable frequency drive at the Site. Testing and inspection shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and be performed by manufacturer’s factory-trained representative. Through CONTRACTOR, manufacturer’s factory-trained representative shall inform when equipment is correctly installed and ready to be energized. Do not energize equipment without permission.
2. Perform the following equipment inspection and testing and provide reports documenting procedures and results.
a. Verify all device settings and drive adjustments.
b. Inspect all mechanical and electrical interlocks and controls for proper operation. c. Test each drive through specified speed ranges and loads for a minimum of two hours per drive unit.
d. Test each drive by using actual control signal for remote and local operation. e. Test each drive alarm function.
f. Perform other tests recommended by equipment manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer Services:
1. Unloading and Installation: Manufacturer’s factory-trained representative shall be present during unloading of equipment and installation at equipment’s final location.
Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16482-13 Representative shall train installing personnel in advance in the proper handling and rigging of equipment. Services by manufacturer’s representative under this paragraph shall be at least one (1) eight-hour day at the Site.
2. Post-installation Check: Manufacturer’s factory-trained representative shall check and approve the installed equipment before initial operation. Manufacturer shall calibrate, set and program low-voltage variable frequency drives provided. Services by manufacturer’s representative under this paragraph shall be at least one (1) eight-hour day at the Site.
3. Manufacturer’s factory-trained representative shall adjust the system to final settings as specified in Article 3.4 of this Section.
4. Manufacturer’s factory-trained representative shall test the system as specified in Paragraph
3.3.A of this Section. Representative shall operate and test the system in presence of ENGINEER and verify that equipment is in conformance with the Contract Documents.
Services by manufacturer’s representative under this paragraph shall be at least one (1) eight-hour day at the Site.
5. Representative shall revisit the Site as often as necessary until all deficiencies are corrected, prior to readiness for final payment.
6. Provide services of manufacturer’s factory-trained representatives to correct defective Work within 72 hours of notification by CITY during the correction period specified in the General Conditions as may be amended by the Supplementary Conditions.
7. Replacement parts or equipment provided during the correction period shall be equal to or better than original.
8. Training: Provide services of qualified factory trained specialists from manufacturer to instruct CITY’s operations and maintenance personnel in recommended operation and maintenance of equipment. Training requirements, duration of instruction, and other qualifications shall be in accordance with Section 16000 General Requirements.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, when testing is acceptably completed and lowvoltage variable frequency drives are operating, manufacturer’s representative shall return to the Site and make final adjustments as required to each variable frequency drive furnished under this Section.
3.5 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION
A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that each VFD has been installed, adjusted, tested and functions in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents. Certification shall bear the typewritten name and signature of the person responsible for the work. Certification shall list each VFD, shall state each VFD has passed all tests, is in conformance with the Contract Documents and is ready to be placed into operation.
B. Provide four (4) copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. -END OF SECTION-
Lighting
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16500-1 SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install lighting fixtures.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:
1. National Electrical Code (NEC)
2. UL Standard #844, Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations
3. UL Standard #924, Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
4. UL Standard #1598, Luminaires
5. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES)
6. All applicable local lighting ordinances
B. Miscellaneous:
1. Lamps are identified for each luminaire in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Plans.
2. Lighting fixtures and electrical components:
a. UL labeled, complete with lamps.
b. Rated for area classification as indicated.
3. Location of lighting fixtures on Plans are intended to be used as a guide. a. Field conditions may affect actual locations.
b. Coordinate with other trades to avoid conflicts in mounting of fixtures and other equipment.
4. The quality standard is established by the fixture listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. a. This quality standard includes, but is not necessarily limited to construction features, materials of construction, finish, and photometrics.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The following shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review:
1. Acknowledgment that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.
2. Manufacturer's technical information on products to be used including photometric performance curves for the fixture and ballast data.
3. Acknowledgment that products submitted are UL or ETL listed.
4. When general data sheets constitute part of the submittal, identify the products to be used on this project.
5. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
6. Identification of fixtures by Lighting Fixture Schedule.
7. UL nameplate data (Voltage, wattage, etc.).
8. Finishes, colors, and mounting type.
9. Pole, fixture, and accessories.
10. Pole wind loading.
Lighting
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16500-2 B. CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings, manufacturer's data sheets, and a complete wiring diagram detailing all connections to the electrical system in accordance with Section 16000, and other requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Lamps shall be manufactured by RAB, General Electric, North American/Phillips, Sylvania, or equal.
B. Lighting fixtures shall be provided as indicated on the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Plans.
C. Lighting ballasts shall be manufactured by General Electric, Advance, Jefferson, Universal, Bodine, Lithonia, or equal.
D. Light poles shall be as indicated on the Plans. Include base template, anchor bolts, cadmium-plated hardware and pole grounding lug, handhole, anchor base and bolt covers. Pole foundations shall be as indicated on the Plans.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Lamps:
a. See lighting fixtures specified on Electrical Plans for wattage, voltage and number required.
2. All Fixtures:
a. There shall be no live parts normally exposed to contact. b. When intended for use in wet area, mark fixtures "suitable for wet locations." c. When intended for use in damp areas, mark fixtures:
"suitable for damp locations" or "suitable for wet locations." d. In wet or damp area, install fixtures so that water cannot enter or accumulate in the wiring compartment, lampholder, or other electrical parts.
e. Gasket seals: Urethane foam
f. Diffusers: UV stabilized acrylic plastic
3. Underground wiring:
a. Provide all wiring runs with separate green grounding conductor. b. Ground all pole bases.
4. Pole wiring from base to ballast:
a. No. 12 type XHHW.
b. Each phase shall be protected by a 30A, 600V, type Tron waterproof fuseholder, Bussman "Limitron" type fuse, size rating 3-times load current.
B. Compact Fluorescent and Fluorescent Lamps:
1. Rapid start
2. Cool white (F32T8141 K-85CRI and F96T12I41 K-70CRIIHO/ES) C. LED Lamps:
1. Bulb finish: Clear
2. Any burning position
D. Furnish a minimum of 2 lamps, or ten percent spare lamps of each type and wattage, whichever is greater.
Lighting
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16500-3
2.3 FIXTURES
A. Compact Fluorescent and LED Lighting Fixtures:
1. Ballast:
a. Rapid start, high power factor type
b. CBM/ETL certified
c. Sound rating A
d. Two internal automatic-resetting thermal switch devices for coil and capacitor
2. Internal wiring: AWM, TFN or THHN
3. Channel and end plates: 22 GA steel
4. Steel door frame and socket track: 20 GA steel
5. Channel cover: 24 GA steel
6. Emergency ballast:
a. Integral rechargeable nickel-cadmium battery, battery charger, and automatic transfer circuitry. b. Charging indicator light.
c. Test Switch.
d. Provide a minimum of 900 lumen output for 90 minutes upon loss of normal power. e. Mounted integral to the fixture.
f. UL 924 listed.
7. Provide fixtures with emergency ballasts with permanent caution labels warning that the fixture is fed from an unswitched source.
a. Provide emergency ballast also with a similar caution label.
B. HID Lighting Fixtures:
1. Ballasts for high pressure sodium lighting fixtures:
a. Type: Regulating
b. Ballast design center variance: Maximum 5 percent from rated lamp wattage. c. Lamp wattage regulation spread at the lamp voltage: Maximum 10 percent for +/-10 percent line voltage variation.
d. Ballast primary current during starting not to exceed normal operating current. e. Lamp current crest factor: Maximum 1.8 for +/-10 percent line voltage variation at any lamp voltage, from nominal through life.
f. Power factor shall not drop below 90 percent for +/-10 percent line voltage variations at any lamp voltage, from nominal through life.
g. Capacitor variance: Tolerance of +/-6 percent which will not cause more than a +/-8 percent variation in regulation throughout rated lamp life for nominal line voltage. h. Capable of operation with an open circuit condition for a maximum of 6 months without significant loss of ballast or starting circuitry life.
2. Ballasts for metal halide mercury vapor lighting fixtures:
a. Type: Auto-regulator
b. Voltage input range: +/-10 percent
c. Lamp regulation spread: 20 percent maximum
d. Power factor: 90 to 95 percent
e. Input voltage dip (4sec.): 40 to 50 percent
f. Crest factor of lamp current: 1.6 to 2.0
3. Ballasts for exterior HID lamps:
a. UL approved
b. High power factor designed for -20 Deg F temperature starting Lighting
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16500-4
4. Fixtures for non-hazardous locations:
a. Type: Industrial low bay
b. Ballast housing: Die-cast
c. Filter: Activated charcoal
d. Refractor: UV stabilized molded acrylic
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRIC DEVICES
A. Photoelectric Control Units shall meet the following requirements:
1. Cadmium sulfide photocell
2. Aluminum weatherproof enclosure
3. 30 amp rated contacts
4. 120-volt AC power
5. 5.The Photoelectric control unit shall be Tork Model 2100, or equal.
B. Motion Sensors shall meet the following requirements:
1. 110 degrees field of view, 60 foot range
2. Adjustable time setting from 15 seconds to 15 minutes
3. Operating temperature of -20 to + 130 degrees F.
4. Complete outdoor, weather proof sensor with complete mounting hardware
5. UL listed
6. The motion sensor(s) shall be manufactured by Leviton Model 50500-H or equal.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install lamps in all luminaires.
B. Replace all failed fluorescent, incandescent, metal halide, mercury vapor and high pressure sodium lamps with new lamps prior to final acceptance by CITY.
C. Surface and flush mounted fixtures shall be solidly connected to a junction box. Suspended fixtures shall be hung utilizing pendant mounting or stainless steel chains and hooks. Each suspended fixture, shall be electrically connected by a length of Type SO flexible cord. 3 conductor No. 14 AWG, minimum, with a twist-lock receptacle mounted in an individual junction box. Plugs and receptacles shall be as manufactured by Hubbell, General Electric Company, or equal.
D. Provide mounting brackets and/or structural mounting support for fixtures. 1. Do not support fixture from conduit system. 2. Do not support fixture from outlet boxes.
E. Install with approved mounting hardware following manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Pole mounted fixtures shall be mounted on steel or aluminum poles as indicated on the Plans. All metal poles shall be bonded to the facility ground system. Poles shall have adequate handholes and weatherproof receptacles where indicated.
G. All anchor bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel. CONTRACTOR shall paint all steel poles with aluminum paint or other color in accordance with these Contract. Documents.
Lighting
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16500-5 H. Fixture mounting heights and locations indicated on the Plans are approximate and are subject to revision in the field where necessary to avoid conflicts and obstructions.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Wipe all lighting fixture reflectors, lenses, lamps, and trims clean after installation and prior to acceptance of Project by CITY.
-END OF SECTION -
Static Uninterruptible Power Supply
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16611-1 SECTION 16611
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers the requirements for uninterruptable power supplies (UPSs) to be provided as shown on the Plans.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, Section 16000, and the Contract Documents prior to installation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 250
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The UPS equipment shall be manufactured by Powerware, or equal.
B. The UPS shall be sized for a minimum of 30 minutes of backup power for its rated load. The rated load shall be equal to or greater than the connected load.
C. The UPS shall be a line-interactive type, consisting of a ferroresonant or linear transformer, battery charger, batteries, inverter, and microprocessor control. The batteries shall be maintenance free, premium type.
D. The UPS shall pass lightning and surge protection ANSI/IEEE C62.41 standards, Category A and B. The UPS shall be UL 1449 listed.
E. The output waveform shall be a pure sine-wave with less than 5% total harmonic distortion on the inverter.
F. The UPS shall have a digital display for load-dependent runtime, volts in, volts out, battery voltage, percent loading, and alarm codes.
G. The UPS shall operate between 0 and 40 degrees C, at a minimum of 95% efficiency on-line.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install the UPS equipment in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations.
B. The UPS shall be provided with a 2 year parts and factory service warranty. - END OF SECTION -
Electrical Controls, Relays, and Alarms
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16902-1 SECTION 16902
ELECTRICAL CONTROLS, RELAYS, AND ALARMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Pushbutton and Selector Switches
2. Relays
3. Alarms
4. Intrinsic Safety Barriers
5. Wireways
6. Watthour Transducers
7. Elapsed Time Meters and Time Clods
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Related Sections:
1. Section 01300 – Submittals
2. Section 16000 – General Electrical Requirements
3. Section 16160 – Enclosures
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NEMA ICS 1: Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements.
B. NEMA ICS 2: Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600V.
C. NEMA ICS 6: Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures.
D. NEMA ST 1: Specialty Transformers (Except General-Purpose Type).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Data: a complete list of equipment and material including manufacturer's descriptive data and technical literature, performance charts, catalog cuts and installation instructions, spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified. The data shall include a complete Bill of Materials.
B. Drawings: containing complete wiring and schematic diagrams, control diagrams, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout, anchorage, support and appurtenances of equipment and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and operations.
C. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Contract Documents, and NEMA ICS 1 specifications indicating control panel layouts, wiring connections and diagrams, dimensions, support points.
Electrical Controls, Relays, and Alarms
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16902-2
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit record documents in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Accurately record actual locations of control equipment. Revise diagrams included in Drawings to reflect actual control device connections.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation data in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Include instructions for adjusting and resetting time delay relays, timers, and counters.
C. Submit maintenance data in accordance with the Contract Documents.
D. Include recommended preventative maintenance procedures and materials.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES
A. Pushbuttons, pilot lights and selector switches shall be of the full size, heavy-duty industrial, oil tight, 120 volt, with interchangeable pilot lights, plug-in construction, double break silver contacts, chrome plated lock rings, with modular contacts, and NEMA rating equal to that of the enclosure on which devices are installed. All components shall be flush mounted on front of panel, unless otherwise noted.
B. Provide individual legend plates for indication of switch, pushbutton, and light function (e.g., Open, Closed, Hand-Off-Auto). A list shall be submitted for review and approval C. Pilot lights shall be high intensity LED type. Pilot lights shall have clear lenses and LED lamps colored as shown on the Plans. Common, remote push-to-test circuitry shall be provided for each control panel to simultaneously test all indicating lights on the panel using a single pushbutton when there are 10 or more lights on the panel. Control panels with less than 10 lights shall utilize individual push-to-test lights and control circuitry.
D. Pushbuttons shall be maintained or momentary as required and as shown on the Drawings. Provide extended head pushbutton for all stop functions, mushroom head for emergency stop functions, and flush head pushbuttons for all other functions. Where indicated on the Drawings pushbuttons shall be illuminated type.
Provide locking mechanism for all lock out functions. Selector switches shall have black knob operator, be maintained contact type unless noted otherwise, number and arrangement as required to perform intended functions specified but not less than one double pole, double throw, double break contact per switch. Contact rating shall be compatible with AC or DC throughput current of devices simultaneously operated by the switch contact but not less than 10 amperes resistive at 120 volts AC or DC continuous.
E. Potentiometers shall be provided with operators and resistive elements of the type and quantity indicated on the Drawings and as required with legend plates indicating percent of span.
F. The above devices shall be manufactured by Allen Bradley, General Electric, or equal.
2.2 RELAYS
A. Timing relays shall be heavy duty, 120V A.C., 10 amps, solid state design, poles as required per application, - 10 degrees C. to +60 degrees C, have timing repeatability of ±2.0% of setting, and be UL listed. The range shall be determined from the control descriptions and or schematic drawings. Provide mounting accessories, as required. The timing relays shall be manufactured by Allen Bradley, Cutler Hammer, or equal.
Electrical Controls, Relays, and Alarms
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16902-3 B. Control relays shall be of the plug-in socket base type with dust-proof plastic enclosures, with silver-cadmium oxide contacts rated 120-V ac, 10 amperes, with contact arrangement and operating coils of the proper voltage as required by the control circuit sequence. Relays shall have indicating lamp to show energized state. Each relay shall have a minimum of two double pole, double throw contacts, or as required. Control relays shall be Allen Bradley, Cutler Hammer, or equal.
C. Alternating relays shall be UL listed, 120 VAC, with contacts rated for 10 amperes at 120 VAC, life expectancy of 100,000 operations, load indicating LEDs, and switch for load locking and load selecting options.
Alternating relays shall be manufactured by TimeMark models 261, 271, and 471, and Diversified Electronics model ARA for duplex, triplex, and quadplex alternators.
2.3 ALARMS
A. Audible alarms shall be UL listed, 120 VAC, with solid state circuitry, vibrating horn, non-metallic corrosion resistant housing, with required mounting hardware, suitable for outdoor use capable of producing 100 dB at 10 feet. The audible alarm shall be manufactured by Federal Signal model 350, Edwards model 870--EX, or equal.
B. Beacons for interior and/or exterior locations shall be rated NEMA 4X, flashing type (90 times per minute, minimum) with a red lens. Beacons shall be as manufactured by Federal Signal, Model 225XL, or equal.
2. 4 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS
A. Intrinsic safety barriers shall permit connection of devices located in a hazardous area to other devices located in a safe area. Intrinsic safety barriers shall be EMC compliant, 10 to 35 V dc, 35 mA output current, hazardous area terminals identified by blue labels, terminals accommodating conductors up to 12 AWG, ambient temperature rating of -20 to +60°C. The intrinsic safety barriers shall be manufactured by Allen-Bradley Bulletin 937, or equal.
2.5 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be PVC, snap-in slot design, with non-slip cover. Safe area wireways shall be light gray and marked "Safe Area Wiring." Hazardous area wireways shall be intrinsic blue and marked "Hazardous Area Wiring." The wireways shall be manufactured by Panduit Corporation, or equal.
2.6 WATTHOUR TRANSDUCERS
A. Watthour transducers for active or reactive power shall be DIN rail and surface mount, single phase or three phase with balanced or unbalanced load, electrically isolated input and output signals, 4 to 20 mA output signal, 0-10 mA to 0-10 A input current, 0-10 V to 0-600 VAC input voltage, 16-500 Hz selectable frequency. The watthour transducers shall be manufactured by Sineax model PQ502, or equal.
2.7 ELAPSED TIME METERS AND TIME CLOCKS
A. Elapsed time meters shall be self-powered, non-reset, solid state counter which provides silent, accurate and noise immune operation. Elapsed time meters shall require no external power, five year minimum battery life, 120 VAC power, accessories for panel mounting, nameplate below LCD display reading "HOURS", liquid crystal display with 6 digits approximately 2 inches high with 50,000 hour minimum display life and indication of sufficient battery power. The elapsed time meters shall be manufactured by Durant, Automatic Timing and Controls a Division of Sycon Corp., or equal.
B. Time clocks shall be microprocessor based, have 24 hour time control, up to 24 operations per day, programmable from panel face keys, skip-a-day feature allowing schedule to be skipped for one to seven days, SPDT switch contact rated at 15 amps at 120 V AC, with battery carryover to maintain time and program during power outage for 275 hours. The time clocks shall be manufactured by Tork, Paragon Electric Company, or equal.
Electrical Controls, Relays, and Alarms
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16902-4 PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasteners shall be type 304 stainless steel.
B. Install devices in strict accordance with NEC requirements and per manufacturers recommendation.
C. Coordinate with other trades as necessary during installation of these devices.
3.2 ACCEPTANCE
A. All installations are subject to evaluation in accordance with NEC requirements and manufacturers recommendations. CONTRACTOR shall remove the unacceptable work and correct work at no charge to CITY.
- END OF SECTION -
Programmable Logic Controllers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16903-1 SECTION 16903
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers the programmable logic controller (PLC) used for control and monitoring, as indicated on Plans.
B. System control logic and human-machine interface (HMI) programming and software shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR’S programmer. The PLC system hardware, including, but not limited to, the PLC operation, OIT, power supplies, and internal wiring, shall be Factory tested and certified operational as a system, prior to shipment to the job site. The Factory testing shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER's representative.
C. Provide software support and debugging time for one qualified instrument technician for a period of thirty (30) days after start-up of the equipment under PLC control to assist the CITY'S integration team.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall include the following:
1. Manufacturers data on electrical characteristics, capabilities and physical properties including:
a. Catalog cut sheets for all control panel components
b. Control panel layout drawings with Bill of Materials c. Elementary diagrams
d. Point-to-point wiring diagrams
e. Interconnection diagrams
f. Heating/cooling calculations
g. Catalog cut-sheets for all items mounted in the control panel h. Seismic calculations
i. Electronic Copies
2. Wiring diagrams showing connections to all devices; input and output (I/0), analog and discrete. The wiring diagrams shall indicate point to point wire numbers, terminal block numbers, and space for the I/O address point to be used in the PLC programs. I/O addresses will be provided by the CONTRACTOR'S programmer.
3. PLC and OIT application software. The Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 and Factory/Talk View Application software shall effect all requirements specified in these Specifications. The software shall be fully documented. It shall include annotated ladder diagram with rung and address comments. PLC and OIT application software submitted shall include the following, as a minimum: 1) Electronic copy of PLC application source code (.acd files) software complete with annotated rung comments. The electronic copy shall be installed on a DVD or USB Flash Drive. 2) Electronic copy of OIT application software source code (.apa files) including all control and alarm displays. The electronic copy shall be installed on a DVD or USB Flash Drive.
1.3 MANUFACTURERS
A. PLC hardware shall be manufactured by Allen Bradley CompactLogix or ControlLogix processor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
A. PLCs shall be furnished with hardware and software necessary to monitor and control equipment, as listed in the Specifications, and shown on the Plans. Each field input and output shown as an I/O Point shall be Programmable Logic Controllers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16903-2 connected as per manufacturer’s recommendations. Additionally, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the hardware, software, and installation necessary for connecting additional future equipment as indicated on the Plans. The type of field input and output shall be defined as follows:
1. Analog inputs and outputs (4-20 mA DC).
2. Discrete inputs (dry contact).
3. Discrete outputs (24 VDC, form "C" relay)
4. Key-in switch on control panel CP-1
B. The ladder logic control programs shall reside in the PLCs. The program shall consist of software relay and attendant logic control. Control loop and logic flow diagrams shown on the Plans, or Control Descriptions listed herein, shall be fully implemented.
2.2 INPUT/OUTPUT MODULES
A. I/O modules for local I/O rack shall match processor – CompactLogix I/O. For remote I/O shall be FlexLogix I/O modules. Other types of remote I/O modules require ControlNet and the NRSD has standardized on Ethernet. Each analog input, analog output and digital input shall be fused. All spare I/O should be wired to field terminal blocks. See Table at end of this section.
B. Flex Logix analog and digital I/O modules should be powered from separate redundant power supplies. The power supply should be sized based on the number of modules and other devices being powered. Compact Logix local I/O racks each need its own power supply.
C. The I/O rack system shall be field expandable to the maximum I/O capacity of the CPU, without modifications of the processor. Blank, or empty slots shall have covers, or filler plates installed.
2.3 ETHERNET CABLE SELECTION
A. For cable runs less than 300 feet, use copper cables. For anything greater than 300 feet, use fiber-optic cables.
Ethernet switches shall be Cisco IE4000 series. When fiber-optic cables are used, a patch panel needs to be installed, preferably in the control panel.
2.4 CONTROL PANEL SIZING
A. Verify that the conduit window in the panel is adequate for the number and size of the conduits terminated at the panel.
2.5 CONTROL PANEL SPACING
A. Verify that there is adequate clearance around the control panel for maintenance.
2.6 HMI SELECTION
A. Minimum 8 GB Ram, multi-touch display minimum 17” diagonal, NEMA 4X SS Bezel, processor 4 cores
1.91 GHz minimum, minimum 500 GB SSD, 2 Ethernet ports, fan-less. Windows 10 Professional embedded software is not acceptable.
2.7 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. For control panels with minimal external conductors, terminal blocks shall be Square D Class 9080, Type KCB-1; Allen-Bradley Cat. No. 1492-CD3; or approved equal. For control panels with large amounts of external conductors, compact terminal blocks are acceptable. The compact terminal blocks shall be AllenBradley 1492-J4, or equal.
2.8 UPS
Programmable Logic Controllers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16903-3 A. UPS shall be Allen-Bradley 1609 Series, i.e., 1609-U500NH or approved equal.
2.10 POWER FAILURE RELAY
A. Power Failure Relay shall continuously monitor the 480 volts 3-phase 60 Hz power at the low voltage switchboard. Power monitor has one output relay with one form-C contact. The unit shall be a Time Mark Corp Model A257B Catalog Number 98A00445-03 with 8 pin octal socket for DIN rail mounting Agastat Part Number BDS08SS or equal.
2.13 POWER FAILURE SHUTDOWN AUXILIARY TIMING RELAY
A. True power off delay timing relay with 24 Vac/dc coil and one form-C time delayed contact, adjustable time delay range of 0.1 to 600 seconds. One time delay relay for each VFC. The unit shall be Idec Part number GT3F-1AD24 with 8 pin octal socket for DIN rail mounting Agastat Part Number BDS08SS or equal.
2.14 CONTROL (AUXILIARY) RELAYS
A. General purpose industrial relay, plug-in type with screw terminals. 120 Vac or 24Vdc coils as required by the drawings. Each relay shall have at least two form-C contacts rated 10 A at 120 Vac, and shall be equipped with an indicator lamp. The unit shall be Allen Bradley 700 series or equal. Relays in the MCC shall be Allen Bradly heavy duty series or approved equal.
2.15 STORAGE AND DOWNLOADING OF PLC PROGRAMS
A. The PLC shall be programmable through a Network Port, connected to a personal computer through a standard cable. The PLC programming software shall be provided with the user's manuals, original diskettes, and licensing agreement for registration by the CONTRACTOR. Cables, adapters, connectors, or other hardware required to connect to the PLC shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.
B. The PLC programming software shall enable the user to write the PLC program on-line or off-line. The software shall include utilities to manage PLC program files, document and print the programs, configure the programming environment, monitor and force the PLC addresses while on-line, and configure the PLC memory and addressing structure.
TABLE FOR PLC COMPONENTS
CompactLogix Non-Redundant System (Notes 1 and 3)
Processor 1769-L33ER
Redundancy Module -
Processor Ethernet Module -
I/O Ethernet Module (Remote I/O) 1794-AENT
Chassis -
Chassis Power Supply Note 1
Local Digital Input 1769-IQ16
Local Digital Output 1769-OB16
Local Analog Input 1769-IF8
Local Analog Output 1769-OF4
Remote Digital Input 1794-IB16 (Note 2)
Remote Digital Output 1794-OB8 (Note 2)
Remote Analog Input 1794-IE8 (Note 2)
Remote Analog Output 1794-OE4 (Note 2)
Terminal Base 1794-TB3 (for remote I/O)
Notes:
1. Each local rack, including the processor chassis, requires its own power supply (1769-PA2 or 1769- PA4).
2. I/O modules should be powered from redundant power supplies (1606-XL series).
Programmable Logic Controllers
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16903-4
3. Specify appropriate end caps.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. PLC shall be installed as indicated on the plans and according to the manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 START UP AND TESTING
A. Upon completion of the installation, start-up shall be performed by a factory-trained manufacturer representative. Operating and maintenance instruction books shall be supplied upon delivery of the unit and procedures explained to operating personnel.
B. The PLC program and I/O shall be thoroughly tested. Each input and output signal shall be tested for correct indication and control function. The CONTRACTOR shall assist in the demonstration of the operation of the PLC control logic with simulated inputs, before the entire system is started, and run in automatic mode.
3.3 TRAINING
A. Provide four (4) hours of training on the control system hardware. Instruction shall include a description of the control system hardware, hardware operation, and troubleshooting.
3.4 SPARES
A. Furnish a minimum of one (1) spare I/O module of each type and one (1) power supply module of each size and type used.
B. Furnish twelve (12) fuses of each type and size, used in the power supply and I/O modules. - END OF SECTION -
Electrical Testing
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16950-1 SECTION 16950
ELECTRICAL TESTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide testing as specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. D665 - 19, Standard Test Method for Rust-Preventing Characteristics of Inhibited Mineral Oil in the Presence of Water.
b. D877 / D877M - 19, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes.
c. D923 - 15, Standard Practices for Sampling Electrical Insulating Liquids. d. D924 - 15, Standard Test Method for Dissipation Factor (or Power Factor) and Relative Permittivity (Dielectric Constant) of Electrical Insulating Liquids. e. D971 - 20, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Insulating Liquids Against Water by the Ring Method.
f. D974 - 14, Standard Test Method for Acid and Base Number by Color-Indicator Titration.
g. D1298 - 12b(2017), Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density, or API Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products by Hydrometer Method. h. D1500 - 12(2017), Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of Petroleum Products (ASTM Color Scale).
i. D1524 - 15, Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of Used Electrical Insulating Liquids in the Field.
j. D1533 - 20, Standard Test Method for Water in Insulating Liquids by Coulometric Karl Fischer Titration.
k. D1816 - 12(2019), Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using VDE Electrodes.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a. 43-2013, Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Electric Machinery.
b. 48-2020, Standard for Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating-Current Cable Terminations Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 500kV. c. 81-2012, Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System.
d. 95-2012, Recommended Practice for Insulation Testing of AC Electric Machinery (2300 V and Above) with High Direct Voltage.
e. 400-2012, Guide for Field Testing and Evaluation of the Insulation of Shielded Power Cable Systems Rated 5 kV and Above.
f. 450-2020, Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications. g. C2-2017, 2017 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). h. C37.20.1-2015, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage (1000 Vac and below, 3200 Vdc and below) Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear.
i. C37.20.2-2015, Standard for Metal-Clad Switchgear.
j. C37.20.3-2013, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear (1 kV-38 kV).
Electrical Testing
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16950-2 k. C62.33-2016, Standard for Test Methods and Performance Values for Metal-Oxide Varistor Surge Protective Components.
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. AB 4-2017, Guideline for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of Molded Case Circuit Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications. b. PB 2-2011, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.
c. WC 7, Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
d. WC 8, Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
5. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 2017: Acceptance Testing Specifications (ATS) for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), 2020.
b. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, 2018.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Products shall be submitted for review in accordance with the Contract Documents, Section -1300, and Section 16000.
B. Administrative Submittals: Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests:
1. Schedule for performing inspection and tests
a. Include notification dates for special inspections.
2. List of references to be used for each test.
3. Sample copy of equipment and materials inspection form(s).
4. Sample copy of individual device test form.
5. Sample copy of individual system test form.
C. Quality Control Submittals: Submit within 14 days after completion of test:
1. Test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item tested.
D. Contract Closeout Submittals:
1. In accordance with Operation & Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere.
2. After test of inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed by ENGINEER and returned, insert a copy of each in operation and maintenance manual.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Firm Qualifications:
1. Independent V party organization functioning as an unbiased testing authority.
2. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers, of electrical equipment and systems being tested.
3. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing and inspecting of electrical equipment, installations, and systems.
4. Supervising engineer accredited as Certified Electrical Test Technologist by National Institute for Certification of Engineering Technologists (NICET), or International Electrical Testing Association and having a minimum of 5 years testing experience on similar projects.
Electrical Testing
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16950-3
5. Technicians certified by NICET or NETA.
6. Assistants and apprentices assigned to project at ratio not to exceed two certified to one non-certified assistant or apprentice.
7. Registered Professional Engineer to provide comprehensive project report outlining services performed, results of such services, recommendations, actions taken, and opinions.
8. Recognized as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.7.
B. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to, or greater than, requirements established by NETA ATS. Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment has been installed and certified by equipment manufacturer's representative.
B. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible.
C. Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment are to be:
1. Scheduled with CITY and ENGINEER prior to de-energization.
2. Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating equipment.
D. Notify CITY and ENGINEER at least 72 hours prior to performing tests on energized electrical equipment PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Tests specified in this section are to be performed in accordance with the requirements of manufacturer's minimum recommendations, as identified herein, and as detailed in specific equipment specifications.
B. Tests and inspection shall establish that:
1. Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances.
2. Installation operates as designed and intended by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Equipment is suitable for energization.
4. Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, and IEEE C2.
C. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry standards, and manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts for free mechanical movement.
E. Adjust adjustable relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or as recommended by manufacturer.
F. Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents.
G. Realign and shim any improperly aligned equipment to a plumb, level condition.
H. Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored.
Electrical Testing
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16950-4 I. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque wrench to manufacturer's recommendations, or as otherwise specified.
J. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer.
K. Provide proper lubrication to applicable moving parts.
L. Inform CITY of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70.
M. Investigate and repair or replace:
1. Electrical items that fail tests.
2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Damaged electrical equipment.
3.2 ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES:
A. Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior.
B. Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior.
C. Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces.
D. Repair or replace, as determined by CITY, door and panel sections having dented surfaces.
E. Repair or replace, as determined by CITY, poor fitting doors and panel sections.
F. Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking devices.
G. Replace missing or damaged hardware.
H. Finish:
1. Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and blemishes.
2. If required due to extensive damage, as determined by CITY, refinish the entire assembly.
I. Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type required by the Contract Documents.
J. Grout, caulk, or seal around the base of enclosures to prevent the entrance of moisture, dust, and rodents.
3.3 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
A. Visual and Mechanical inspection:
1. Physical and insulator damage.
2. Proper winding connections.
3. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.
4. Defective wiring.
5. Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing.
7. Free and properly installed resilient mounts.
8. Cleanliness and improper blockage of ventilation passages.
9. Verify that tap-changer is set at correct ratio for rated output voltage under normal operating conditions.
Electrical Testing
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16950-5
10. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground after energization and prior to loading.
B. Electrical Tests:
1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Applied megohmmeter DC voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.5 for each:
1) Winding-to-winding.
2) Winding-to-ground.
b. 10-minute test duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes. c. Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.14. d. Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer.
e. Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of adjacent windings.
2. Perform tests and adjustments for fans, controls, and alarm functions as suggested by manufacturer.
3.4 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Inspect each individual exposed power cable No. 4 AWG and larger for:
a. Physical damage.
b. Proper connections in accordance with Single-Line Diagram. c. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius where applicable.
d. Color coding conformance with NFPA 70 or specifications. e. Proper circuit identification.
2. Mechanical Connections For:
a. Proper lug type for conductor material.
b. Proper lug installation.
c. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.
3. Shielded Instrumentation Cables (IC) for
a. Proper shield grounding.
b. Proper terminations.
c. Proper circuit identification.
4. Control Cables For:
a. Proper termination.
b. Proper circuit identification.
5. Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify that neutrals and grounds are terminated for correct operation of protective devices.
B. Electrical Tests:
1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Applied megohmmeter DC voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each pole. c. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than ohmic values established by manufacturer or listed in NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
2. Contact Resistance Tests:
a. Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade and fuse holder, 30 amps and larger. b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more form adjacent poles or similar switches.
Electrical Testing
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16950-6
3.5 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 200 amperes and larger.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Proper mounting.
2. Proper conductor size.
3. Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram.
4. Cracked casings.
5. Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
6. Operate frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or single-line diagram.
7. Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or single-line diagram.
8. Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated conductors.
C. Electrical Tests:
1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Utilize 1,000-volt DC megohmmeter for 480 and 600-volt circuit breakers. b. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute. c. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute. d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
2. Contact Resistance Tests:
a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole.
b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar breakers.
3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify:
a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay.
b. Short-time pickup and delay.
c. Ground fault pickup and delay.
d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method.
e. Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be within manufacturer's published timecurrent characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. f. Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4, Table 3. g. Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established by NEMA AB 4, Table 4.
3.6 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Visually Check Current, Potential, and Control Transformers For:
a. Cracked insulation.
b. Broken leads or defective wiring.
c. Proper connections
d. Adequate clearances between primary and secondary circuit wiring.
2. Verify Mechanically That:
a. Grounding and bonding connections have good contact. b. Withdrawal mechanism and grounding operation, when applicable, operate properly.
3. Insulation resistance measurement on instrument transformer shall not be less than that shown in NETA ATS, Table 7.2.1.1.
Electrical Testing
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16950-7
3.7 METERING
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Verify meter connections in accordance with appropriate diagrams.
2. Verify meter multipliers.
3. Verify that meter types and scales conform to Contract Documents.
4. Check calibration of meters at cardinal points.
5. Check calibration of electrical transducers.
3.8 GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Equipment and circuit grounds in motor control centers and panelboards assemblies for proper connection and tightness.
2. Ground bus connections in motor control centers and panelboards assemblies for proper termination and tightness.
3. Effective transformer core and equipment grounding.
4. Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and tightness.
5. Accessible exothermic-weld grounding connections to verify that molds were fully filled and proper bonding was obtained.
3.9 AC INDUCTION MOTORS
A. General: Inspection and testing limited to motors rated 10 hp and larger.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Proper electrical and grounding connections.
2. Shaft alignment.
3. Blockage of ventilating air passageways.
4. Operate Motor and Check for:
a. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
b. Overheating.
c. Correct rotation.
d. Check vibration detectors, resistance temperature detectors, or motor inherent protectors for function ability and proper operation.
e. Excessive vibration.
5. Check operation of space heaters.
C. Electrical Tests:
1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. In accordance with ANSWEEE 43:
1) Motors above 200 hp for 10-minute duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes.
2) Motors 200 hp and less for 1-minute duration with resistances tabulated at 30 and 60 seconds.
2. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturers.
3. Calculate polarization index ratios for motors above 200 hp. Investigate index ratios less than 1.5 for Class A insulation and 2.0 for Class Binsulation.
Electrical Testing
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16950-8
4. Insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
5. Measure running current and voltage, and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full-load amperes.
6. Verify proper operation of motor moisture and winding temperature protection, and other ancillary devices.
3.10 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation.
2. Proper operation of indicating and monitoring devices.
3. Proper overload protection for each motor.
4. Improper blockage of air cooling passages.
5. Proper operation of drawout elements.
6. Integrity and contamination of insulation system.
7. Check door and device interlocking system by:
a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OFF or OPEN position. b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON or CLOSED position.
8. Check nameplates for proper identification of:
a. Equipment title and tag number with latest Single-Line Diagram. b. Pushbuttons.
c. Control switches.
d. Pilot lights.
e. Control relays.
f. Circuit breakers.
g. Indicating meters.
9. Verify that fuse and circuit breaker sizes and types conform to Contract Documents.
10. Verify that current and potential transformer ratios conform to Contract Documents.
11. Check bus connections for high resistance by low resistance ohmmeter and calibrated torque wrench applied to bolted joints:
a. Ohmic value to be zero.
b. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.
12. Check operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems by:
a. Closure attempt for locked open devices.
b. Opening attempt for locked closed devices.
13. Verify performance of each control device and feature furnished as part of the motor control center or motor controller.
14. Control Wiring:
a. Compare wiring to local and remote control, and protective devices with elementary diagrams. b. Check for proper conductor lacing and bundling.
c. Check for proper conductor identification.
d. Check for proper conductor lugs and connections.
15. Exercise active components.
16. Inspect contactors for:
a. Correct mechanical operations.
b. Correct contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure.
c. Correct torque of all connections.
Electrical Testing
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16950-9
17. Compare overload rating with full-load current for proper size.
18. Compare fuse, motor protector, and circuit breaker with motor characteristics for proper size.
19. Perform phasing check on double-ended motor control centers to ensure proper bus phasing from each source.
B. Electrical Tests:
1. Insulation Resistance Tests:
a. Applied megohmmeter DC voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each phase. c. Contactor phase-to-ground and across open contacts for I minute on each phase. d. Starter section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground on each phase with starter contacts closed and protective devices open.
e. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 10.01.
2. Overpotential Tests:
a. Maximum applied AC or DC voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published values. If not available, in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 11.
b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute for each phase of each bus section. c. Test results evaluated on pass/fail basis.
3. Current Injection Through Overload Unit at 300 Percent of Motor Full-Load Current and Monitor Trip Time:
a. Trip time in accordance with manufacturer's published data. b. Investigate values in excess of 120 seconds.
4. Control Wiring Tests:
a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits. b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and each device terminal. c. Insulation resistance test at 1,000 volts DC on control wiring except that connected to solid state components.
1) Insulation resistance to be 1 megohm minimum.
5. Operational test by initiating control devices to affect proper operation.
3.11 LOW VOLTAGE SURGE ARRESTORS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Adequate clearances between arrestors and enclosures.
2. Ground connections to ground bus.
B. Electrical Tests:
1. Varistor Type Arrestors:
a. Clamping voltage test.
b. Rated RMS voltage test.
c. Rated DC voltage test.
d. Varistor arrester test values in accordance with IEEE C62.33, Sections 4.4 and 4.7. - END OF SECTION -
Short Circuit and Coordination Report
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16951-1 SECTION 16951
SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION REPORT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Prepare a short circuit analysis and protective device coordination study for the project electrical power source and distribution system.
2. The short circuit and coordination study report shall provide an evaluation of the electrical power system with the model numbers and settings of the protective devices.
3. Provide Arc Flash Warning labels, signed and dated, in accordance with NEC 110.16 and NFPA 70E.
B. Scope:
1. Perform and provide a complete short circuit analysis with equipment interrupting or withstand rating evaluation and a protective device coordination study for the electrical power distribution system serving the facility.
2. Include all portions of the electrical power distribution system from the utility primary service drop through and including motor loads 2 HP and greater, loads 5 KVA and larger, and protective devices 50 amperes and larger.
3. Electrical equipment bus impedance shall be assumed to be zero. Short circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the basis of maximum available fault current at each project power source or power distribution equipment including switchgear, switchboard, motor control center, and branch circuit panelboards.
4. A protective device coordination study shall be performed to determine proper selection of power fuse ratings, protective relay characteristics and settings, ratios and characteristics of associated voltage and current transformers, and circuit breaker trip characteristics and settings.
5. The coordination study shall include all voltage classes of equipment from the utility's closest upstream protective device to existing and new equipment including switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, and 120 volt panelboards main circuit protection.
6. Panelboard branch circuit devices need not be considered. The phase overcurrent and ground-fault protection shall be included, settings for the adjustable protective devices, and electrical metering and monitoring devices.
7. An equipment evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of existing or proposed electrical equipment by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings with the available fault currents.
8. Problem areas or inadequacies in the proposed equipment shall be identified in the report.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. This section contains references to the following documents and they are part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title
IEEE 141 Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Distribution for Industrial Plants Reference Title
IEEE 242 Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
Short Circuit and Coordination Report
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16951-2
1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. The report shall be submitted with the major electrical distribution equipment. and switchgear detailed product submittal.
B. The ENGINEER-reviewed report shall be corrected, revised, and resubmitted as required. The report will be reviewed along with the electrical distribution and switchgear product submittal.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall distribute the ENGINEER accepted report to the major electrical distribution equipment and switchgear manufacturers before the electrical distribution equipment and switchgear is manufactured.
D. Provide an electronic copy, on USB flash drive, of the protective device coordination study results as generated by the study software.
E. The report specified herein shall be provided in accordance with Contract Documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 REPORT
A. The report shall be sealed and signed by the responsible electrical engineer, summarize the short circuit analysis, protective device coordination study, potential problem issues, conclusions, and recommendations that may affect the integrity of the project power distribution system. As a minimum, the report shall include the following.
1. The equipment manufacturer's information used to prepare the study.
2. Assumptions made during the study.
3. Voltage drop of all branch and feeder circuits.
4. Short circuit calculations listing short circuit levels at each bus.
5. Simplified single line diagrams generated by the study software.
6. Coordination study time-current curves including the instrument transformer ratios, model numbers of the protective relays, relay settings, and trip unit settings associated with each breaker.
7. Comparison of short circuit duties of each bus to the withstand and interrupting capacity of the equipment protecting that bus.
8. Data used as input to the report including cable impedance, source impedance, equipment ratings, equipment time-current curves etc.
9. Arc Flash warning labels.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide the short circuit analysis and the coordination study for the electrical power distribution system using SKM System Analysis, Inc. Power Tools, or equal.
B. The studies shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Standards 141 and 242 and shall utilize the ANSI; method of short circuit analysis in accordance with ANSI C37.010.
C. The studies shall be performed using actual equipment data for the new equipment. The analysis and study shall use the equipment and protective device data provided by the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer for the project.
Short Circuit and Coordination Report
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16951-3
3.2 SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
A. The short circuit analysis and report shall include the following:
1. One-Line Diagram:
a. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as relays, direct-acting trips, fuses, etc.
b. Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's style and catalog number for all protective devices.
c. Power, voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections of all transformers. d. Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transformers energizing each relay. e. Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators, synchronous motors, and induction motors.
2. Impedance Diagram:
a. Available MVA or impedance from the power utility company. b. Local generated capacity impedance.
c. Bus impedance.
d. Transformer and/or reactor impedance.
e. Cable impedance.
f. Equipment impedance.
g. System voltages.
h. Grounding scheme (resistance grounding, solid grounding, or no grounding).
3. Calculations:
a. Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the greatest. b. Assume bolted faults and calculate the 3-Phase and line-to-ground short circuits of each case. c. Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents.
3.3 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
A. The time-current characteristics of the specified and indicated protective devices shall be plotted on 5-cycle, log-log graph paper with a maximum of eight protective devices per plot. The coordination study time-current plots shall, at a minimum, include the following:
1. Time-current for each protective relay or fuse showing graphically that the settings will provide protection and selectivity within industry standards. Each curve shall be identified, and the tap and time settings shall be specified.
2. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. Reasonable coordination intervals and separation of characteristic curves shall be maintained.
3. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the report shall indicate the cause and recommend alternative solutions. Time-current curves and points for cable and equipment damage and symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.
4. Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times.
5. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph.
6. Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement.
3.4 STUDY FIRM
A. The report for the short circuit analysis and protective device coordination study indicating results shall be performed, stamped, and signed by an Electrical Engineer registered in the State where the Project is located.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with submittal information for the electrical products used for the Project.
Short Circuit and Coordination Report
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 16951-4 C. The engineer performing the study must visit the project site after equipment is installed and modify the study as required, and resubmit the study. Also, they shall adjust all settings as required in the report and place all warning labels as needed.
- END OF SECTION -
DIVISION 17
INSTRUMENTATION
Instrumentation
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17000-1 SECTION 17000
GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install, ready for use, the complete instrumentation and control systems as indicated on the Plans and in each of these Contract Documents. These documents include descriptions of functional operation and performance, as well as standards, but do not necessarily enumerate detailed specifications for all components and devices which are necessary. However, all components and devices shall be furnished and installed as required to provide complete and operable systems for accomplishing the functions and meeting the performance set forth hereinafter. The CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for field calibrating the provided instruments based on the design requirements and project documents.
1.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Each instrumentation and control system specified shall be separate and distinct and shall be the responsibility of a single manufacturer for the design, construction and furnishing of the desired control hardware, mechanical drawings, interconnection drawings, control piping layout drawings, control conduit layout drawings, internal drawings, installation and start-up supervision and/or calibration of the control equipment.
The responsible manufacturer as described in the preceding sentence shall hereinafter be referred to as the "Instrumentation Supplier" and shall bear the responsibility for furnishing a fully complete system operating in a satisfactory manner.
B. The instrumentation and control systems shall be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR complete and ready to operate, including all necessary interconnections and connections to sources of electrical power, air, water, drains and vents, with all required valves, switches and accessories as specified or as recommended for best operation by the manufacturer of the equipment furnished.
C. All necessary mounting panels, stands, hangers and brackets shall be furnished and installed and shall comply with the relevant sections of these Contract Documents.
D. In general, overall system accuracy shall be within plus or minus one percent of the actual process parameter being controlled (flow, temperature, etc.), unless otherwise specified.
E. Where two or more manufacturers are concerned in furnishing Equipment for a single instrumentation and control system, the CONTRACTOR shall supply the Instrumentation Supplier with such information and drawings from other manufacturers, as are needed to fit their equipment into the control and instrumentation system panels.
F. All equipment with interconnects shall be shown together on one coordinated drawing.
G. All equipment to be furnished shall be coordinated, and submittals for the equipment shall be provide in accordance with Section 16000, and as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
H. The CONTRACTOR shall provide factory-trained personnel to supervise and perform the installation and calibration of the control and instrumentation equipment, until this equipment has been field-tested by the CONTRACTOR, and the results of these tests have been reviewed by the ENGINEER.
1. In addition, factory bench-test data shall be submitted to show that the Manufacturer's proposed equipment has been tested in the specified arrangement and found to achieve specified accuracy.
Instrumentation
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17000-2
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the work specified, and shown on the Plans, such that a complete instrumentation and control system for the facility will be provided, and will be supported by accurate shop and record drawings.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing the submittal documents prepared by subcontractors, and ensuring the accuracy and completeness of the documents, prior to delivery to the ENGINEER.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that that the electrical, pneumatic, and hydraulic interface between the instruments and the process equipment is clearly shown in the shop drawing submittal.
D. The following shall be submitted to the ENGINEER and returned, reviewed to the CONTRACTOR before fabrication is started:
1. Layout drawings of system showing wiring, piping, valves, switches, and control units in schematic form. This includes individual loop drawings and total integrated system
2. Shop drawings of panels or enclosures showing size, arrangement, color, and nameplates.
3. Bill of material and catalog data on all equipment, wiring, conduit, tubing, and such other accessories as are needed to properly operate the instrumentation and control system. Data sheets shall show:
a. Component functional description used herein and on the Plans. b. Manufacturer's model number or other product designation. c. Project tag number used herein and on the Plans.
d. Project System or Loop of which the component is a part. e. Project location or assembly at which the component is to be installed. f. Input and output characteristics.
g. Scale range and units (if any) and multiplier (if any). h. Requirements for electric supply (if any). Requirements for air supply (if any). j. Materials of component parts to be in contact with, or otherwise exposed to, process media. k. Special requirements or features.
4. Wiring diagrams of all electrical work including conduits and piping diagrams of pneumatic/hydraulic systems.
5. Upon acceptance, CONTRACTOR shall submit a minimum of 4 sets of "as built" drawings of the instrumentation and control systems, along with manuals for the installation, operation and maintenance of the equipment. Each set shall include installation, operating, troubleshooting, maintenance and overhaul instructions in complete detail. This shall provide the CITY with comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance and repair. Exploded or other detailed views of all instruments, assemblies and accessory components shall be included together with complete parts lists and ordering instructions.
6. A complete index shall appear in the front of each bound submittal volume. A separate technical brochure or bulletin shall be included with each instrument data sheet. The data sheets shall be indexed in the submittal by Systems or Loops, as a separate group for each System or Loop. If, within a single System or Loop, a single instrument is employed more than once, one data sheet with one brochure or bulletin may cover all identical uses of that instrument in that System. Each brochure or bulletin shall include a list of tag numbers for which it applies. System groups shall be separated by labeled tags.
7. Drawings showing both schematic and wiring diagrams for control circuits: Complete details on the circuit interrelationship of all devices within and outside each Control Board shall be submitted first, using schematic control diagrams. Subsequent to return of this first submittal by the ENGINEER, piping and wiring diagrams shall be prepared and submitted for review by the ENGINEER; the diagrams shall consist of component layout drawings to scale, showing numbered terminals on components together with the unique number of the wire to be connected to each terminal. Piping and wiring diagrams shall show terminal assignments from all primary measurement devices, such as Instrumentation
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17000-3 flowmeters, and to all final control devices, such as samplers, pumps, valves and chemical feeders. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary equipment suppliers shop drawings to facilitate inclusion of this information by the Instrumentation Supplier.
8. Assembly and Construction Drawings for each Control Board and for other special enclosed assemblies for field installation. These drawings shall include dimensions, identification of all components, surface preparation and finish data, nameplates, and the like. These drawings also shall include enough other details, including prototype photographs, to define exactly the style and overall appearance of the assembly; a finish treatment sample shall be included.
9. Installation, Mounting, and Anchoring Details for all components and assemblies to be field-mounted, including conduit connection or entry details.
E. The CONTRACTOR and suppliers are cautioned regarding the review and compliance with the total Contract Documents. Typical examples are control relays, timers, enclosures, and nameplates. These particular items are sometimes furnished and installed by an instrument supplier. However, they are specified in DIVISION 16 of these Contract Documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION DEVICES
A. Control mechanisms shall be standard devices constructed of corrosion-resistant materials, enclosed in a dustproof case and mounted as specified in the individual application. Instruments to be mounted outdoors or in basements shall be in weatherproof cases. Corrosion resistant cases shall be furnished where required. Cases shall be finished in manufacturers standard colors except as otherwise specified. All instrument wires or cables shall be enclosed and not exposed or within reach of the public.
B. Each meter, indicator, totalizer, controller, recorder or other device shall have an identifying engraved laminated plastic nameplate. This includes all primary elements, such as flow meters. The nameplate shall be mounted on the case so that it will identify the equipment as specified on the drawings. Brass or stainless steel mounting screws shall be used.
C. Each receiver and each transmitter shall have an individual cutout, switch and fuse to disconnect the receiver from all sources of power.
D. Straightening vanes, pressure snubbers, or other required accessories, shall be furnished and installed if necessary to meet the accuracy requirements in these Contract Documents.
2.2 INTERCOMPONENT WIRING AND TUBING
A. Intercomponent wiring shall be run in conduit. Minimum permissible signal wiring insulation voltage is 600 volts, with the exception of special cable as required by the manufacturer and accepted by the ENGINEER.
2.3 POWER SUPPLIES
A. Regulated do power supplies for instrument loops shall be designed and arranged so that loss of one supply does not affect more than one instrument loop or system. Power supplies shall be suitable for an input voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent, and the supply output shall be fused or short circuit protected. Output voltage regulation shall be as required by the instrumentation equipment being supplied. Multi-loop, or multisystem power supplies, will be acceptable if backup power supply units are provided which will automatically supply the load upon failure of the primary supply. The backup supply systems shall be designed so that either the primary or backup supply can be removed, repaired, and returned to service without disrupting the instrument system operation.
B. The power distribution from multi-loop supplies shall be selectively fused such that a fault in one instrument Instrumentation
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17000-4 loop will be isolated from the other loops being fed from the same supply. Fuses shall be clearly labeled and located for easy access. Multi-loop supply systems shall be oversized for an additional 10 percent future load.
Failure of a multi-loop supply shall be indicated on the respective instrument panel or enclosure.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 TRAINING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide training of personnel in the operation and maintenance of the furnished control systems.
B. Training shall be provided as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents, but shall consist of at least eight hours, in a single, or multiple sessions, to accommodate the personnel schedules.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the ENGINEER, and the CITY, to schedule the training sessions at least 5 workings days in advance.
- END OF SECTION -
Control Systems Integration
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17100-1 SECTION 17100
CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all labor, materials, and incidentals as indicated, specified and required to furnish, install, calibrate, adjust, test, document, start-up and train for a complete, integrated and functionally operational Instrumentation and Control System as is intended by these Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any subcontractors or integrators he may hire in order to complete the system as specified.
B. THE CITY OF VERNON WILL BE PROVIDING THEIR OWN I&C INTEGRATOR TO INTEGRATE AND PROGRAM THE PROPOSED UPGRADES WITHIN THE CITY’S EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM.
C. THE PUMP STATION CONTROL PANEL HMI SHALL DISPLAY ALL THE ALARMS INDICATED ON THE PROCESS AND INFORMATION DRAWINGS.
D. Unless specified otherwise herein, the requirements of Division 16 – Electrical & Division 17 – Instrumentation apply to this Section.
E. Related work elsewhere:
1. P&ID Drawings
2. 17000 – General Instrumentation Section
3. 17500 – Control Strategy
4. 17520 – Local Control Panels
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be familiar with the specified PLC and control hardware and shall be able to document a minimum of 3 years of experience in programming projects of similar size and complexity in scope to this project.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 CONTROL STSTEM
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the integration and programing of the following:
1. Field instruments and equipment as specified in the project documents within Pump Station Control Panel.
2. Pump Station Control Panel’s Human Machine Interface (HMI) display.
3.2 SCADA/OIT
A. The Vernon Well No. 22 shall be monitored and controlled by the Pump Station Control Panel PLC. In addition, the station shall also be monitored and controlled via a City’s Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system. The communication between the PLC and SCADA network shall utilize the existing DSL Modem. The SCADA and OIT shall allow the operator to make process changes such as starting and stopping of equipment and opening and closing of valves as well as adjust control set points. The District’s Integrator will be responsible for providing the integration and programming of the PLC and the Control Systems Integration
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17100-2 CITY’s existing SCADA system.
3.3 SYSTEM SECURITY
A. A password protected security system shall provide up to 3-levels of access to view and make changes to the operation of the pump system.
1. Level 1: Is allowed to view system screens / no changes allowed
2. Level 2: Is allowed to view system screens / can change operator level set points and in/out service set points / cannot change station set- up parameters or locks on the pump run bit values
3. Level 3: Unlimited access
3.4 FACTORY TESTING
A. See Section 17000 – General Instrumentation
3.5 INSTALLATION AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. See Section 17000 – General Instrumentation
B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a minimum of three (3) days for control system operation and SCADA training.
- END OF SECTION -
Control Strategy
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17500-1 SECTION 17500
CONTROL STRATEGY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a complete and functional control system as described below. This shall include fabrication, programming and commissioning of the PLC, equipment, and instrumentation located at the site in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. THE MOTOR CONTROL PANEL HMI SHALL DISPLAY ALL THE ALARMS INDICATES ON THE PROCESS AND INFORMATION DRAWINGS.
C. The requirements of Division 16 – Electrical & Division 17 –Instrumentation apply to this Section unless specified otherwise herein.
D. Related work elsewhere:
1. P&ID Drawings
E. This section includes the general system overview and description of logic for each piece of equipment being controlled by the Process PLCs. Other sections of Division 17 shall supplement this Section as necessary.
F. The intent of this section is to provide guidance to the CONTRACTOR in the programmable logic function for various I/O signals indicated on the Drawings. The control and monitoring functions described herein cover the basic logic to be performed with each I/O signal. These control descriptions are not intended to cover every possible scenario or describe every possible timer, delays, interlock, safety shutdown, etc. that may be necessary for a complete operational system.
G. The primary function of these control descriptions is to provide the CONTRACTOR with information that cannot be indicated in electrical schematic diagrams such as logic performed by PLC's and/or operator interface software. A brief description of signals to be provided to/from control panels and equipment has also been provided herein. It is also the intent of this section to list the minimum control, monitoring and alarm functions to be displayed on the HMI and SCADA screens.
H. An attempt has been made on the Drawings and in these Specifications to describe system logic and functionality as well as show signals, interlocks, and devices necessary for proper operation of the control and monitoring systems. However, if a particular signal, device, sensor, interposing control relay, signal converter, control logic, interlock (hardware or software), etc., is required to meet the intent or operational requirements and is not indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install this piece of equipment with no extra compensation.
I. The CONTRACTOR shall include a minimum of forty (40) hours of programming/operator interface configuration time for modifications or changes in the system logic or operator interface screens as requested by the CITY or ENGINEER. This additional programming and/or configuration time will take place only after the system has been programmed and tested for proper operation as described herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Vernon Well No. 22 Station (herein referred to as Station) will be monitored and controlled by the Station’s PLC Panel (here in referred to as PLC).
Control Strategy
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17500-2
3.2 VERNON WELL NO. 22 PUMP STATION
B. The CITY has stated that the Station is designed to operate to maintain pressure within the distribution system.
In addition to the pressure control, the station shall also be capable of operating off flow and level control. The Station is designed to operate automatically, or based on the operator’s inputs. The Station can either be turned On/Off locally through the pump’s Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) switch or remotely when the pumps HOA switch is in auto and the operator calls the pump to maintain a system setpoints through the HMI/CITY SCADA system.
C. In either Hand or Auto Mode, two hard-wired interlocks will be provided preventing the Well 22 pump from operating. These two hard-wired interlocks will be the high temperature sensor in the motor and the emergency stop button located next to the pump pedestal. The level transducer (LT-02180) and the high pressure switch (PSH-02151) shall be “soft” interlocks that stop pump operation in the alarm state. These soft interlocks shall be provided to stop the pump from dead heading or running below the intended operations level. To prevent damage to the pump, an operator adjustable time delay shall also be installed to prevent the Well 22 pump from excessive cycling when a run condition is triggered.
D. The PLC shall record the instantaneous flow rate at an operator adjustable time frame and record the flow totalizer pulse reading from the discharge flow meter FIT-02140. The CONTRACTOR shall program a totalizer reset button to reset the total flow reading on the HMI Display.
E. Modes of Station Operation in Auto
1. The “Pressure Control Mode” uses the well pump discharge pressure transmitter as the primary feedback for control and monitors the system discharge pressure, discharge flow rate and the groundwater level for proper operating conditions. When a start command is issued either from the HMI or the Central SCADA system, the local control panel system will continuously monitor and compare the system discharge pressure to the high and low pressure setpoints entered by the operator.
If the system discharge pressure decreases below the low pressure set point for time delay T seconds, the well pump will be called to run. The well pump will operate at full speed until the discharge pressure in the well increases the operating pressure set point for stop. The pump operation can be stopped if a stop command is issued from the HMI or from the Central SCADA system or the HOA Selector Switch position is changed.
2. The “Level Control Mode” uses the well groundwater level transducer as the primary feedback for control and monitors the pump discharge pressure, system discharge pressure and the discharge flow rate for proper operating conditions. When a start command is issued either from the HMI or from the Central SCADA system, the well pump will ramp-up and operate at full speed until the water level in the well decreases to the operator level set point, at which time, the control logic will be initiated to vary the speed of the pump to maintain the water level at the set point. If the water level decreases further, the pump speed will be reduced. If the water level rises, the pump speed will be increased. Pump operation will continue until a stop command is issued from the HMI or from the Central SCADA system or the HOA Selector Switch position is changed.
3. The “Flow Control Mode” uses the discharge flow meter as the primary feedback for control and monitors the well discharge pressures, system discharge pressure and the groundwater level for proper operation conditions. When a start command is issued either from the HMI or from the Central SCADA system, the well pump will operate at full speed. Pump operation will continue until a stop command is issued from the HMI or from the Central SCADA System or the HOA Selector Switch position is changed.
Control Strategy
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17500-3 F. The PLC shall also indicate when the following alarms have been triggered:
Signals to/from Equipment to Main PLC (see P&ID)
SCADA & HMI Control and Set Points:
Equipment/Instrument Recommended Set Point Allowable Range Well #22 Pump
(PMP-02100)
Run (YC-02100)
N/A On/Off
Well #22 Pump
(PMP-02100)
% Speed (SC-02100)
N/A 0 – 100 %
Well #22 Flow Meter
(FE-02140)
GPM (FIR-02140)
2,100 gpm 0 – 3000 gpm
Well #22 Pump Pressure
(PIT-02150)
Pressure (PIR-02150)
70 psi 0 – 150 psi
Well #22 System Pressure
(PIT-02152)
Pressure (PIR-02152)
70 psi 0 – 150 psi
Well #22 Level
(LIT-02180)
Level (LIR-02180)
130 psi 0 – 200 psi
Well #22 Pump-to-Waste Valve
(V-02123)
Open/Close (ZO-02123)(ZC-02123)
N/A Open/Close
SCADA and HMI Display Only:
Equipment/Instrument SCADA and HMI Display
Well #22 Pump
(PMP-02100)
HOA Position (HS-02100)
Hand/Off/Auto
Well #22 Pump
(PMP-02100)
Speed Reference (SI-02100)
Pump Speed (RPM)
Well #22 Pump
(PMP-02100)
Running (YI-02100)
Running
Well #22 Flow Meter
(FE-02140)
Total Flow (FQIR-02140)
Flow Total
Well #22 Pump Pressure
(PIT-02150)
High Pressure (PIH-02150)
High PSI Reading
Well #22 Pump Pressure
(PIT-02150)
Low Pressure (PIL-02150)
Low PSI Reading
Well #22 System Pressure
(PIT-02152)
High Pressure (PIH-02152)
High PSI Reading
Control Strategy
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17500-4 Equipment/Instrument SCADA and HMI Display
Well #22 System Pressure
(PIT-02150)
Low Pressure (PIL-02152)
Low PSI Reading
Well #22 Flush Water Supply
(FE-02141)
GPM (FIR-02141)
GPM
Well #22 Flush Water Supply
(FE-02141)
Total Flow (FQIR-02141)
Flow Total
Well #22 Pump-to-Waste Valve
(V-02123)
Valve Opened (ZIO-02123)
Position Indicate Open
Well #22 Pump-to-Waste Valve
(V-02123)
Valve Closed (ZIO-02123)
Position Indicate Closed
SCADA and HMI Alarm Display:
Equipment/Instrument SCADA and HMI Alarm Display
Well #22 Pump
(PMP-02100)
VFD Fail (YI-02100) (YA-02100)
VFD Fail
Well #22 Pump
(PMP-02100)
High Temperature Indicator (TIH-02100) (TAH-02100)
High Motor Temp. Fail
Well #22 Pump Pressure
(PIT-02150)
High Pressure (PIH-02150)(YA-02150B)
High PSI Reading
Well #22 Pump Pressure
(PIT-02150)
Low Pressure (PIL-02150) (YA-02150A)
Low PSI Reading
Well #22 System Pressure
(PIT-02152)
High Pressure (PIH-02152) (YA-02152B)
High PSI Reading
Well #22 System Pressure
(PIT-02150)
Low Pressure (PIL-02152) (YA-02152A)
Low PSI Reading
3.3 CHLORINE INJECTION SYSTEM
A. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the power and controls are furnished and installed for a chlorine injection system skid. The PLC shall be provided with sufficient space to integrate the system controls. The bid plans show a chlorine injection system and the associated communication signals the CONTRACTOR shall include in the bid.
B. The CITY intends to operate the chlorine injection system to maintaining chlorine residual in the finished water based on the well pump output rate. Due to the variance in well output rate associated with VFD operation, the chemical injection pumps will need to be throttled to ensure that the system is receiving the correct amount of chlorine. Since the CITY asked for the removal of the onsite chlorine analyzers that would allow for water quality analysis and the parts per million (ppm) of chlorine that the CITY would like to inject is unknown, the pump run speed will need to be an operator adjustable value of the total flow. The chlorine injection system will receive the “RUN” command after an operator adjustable time delay once the system has completed the “pump- Control Strategy
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17500-5 to-waste” period. The pump operating speed is a function of the well pump speed and the CITY dosing requirements.
The required dosage and the solution strength shall be input by CITY operations staff based on the required disinfection criteria. The speed control inputs (SC-02101 & SC-02102) will act as a manual overrides.
In the event of the chlorine storage tank low level alarm (LIL-02181) being received by the PLC, a “soft” interlock will stop operation of the chemical injection pumps to avoid damaging the system. The alarm will notify CITY operations staff.
Signals to/from Equipment to Main PLC via Manufacturer’s Control Panel (See P&ID) SCADA and HMI Control and Set Points:
Equipment/Instrument Recommended Set Point Allowable Range Chlorine Injection Pump # 1
(PMP-02101)
Run (YC-02101)
N/A On/Off
Chlorine Injection Pump # 1
(PMP-02101)
% Speed (SC-02101)
N/A 0 – 100 %
Chlorine Injection Pump # 2
(PMP-02102)
Run (YC-02102)
N/A On/Off
Chlorine Injection Pump # 2
(PMP-02102)
% Speed (SC-02102)
N/A 0 – 100 %
SCADA and HMI Display Only:
Equipment/Instrument SCADA and HMI Display
Chlorine Injection Pump # 1
(PMP-02101)
Running (YI-02101)
Running
Chlorine Injection Pump # 2
(PMP-02102)
Running (YI-02102)
Running
Chlorine Tank Level
(LIT-02181)
Level (LIR-02181)
Tank Level (Feet)
SCADA and HMI Alarm Display:
Equipment/Instrument SCADA and HMI Alarm Display
Chlorine Injection Pump # 1
(PMP-02101)
Fail (YI-02101)
General Fail Alarm
Chlorine Injection Pump # 2
(PMP-02102)
Fail (YI-02102)
General Fail Alarm
Chlorine Tank Level
(LIT-02181)
Low Level (LIL-02181)
Low Tank Level
3.4 FACTORY TESTING
Control Strategy
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17500-6 A. The control software program shall be factory tested prior to installation at the jobsite to verify all I/O function as required herein.
3.5 FIELD TESTING
A. The programmer shall visit the site as required to test the program to verify the program functions as required herein. Minimum site visit shall be two (2) times. Any program flaws shall be debugged and corrected to ensure compliance with these requirements.
B. The ENGINEER shall be notified of such testing a minimum of one (1) week in advance and shall, at his option, be present to witness the functionality of the program. - END OF SECTION -
Field Instruments
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17510-1 SECTION 17510
FIELD INSTRUMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENT
A. This section includes the general requirements for furnishing and installing the field instruments as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Division of these specifications. Other instrumentation and control sections of this Division shall supplement this Section as necessary. These specifications shall not apply to instrumentation to be provided by process equipment vendors as part of the process systems or equipment already approved by the ENGINEER.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all field instruments indicated in the Contract Documents.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, and incidentals as indicated, specified and required to furnish, install, calibrate, adjust, test, document, start-up and train for each field instrument furnished.
D. Labor, materials, apparatus, and components essential to the complete functioning of field instruments described and indicated herein, or which may be reasonably implied as essential, whether mentioned in the Contract Documents or not, shall be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR. In case of doubt as to the work intended, or in the event of need for explanation thereof, the CONTRACTOR shall refer to the ENGINEER for supplemental instructions.
E. For purposes of clarity and legibility, the Drawings are diagrammatic only. Construction Documents are not intended to show every fitting, junction, or component nor every difficulty that may be encountered during installation or coordination with different equipment manufacturers. The CONTRACTOR shall refer to related data in all Contract Documents and shall verify this information on site.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Sections 01300 - Submittals.
1. Descriptive Data: Submit copies of complete descriptive literature, performance data, physical dimensions, power and signal connections for each field instrument to be furnished. Provide name of manufacturer, style, and complete model number. Listing items "as specified" without both make and model or type designation is not acceptable.
2. Component Data Sheets: Submit a component data sheet for each piece of instrumentation equipment similar to an ISA S20 form. Include equipment tag number, manufacturer's model number, location of service, materials of construction, size and scale range, calibrated range, set points, optional accessories and any other useful information.
3. Submit drawings and bill of materials for any sun shields that may be required. Drawings must clearly indicate how the sun shield will be fabricated and mounted.
1.3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Installation requirements and procedures.
B. Complete instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of equipment involved. Instructions and documentation not related to the equipment furnished must be removed or crossed out. O&M manuals must be individually tailored to the project and equipment as furnished.
C. Bill of Materials, component data sheets, descriptive literature, product specification sheets, wiring diagrams and calibration procedures. O&M manuals must be individually tailored to the project and equipment as furnished.
Field Instruments
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17510-2 D. Complete nomenclature of replaceable parts, part numbers, current cost, name and address of nearest vendor of replacement parts. Information on equipment or components not related to equipment furnished must be removed or crossed out. O&M manuals must be individually tailored to the project and equipment as furnished E. Provide a copy of all instrument calibration reports.
F. Refer to Specification Section 17000 for additional requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment to be furnished under this section shall be the product of firms regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of this type of equipment. Manufacturer shall assume responsibility for, and guarantee performance of equipment furnished. However, this shall not be construed as relieving the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for the proper installation and functioning of the work.
B. The manufacturer shall provide a 2-year equipment warranty.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with all other equipment manufacturers to ensure proper installation and operation of the field instruments.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with all other trades to avoid conflicts and interferences. No extra compensation will be allowed for changes made necessary due to conflicts between various equipment.
C. Any discrepancies noted in these contract documents or discrepancies between Drawings and actual field conditions shall be promptly brought to the ENGINEER for a decision. No extra compensation will be allowed for changes made by the CONTRACTOR without ENGINEER’s consent.
1.6 IDENTIFICATION TAGS (See also Section 16195 – Electrical Identifications) PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. Provide instrumentation as noted on the Equipment List.
2.0 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS
A. General:
1. Magnetic flowmeter shall be for potable water application.
2. Magnetic flowmeters systems shall be of the low frequency electromagnetic induction type and produce a DC pulsed signal directly proportional to and linear with the liquid flow rate. Complete zero stability shall be an inherent characteristic of the flowmeter system. Each magnetic flowmeter system shall include a metering tube, signal cable, transmitter and flowmeter grounding rings.
3. Magnetic flowmeters and electronics shall be manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing.
4. Flowmeters that are to be located on a submerged pipe shall be designed to operate in such conditions.
Flowmeter display shall be located above water level and a connection cable of appropriate length shall be provided to allow connection to display location.
B. Metering Tube:
1. Constructed of stainless steel with 150 lb. carbon or stainless steel ANSI B16.5 Class 150 flanged connection.
2. Utilize a minimum of 2 bullet-nosed, self-cleaning electrodes.
3. The liner shall be non-conductive and in conformance with the Manufacturer's recommended service.
Field Instruments
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17510-3
4. Electrodes constructed of materials that are in conformance with the Manufacturer's recommendation for the meter's intended service.
5. Meter housing rated for accidental submergence.
6. Two stainless steel grounding rings shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's bore and material recommendation for the meter's intended service. Installation shall be per flowmeter manufacturer's recommendations. Unless otherwise indicated, flowmeter grounding shall consist of a 3/4" x 10-foot copper clad ground rod bonded to the grounding rings with a No.6 bare copper conductor.
C. Transmitter: The transmitter shall be mounted on the flow tube or remotely where indicated on the Drawings.
The interconnecting cable shall be furnished by the flowmeter manufacturer of sufficient length to avoid splicing. Transmitters shall be housed in NEMA 4X enclosures suitable for mounting outdoors. The transmitter shall produce an electrically isolated 4-20mA DC output into a minimum load of 800 ohms linear to flow and a dry-contact, field adjustable, pulsed output for remote totalization.
D. Performance Requirements:
1. Measuring Range: 0.33 to 33 ft/s
2. Calibrated Range: 1.0 to 33 ft/s
3. Time Constant: 0.01 to 100 seconds.
4. Accuracy: ± 0.2 percent of flow rate from 10 to 100 percent of full range over 1 ft. per second at 0 x D inlet run.
5. Repeatability: 0.1 percent of full scale.
6. Isolation: either galvanic or optic.
7. Empty pipe detection: The flow transmitter shall display "Empty Pipe" when the metering tube is not completely full.
8. Power consumption: 30 watts max
9. Power supply: 24 VDC
10. Communication Protocol: 4-20 mA and Digital Pulse Output Signals. 1 Pulse = 1000 Gallons.
11. Coating and Lining Material: Pearl-gray polyurethane coated with polyurethane with NSF Certification
E. Factory Testing: Each flowmeter shall be hydraulically calibrated at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Testing Standards using a 3 -point (minimum) test. The calibrations procedures shall conform to the requirements of MIL-STD-45662A. A real-time computer generated printout of the actual calibration data indicated apparent and actual flows for each flow test shall be submitted to the ENGINEER with final project documentation.
F. Acceptable Manufactures:
1. Rosemount
2. Or Engineer Approved Equal
2.1 LEVEL TRANSMITTER – PRESSURE TYPE
A. Signal Output
1. 4-20 mA DC 2 wire twisted pair grounded shield cable
2. FM and CSA explosion-proof and intrinsically safe
3. Unit meets EMI/RFI for Mil-Std 461/462 Rev. E
4. Response time: < 4ms
Field Instruments
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17510-4 B. Accuracy
1. Static Accuracy: 0.25% FSO BFSL
2. 1-year Stability: 0.20% FSO
3. Error Band: 0.90% BFSL FSO
C. Temperature
1. Temp. Compensation: +32 °F to +176 °F
2. Process temp.: +32 °F to +176 °F
3. Storage temp: -4 °F to +176 °F
D. Electrical Connection and Protection
1. Vented, watertight, polyurethane-jacketed cable, 40 feet standard
2. 8-30 VDC unregulated power
3. Unit is FM explosion-proof and FM intrinsic safe.
E. Material
1. Wetted Parts: 316L Stainless Steel Pressure Connection and Sensor
2. Case: 316L Stainless Steel, explosion-resistant
3. Cable: Polyurethane-jacketed cable
4. Cable: As Required (Provided by MF’R)
F. Agency Approval Options
1. Explosion-proof rated Class I, II, III, Division I, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G.
2. NFS-61 Certified
G. Ranges
1. 0-500 psi
H. Acceptable Manufacturers/Model:
1. Druck PTX 1230
2. Or Engineer Approved Equal
2.2 LEVEL FLOATS
A. Float switches are designed for accurate liquid level control in many applications including potable water or sewage environments. The float switch can be utilized to signify specific water levels or for direct alarm actuation. Float switches shall be used to sense liquid level in a wet well, basin or other applications as indicated on the Drawings. Floats shall be constructed of a durable polypropylene material outside and have a solid polyurethane foam interior or 316 stainless steel. It shall be leak proof, shock proof, and impact resistant.
Resistant to sewage and wastewater application and shall be for use with intrinsically safe circuits.
B. The switch contact configuration shall be normally open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.) as required to perform the proper operation as intended in these Contract documents. The float switch shall be single pole, double throw (SPDT).
C. The float switch assembly shall be mechanical, include a stainless steel cable and cable weight or a 1" schedule 80 PVC fastened to the wet well/basin wall with 316 stainless steel anchors and clamps as indicated on the Drawings. Floats shall be installed such that the mechanical switch activation takes place at the liquid level as indicated or directed by the ENGINEER at time of construction. Float switch cables shall be secured to a cable or PVC pipe with weather-resistant, UV rated tie-wraps.
Field Instruments
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17510-5 D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Conery SPDT switches
2. Or Engineer Approved Equal
2.3 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Pressure gages shall have the following features as a minimum:
1. Housing: Molded Fiberglass Reinforced Thermoplastic
2. Silicone Oil Filled
3. Range: As Indicated Elsewhere Or As Directed By The Engineer.
4. Proof Pressure: 150 Percent Of Range Psi Minimum
5. Accuracy: One Percent Of Full Scale
6. Wetted Material: 316 Stainless Steel
7. Dial/Pointer: Stainless Steel Or Aluminum
8. Service: Liquid, Gas, Or Vapors As Indicated On The Drawings
9. Process Connection: 1/4" NPT Male
10. Calibration: Micro-Adjustment Screw
11. Accessories: Test Cock, Female Outlets And An Isolation Ball Valve
12. Blow-out Back: Each pressure gauge shall be equipped with a molded fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic back that shall be hinged for safety (will not become a projectile).
B. An isolation ball valve shall be furnished and installed on each pressure gauge for ease of removal without disruption of service. The valve shall be sized as required for the process connection.
C. A diaphragm seal shall be furnished and installed to isolate each pressure gauge installed with a process connection other than potable water or clean air.
D. A pulsation dampener shall be provided for each pressure gauge E. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all mounting hardware and support structures necessary for proper operation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents.
Materials used for support structures shall be suitable for the environment in which it is installed (corrosive - stainless steel, non-corrosive - galvanized steel; unless indicated otherwise).
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. US Gauge (Ametek)
2. Ashcroft
3. Winters
4. Or Engineer Approved Equal
2.4 PRESSURE SWITCHES
A. The pressure switch shall single set point or double set points with adjustable deadband with SPDT switches for operation for increasing or decreasing pressure. Switches shall have NEMA 4X enclosures; SS wetted parts, and Buna-N diaphragm seal.
B. Pressure Switch Requirements:
1. Contact Rating: 15A @ 120/ 240 VAC
2. Switch: SPDT
3. Range: 0 – 100 psi
Field Instruments
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17510-6
4. Deadband: adjustable; 3 – 24 psi
5. Enclosure: NEMA 4 X
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Ashcroft
2. Endress & Hauser
3. Or Engineer Approved Equal
2.5 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
A. The pressure transmitter shall measure the pressure in the process line in which it is installed and shall transmit a 4-20 mA output for process control. The unit shall include an LCD display for local readings.
B. Requirements:
1. Accuracy: ±1% down to 10:1
2. Display: 4-character LCD
3. Output: 4-20 mA
4. Range: 0-100 PSIG
5. Overpressure: Up to 2000 psi (one side)
6. Sensing Element: 316 SS diaphragm
7. Wetted Material: 316 SS
8. Process Connection: ¼” or ½” NPT
9. Power: 12 – 45 VDC
10. Enclosure: NEMA 4X
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Rosemount
2. Or Engineer Approved Equal
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all mounting hardware and support structures for the instrumentation and the logic unit as required for proper operation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents. Materials used for support structures shall be suitable for the environment in which it is installed (corrosive – PVC, Fiberglass or stainless steel, non-corrosive – stainless steel; unless indicated otherwise).
B. Inspect each instrument and piece of equipment for defects, damage and correct operation before installation.
Inspect work area and work involving other trades to verify readiness for installation.
C. Field instruments shall be installed per manufacturer's requirements. Verify that all mounting, process and electrical connections are secure and tight before operating instrument.
D. Install field instrument identification tag as described above.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall verify process connection type and location. All instruments must be rated for the process and application.
F. Field instruments installed in hazardous (classified) locations shall be installed in approved enclosures or electrically connected through an intrinsically safe barrier and shall meet all other requirements of NFPA 70 Articles 500-503.
Field Instruments
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17510-7 G. Furnish and install sun shields for all instruments installed outdoors in direct sunlight.
H. Refer to Section 17000 for additional installation supervision, calibration, testing and start-up requirements. - END OF SECTION -
Local Control Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17520-1 SECTION 17520
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies, and shall perform all labor as required to install a complete and fully functional Pump Station Control Panel as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein or in other Sections of the Specifications. Pump Station Control Panel shall be designed to provide the control strategy as specified in the project documents.
B. This specification does not apply to manufacturer supplied control equipment which is part of an integrated “package”. However, this equipment shall generally conform to the specifications here-in, when applicable.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall review all shop drawings and provide comments to the ENGINEER, on all manufacturer supplied control equipment submittals. The CONTRACTOR shall review the submittals to insure conformance and compatibility with all other control and instrumentation components on the project, including manufacturer to manufacture equipment and communication.
D. This section includes the furnishing, configuration and programming of Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC), Operator Interface Terminals (OIT), power supplies, interconnecting cables and all associated components for control and monitoring of equipment as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.
E. PLC and OIT programming shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the installation and wiring of the CONTROL PANELs, and make provisions for on-site start-up and testing of the CONTROL PANELs.
F. The CONTROL PANELs shall be programmed and configured to allow for monitoring and control by the CITY’s Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) as indicated in this Division and as indicated on the Drawings. System design and installation shall conform to NEMA ICS 1.1.
1.2 RELATED WORK AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
A. Division 17, Instrumentation Specifications
B. Each Control Panel shall be constructed by a UL 508A recognized panel assembler. All control panel components shall be UL Listed or UL Recognized under the category "Industrial Control Equipment".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Sections 01300 - Submittals.
B. Manufacturer's catalog cut sheets indicating electrical characteristics, capabilities and physical attributes for each Control Panel component including PLC/CPU, power supplies, I/O modules, special interface modules or devices, module racks, operator's interface, interconnecting cables and any other equipment related to the Control Panel.
C. Wiring Diagrams showing connections to all devices; input and output, analog and discrete. The wiring diagrams shall indicate the I/O address point to be used in the PLC program. System interconnection diagram indicating all major networked components and indicating each connection port.
D. A tabular list will be required for all discrete and analog I/O which will include:
1. Rack number, module number, module I/O point number.
Local Control Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17520-2
2. Name of each I/O field device.
3. Instrument tag number of the I/O device located in the contract documents.
4. Electrical characteristics of I/O signal.
5. PLC internal address.
E. I/O being monitored and controlled with each Operator Interface.
F. Component layout drawing for each Control Panel enclosure.
1.4 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Installation requirements and procedures.
B. Complete instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of equipment involved. Instructions and documentation not related to the equipment furnished must be removed or crossed out. O&M manuals must be individually tailored to the project and equipment as furnished C. Bill of Materials, component data sheets, descriptive literature, product specification sheets, wiring diagrams and calibration procedures. O&M manuals must be individually tailored to the project and equipment as furnished
D. Complete nomenclature of replaceable parts, part numbers, current cost, name and address of nearest vendor of replacement parts. Information on equipment or components not related to equipment furnished must be removed or crossed out. O&M manuals must be individually tailored to the project and equipment as furnished
E. Refer to Specification Section 17000 for additional requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment to be furnished under this section shall be the product of firms regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of this type of equipment. Manufacturer shall assume responsibility for, and guarantee performance of equipment furnished. However, this shall not be construed as relieving the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for the proper installation and functioning of the work.
B. The UL508 manufacture shall provide a 2-year equipment warranty.
C. Equipment shall be designed and installed to conform to Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, related equipment furnished by other suppliers and recommendations of the component manufacturers.
D. Comply with the following Codes and Standards:
1. NEMA (Testing Standards BU 1.3.03 or 1.3.04)
2. UL listing and labeling for materials.
3. NFPA-70
4. UL 508A
Local Control Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17520-3 PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the Pump Station Control Panel to satisfy the functional requirements specified in the relevant mechanical equipment, and Instrumentation & Control specification sections and as indicated on the Drawings. All components shall be UL labeled or provided with proper ground fault protection as required by UL 508A.
B. Pump Station Control Panel enclosures shall be steel or fiberglass, NEMA 12 with hinged lockable doors.
Freestanding enclosures shall have a 3-point latching handle. Outdoor enclosures with panel mounted devices shall contain a white interior swing panel (dead-front) with NEMA 12 rated view window as required to maintain visibility of the OIT, indicators and switches while not exposing the PLC and/or terminal blocks.
C. Pump Station Control Panel enclosures shall be supplied with fans and heating systems sufficient to keep the interior space within the enclosure at a temperature of between 50 and 95 F based on an operating ambient exterior temperature of between 32 and 115 F.
D. Identification of panel-mounted devices, conductors, and electrical components shall meet the requirements specified herein.
2.2 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC)
A. General:
1. The PLC shall be furnished with hardware, software installation, operation and maintenance manuals necessary to monitor and control equipment, as listed in the Specifications, and as indicated on the Drawings. Each field input and output shown as an I/O point shall be connected as per the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
2. The PLC programming software used to program PLCs shall be the latest version or release from the manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the cost to register or purchase and maintain proper licensing and registration with the manufacturer. The PLC programming software shall enable the user to write the PLC program in on-line or off-line modes. The software shall include utilities to manage PLC program files, document and print the programs, configure the programming environment, monitor and force the PLC addresses while on-line, and configure the PLC memory and addressing structure.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the programming software licensing to the CITY as part of this project.
4. Cables, adapters, connectors, and other hardware required to render the PLC completely operational shall be provided and installed. Special programming and/or configuration cables shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR for completion of his work and shall remain the property of the CONTRACTOR.
5. The processor shall be programmable using conventional ladder-type logic and shall include the following minimum functions:
a. Real Time Clock
b. Data Comparators
c. Standard Relays
d. On-delay and Off-delay Timers
e. Counters
f. Master Control Relays
g. Transitional or One-shot Outputs
h. PID Loop Control
i. Floating point math
Local Control Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17520-4
5. Each PLC shall contain the necessary hardware and software as required to implement the control schemes as indicated in the Contract Documents. The ladder logic programs shall reside in the PLC processors. Every program rung shall be documented with a control description. The CONTRACTOR shall provide copies of the fully documented PLC programs on CD to the CITY at the completion of the project. PLC Programs can be password protected, however, the password shall be provided to the CITY upon execution of a Confidentiality and Release of Liability Agreement between the CONTRACTOR and the CITY. The CONTRACTOR shall also provide the CITY with the PLC programming software with registration under the CITY’s name.
6. Pre-Approved PLC Hardware
a. Modicon M340 with Ethernet Processor
B. Central Processing Unit:
1. The PLC CPU shall be a microprocessor based industrial controller with a temperature rating of 0 to 60 degrees C and a humidity rating of 0 to 95 percent non-condensing, minimum. Memory (RAM) shall be sized as required for all system logic and control functions with a minimum of 50 percent spare capacity. RAM shall be protected by lithium battery backup for at least one year, and capacitor storage for up to two weeks.
2. Each CPU shall be provided with internal fault analysis with a fail-safe mode and output for remote failure alarming. Diagnostic codes shall be made available on the Plant Computer through the programming software to further aid in the troubleshooting process.
3. Two communication ports shall be provided. One port shall be utilized for a peer-to-peer network connection (Ethernet) while the other may be used for connection to other peripheral devices.
C. I/O Expansion Modules:
1. Discrete input modules shall be plug-in, rack style modules or built-in to the PLC CPU that sense voltage input and shall have LED indicators for each point displaying the status of the field contact.
Maximum 16 points per module. Provide a minimum of 10 percent spare points wired to terminal blocks.
2. Discrete output modules shall be plug-in, rack style modules or built-in to the PLC CPU with a source voltage output or relay output having a current rating of 1.5A at 120 VAC, minimum. Outputs shall have LED indicators for each output status. Each output shall drive an interposing relay with DPDT contacts rated 10A at 120 VAC. Maximum 16 points per module. Provide a minimum of 10 percent spare points complete, wired to interposing relays and terminal blocks.
3. Analog input modules shall be plug-in, rack style modules that will accept 4-20mA DC signals. Input circuitry shall provide differential input (no common) to prevent loop grounding problems. Analog to digital conversion shall have 12 bit resolution or greater. Maximum 8 points per module. Provide a minimum of 10 percent spare points wired to terminal blocks. Analog inputs terminals shall be provided to allow loop-power and analog sourced devices for each analog input.
4. Analog output modules shall be plug-in, rack style modules which transmit isolated linear 4-20mA DC signals to field devices. Loop power for analog outputs shall be provided by regulated power supplies each capable of driving a 0-600 Ohm load. Digital to analog conversion shall have 12 bit resolution or greater. Maximum 4 points per module. Provide a minimum of 10 percent spare points wired to terminal blocks.
2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINALS (OITs)
A. General:
1. The OIT shall be furnished with hardware, software installation, operation and maintenance manuals necessary to monitor and control equipment, as listed in the Specifications, and as indicated on the Drawings.
Local Control Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17520-5
2. The OIT shall be powered from a UPS backed 120VAC power supply or from the redundant 24VDC power supply in the Control Panel.
3. The OIT programming software used to program OITs shall be the latest version or release from the manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the cost to purchase and maintain proper licensing and registration with the manufacturer. The software shall include utilities to manage OIT program files, document and print the programs, configure the programming environment, monitor and test OIT programs when off-line.
4. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the programming software to the CITY as part of this project. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the CITY is registered as the owner of the software.
5. Cables, adapters, connectors, and other hardware required to render the OIT completely operational shall be provided and installed. Special programming and/or configuration cables shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR for completion of his work and shall remain the property of the CONTRACTOR.
6. The OIT shall be fully programmable and shall meet the following minimum requirements:
a. On-board Real Time Clock
b. Real-time Trending
c. Object-Oriented Display
d. 17-inch Minimum TFT Color display (CONTROL PANELs only) e. (2) Ethernet, RS-485 and RS-232 serial communication ports f. USB port and drivers for printing alarm page and screen dumps g. Touchscreen operation
h. Fanless
i. Windows 10 Professional Embedded OS NOT acceptable.
j. Quad-core processor, 1.91GHz minimum
k. Minimum of 500 GB SSD
l. Minimum of 8 GB RAM compact flash or smart media card for data storage
7. Pre-Approved OIT Hardware
a. 17” Advantech PPC-3170-3S52
2.4 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Each Control Panel shall be provided with identified terminal strips for the connection of all external conductors. There shall be sufficient terminal blocks for all external connections plus an additional 25 percent spare for future use. Terminal blocks shall be identified in accordance with approved shop drawings.
Terminal blocks shall be individual, stacking, compression type, 600VAC, 30A minimum, suitable for wire sizes No. 10 - No. 18. A printed terminal block label shall be affixed to each terminal block for identification.
B. Each field-mounted device deriving power from the Control Panel shall be individually circuit-protected with a knife-blade or plug-in fused terminal block and blown fuse indicator or miniature circuit breaker.
C. Terminal blocks for analog inputs shall include 24VDC+, 24VDC-, Analog Signal +, Analog Signal -, and shield ground terminals for each analog input. The 24VDC+ shall be individually circuit-protected per 2.4-B.
2.3 OPERATOR DEVICES
A. Pushbuttons, selector switches, and pilot lights shall be of the heavy-duty, oil-tight type, 30mm in size.
Miniature style devices are not acceptable.
B. Pilot lights shall be push-to-test, LED style with LED and lens color as indicated on the Drawings.
C. START buttons shall have green cap and STOP buttons shall have red caps. All other button caps and selector switch operator handles shall be black.
Local Control Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17520-6 D. Selector switches shall have the number of positions as indicated on the Drawings or as required to perform the intended function. Provide the number of 120VAC, 10A contacts as indicated on the Drawings or as required to perform the intended function.
E. Provide an engraved legend plate or provide laminated plastic nameplates as specified elsewhere for each device.
F. The operator devices shall have a NEMA rating equal to or more stringent than the control panel in which it is mounted.
G. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Cutler-Hammer 10250 series
2. Square D 9001SK series
3. Or Engineer Approved Equal
2.4 CONTROL RELAYS
A. Relays shall be DPDT (minimum) plug-in type utilizing rectangular blades with an indicating LED, and sockets with screw-type terminals and hold-down clips. Operating coil voltage shall be as required or indicated on the Drawings.
B. Contacts shall be rated 10 Amps at 120 VAC. Contact material shall be silver-cadmium oxide except for signal switching circuits that shall be gold plated or other noble metal.
C. Control relays shall be rated for heavy duty use, Allen Bradley Bulletin 700 series, Square D 8501 Type X, or Engineer Approved equal.
2.5 TIMING RELAYS
A. Time delay relays shall be a combination on-delay and off-delay (selectable) with adjustable timing range from 1 sec to 10 hours. The timing relays shall include an LED indicator that is illuminated when the relay is timing out. Operating coil voltage rating shall be as indicated on the Drawings with DPDT, 120VAC, 10 amp rated contracts. Provide sockets with screw-type terminals and hold-down clips.
B. Reset Timers: Reset timers shall be synchronous motor. driven with a solenoid-operated clutch. The timing relays shall include an LED indicator that is illuminated when the relay is timing out. Voltage rating shall be as indicated on the Drawings with 120VAC, 10 amp rated contacts, and timing range as required or indicated on the Drawings.
C. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. ATC
2. Or Engineer Approved Equal
2.6 SIGNAL CONDITIONERS
A. Current-to-current converter/isolators shall be 4-20 mA input, 4-20 mA output. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize signal isolators where necessary to boost or isolate signals for proper operation.
B. Pulse-to-current converters shall convert a square wave pulsed frequency to a proportional 4-20mA output and shall operate on 120 VAC.
C. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Acromag
Local Control Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17520-7
2. Moore Industries
3. AGM
4. Or Engineer Approved Equal
2.7 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES
A. Power supplies shall be DIN-rail mounted and be of the solid-state circuitry type UL-1950 and CSA-1402C certified. Input power shall be 120VAC, +/- percent 10, output voltage shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as required for proper operation of connected loads.
B. Power supplies shall be sized for 200% of the total connected load.
C. Line regulation shall be within +/- 0.05 percent with a 10 percent line change. Load regulation shall be within +/- 0.05 percent with a 50 percent load change. Output ripple shall not exceed 0.2 percent peak-to-peak:- Transient response shall be less than 50 microseconds for a 50 percent load change.
D. Power supplies shall be fully rated with an efficiency of at least 60 percent for a temperature range of 0 - 60°C or be oversized appropriately. Power supplies shall produce EMI/RR noise levels within the requirements of FCC Docket 20780.
E. Power supplies shall contain internal short circuit and overload protection. Output fusing shall be supplied on the positive terminal.
F. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Rhino
2. Sola
3. IDEC
4. Phoenix Contact
5. Or Engineer Approved Equal
2.8 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
A. The UPS shall be on-line, with automatic bypass switching upon failure, and with automatic bypass switching for maintenance. The UPS shall include built-in surge protection, rectifier/battery charger, batteries, inverter, static transfer switch, and solid-state controls to provide a true sine-wave output.
B. Input power 120VAC, +/-10%, 60Hz.
C. Output power shall be 120VAC +/- 5% 60Hz with a harmonic distribution at less than 5% (voltage).
D. All RTU panels shall be supplied with a 1000 KVA minimum UPS unit. Actual KVA rating of each UPS shall be as required to operate all loads being served for a minimum of 20 minutes without input power. KVA in-rush rating shall not be less than 150% of connected load's in-rush current. UPS load calculations must be submitted with the UPS for approval.
E. Switching response time shall be less than 4 milliseconds.
F. Batteries shall be sealed, no maintenance type, designed for 5 years minimum service.
G. Indicators shall include: On-line or bypass operation, input power failure, UPS fault, UPS battery low.
H. The UPS shall be provided with dry contacts that close upon operation on battery power. These contacts shall be wired into a digital input on the PLC so as to provide notification that the panel is operating on battery power.
Local Control Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17520-8 I. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. APC – Smart UPS
2. Or Engineer Approved Equal
2.9 ETHERNET ROUTER/ SWITCH
A. The Ethernet router shall be an industrial 8-port Managed Ethernet Switch w/ the required fiber-optic port.
B. The Ethernet Switch shall be a managed switch and shall be a Layer 2, Ethernet Switch w/ multi-slots for fiber-optic and Ethernet connections. Number of fiber optic connections and Ethernet ports shall be sufficient to network the process areas as indicated in the Contract Documents.
C. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Cisco Industrial Ethernet 4000 Series
2. Or Engineer Approved Equal
2.10 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL
A. The Pump Station Control Panel shall be supplied with a Single-Panel Housing Fiber Optic Patch Panel.
B. Fiber Optic Patch Panel shall be a single panel housing with LC multimode inserts (Corning Model Number SPH-01P)
C. Fiber Optic Patch Panel shall contain CCH Pigtailed splice cassettes to enable faster field splicing and easy modular management of connectorization within the housing (Corning Model Number CCH-CS12-E4-P00QE) D. The fiber optic patch panel shall connect to the control panels managed Ethernet switch utilizing fiber optic patch cable (LC/LC Connectors Multimode L-COM FODBIFLC-01)
2.11 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide one control and one timing relay of each type utilized.
B. Provide one spare power supply of each size and type utilized.
C. Provide (3) spare fuses of each size and type utilized.
D. Refer to related specification sections for additional spare parts required.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
A. CONTROL PANEL's shall contain components as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Where AC and DC signals must intercept each other, cross wires at 90° angles. Route AC and DC signals in separate wireways. Provide blank wireways for field wiring by the CONTRACTOR.
C. All internal wiring shall be contained in plastic raceways or troughs having removable covers. Wiring to doormounted devices shall be extra flexible and anchored to doors using wire anchors cemented in place. Exposed terminals of door-mounted devices shall be guarded to prevent accidental contact with energized terminals.
D. Minimum control panel conductor size for power shall be No.12 AWG. Minimum conductor size for control wiring shall be No. 14 unless protected by a 10A overcurrent protective device or smaller, in which case it can Local Control Panels
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17520-9 be No.16 AWG (in PLC and operator interface cabinets only). Analog signal cables shall be 600V, No.16 AWG twisted shielded pair.
E. Wire markers shall be heat shrinkable, be a minimum of 3/8-inches in length and placed as near as possible to the end of the wire.
F. Identification of panel-mounted devices control equipment enclosure shall be engraved laminated plastic with black letters on white background. Use minimum 3/16-inch letters for identifying individual panel components. Use minimum 3/8-inch letters for identifying control equipment enclosure.
G. CONTROL PANEL enclosure doors that contain 120VAC devices shall be bonded to the enclosure grounding lug.
H. Each PLC I/O point connected to an external device shall be terminated at terminal blocks.
I. All analog signals shall be individually fused at the terminal block. See additional requirements as specified elsewhere in these specifications.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. CONTROL PANEL(s) shall be installed by the CONTRACTOR, where and as indicated on the drawings.
B. All front accessible panel-mounted devices shall be mounted a minimum of 42-inches above finished floor elevation.
C. CONTROL PANEL(s) shall be stored in an indoor, dry location at the jobsite to protect from condensation, damage, and the effects of weather.
D. CONTROL PANEL(s) interiors, and exteriors shall be cleaned, and coatings shall be touched up to match original finish upon completion of the work.
E. See Section 17000 for additional installation requirements.
3.3 TESTING, STARTUP & TRAINING
A. CONTROL PANEL(s) shall be factory assembled and a factory acceptance test shall be conducted at the control panel shop for sequence of operation prior to jobsite delivery (see also B. An additional test shall be performed on-site after all field devices have been installed and connected. The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate to the ENGINEER, through the functional field test, the proper operation and function of each I/O point, instrument and display.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of its field staff to provide a minimum of 8 hours of on-site training to the CITY for the completed control system.
-END OF SECTION -
Site Access System
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17600-1 SECTION 17600
SITE ACCESS SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENT
A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish, and install the site access system and all appurtenant materials and equipment.
Site access system shall be suitable for the services listed, complete and operable in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
1.2 RELATED WORK AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
A. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Specification Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors to review all Sections and ensure a complete and coordinated project.
B. Related Specification Sections include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Division 2, Site Work
b. Division 3, Concrete
c. Division 5, Metals
d. Division 16, Electrical
e. Division 17, Instrumentation
C. Comply with the following Codes and Standards:
a. UL325: Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems b. UL991: Standard for Testing of Safety-Related Controls employing Solid State Devices c. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Sections 01300 - Submittals.
B. Manufacturer’s product literature, specifications, features and accessories, materials of construction, and data in sufficient detail to demonstrate compliance with the Specification requirements. Manufacturer’s literature and data shall be marked to clearly delineate all applicable information and crossing out all inapplicable information.
C. Detailed drawings for each gate operator showing layout and dimensions of gate, gate operator, connections to gate, gate operator support foundation, vehicle sensor system, gate operator entry system, and conduit/wiring for gate operator and accessories. Drawings shall clearly show the precise location of each vehicle detector loop and lead-in cable, loop dimensions, number of detector loop cable turns, slot width and depth, and placement of cable within the slot.
D. Written confirmation that each proposed operator unit is adequate for the specified gate (size, weight, and required pull force).
E. Manufacturer’s requirements for gate operator support foundation(s), including minimum dimensions, concrete strength, and reinforcing steel. Manufacturer requirements for gate operator frame anchorage, including anchor bolt locations, size and embedment depth.
F. Complete wiring connection diagram for each gate operator and accessories.
G. Gate operator safety literature and required warning signs. Warning signs shall be in compliance with requirements of UL325.
Site Access System
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17600-2
1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Installation requirements and procedures.
B. Complete instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of equipment involved. Instructions and documentation not related to the equipment furnished must be removed or crossed out. O&M manuals must be individually tailored to the project and equipment as furnished.
C. Bill of Materials, component data sheets, descriptive literature, product specification sheets, wiring diagrams and calibration procedures. O&M manuals must be individually tailored to the project and equipment as furnished.
D. Complete nomenclature of replaceable parts, part numbers, current cost, name and address of nearest vendor of replacement parts. Information on equipment or components not related to equipment furnished must be removed or crossed out. O&M manuals must be individually tailored to the project and equipment as furnished.
E. Complete and detailed instruction for adjusting all equipment settings, including: input power, motor settings, torque settings, status and alarm signals, etc.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment to be furnished under this section shall be the product of firms regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of this type of equipment. Manufacturer shall assume responsibility for, and guarantee performance of equipment furnished. However, this shall not be construed as relieving the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for the proper installation and functioning of the work.
B. Equipment shall be designed and installed to conform to drawings, specifications, engineering data, related equipment furnished by other suppliers and recommendations of the component manufacturers.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Gate operators shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of two (2) years from date of acceptance by the District against defects in materials or workmanship. Defective parts shall be repaired or replaced at no charge. The warranty shall be in printed form and shall be included in the O&M Manual.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 AUTOMATIC SWING GATE OPERATOR
A. General:
1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install automatic vehicular swing gate operators to fulfill the function indicated within the Contract Documents. Each vehicular swing gate operator shall be provided complete with all drive and electrical components. Gate operators shall be heavy-duty industrial swing type openers.
2. Vehicular swing gate operator unit shall automatically open and close swing gates to provide convenience and security. Operator unit shall function with standard features, options, and accessories including, but not limited to: inherent primary and secondary entrapment protection devices; connection of contact or non-contact entrapment protection devices, controls, single and three button control stations, digital keypads, coded cards, vehicle detector loops, telephone entry systems, and revenue control equipment. Unit shall operate on 115 VAC, single phase, 60 Hz power.
3. Unless specified otherwise, the gate operator shall be controlled by a card reader system. Card reading system shall be compatible with gate operator.
Site Access System
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17600-3 B. Design Requirements:
1. Operator unit shall be sized as required for the specified swing gate and site conditions. Operator unit shall be completely assembled, pre-wired, and tested in the factory.
2. CONTRACTOR and operator unit manufacturer shall coordinate with gate manufacturer to insure that the selected operator and accessories will be suitable for the proposed gate. Operator unit shall open/close the gate at a rate not greater than 7 degrees per second. Operator unit shall provide a minimum pull force of 75 pounds.
3. Operator unit supplier shall provide all required operator accessories and appurtenances, including vehicle sensing loops, entry system, and entrapment protection sensors, to ensure compatibility between accessories and operator and to provide sole source responsibility.
C. Minimum Mechanical Features and Components:
1. Weather-resistant galvannealed steel cabinet with automotive type powder coat finish.
2. Lockable access panel for manual disconnect and adjustable limit switches.
3. Cold rolled solid steel output drive shaft with heavy –duty ball bearings.
4. Gate operator arms and gate attachment brackets.
5. Disconnect/release for manual operation of gate.
D. Electrical Features and Components:
1. High-starting torque, continuous duty 0.5 HP (minimum) motor for single leaf gate, or two (2) 0.5 HP (minimum) motors for double leaf gates, 115 VAC, 60 Hz, single phase with thermal overload protection.
2. Solid state controller with adjustable timers, LED indicators, and self-diagnostics.
3. Adjustable motor current sensing to detect obstructions, with separate adjustments for opening and closing directions.
4. Adjustable motor RPM sensing to detect obstructions, with separate adjustments for open and closing directions.
5. Allow connection of external devices such as access control systems.
6. Integral detector loop inputs compatible with exit, shadow, and interrupt loops.
7. Controller housed in separate control box.
8. Power input “On/Off” switch.
9. Built-in 120 VAC duplex power receptacle for accessories.
10. Transformer for low voltage power. Fuse protected 24 VAC and 24 VDC secondary power shall be available on terminal strip to power accessory devices.
11. Adjustable precision snap-action type limit switches to control gate position.
12. Contacts for opening, closing and reversing accessories, as well as contact and non-contact obstruction sensing devices. In addition, a dry contact for the gate in a closed position shall be provided for remote indication. The dry contact shall be rated for 5A at 120 VAC and shall be pre-wired to a terminal strip.
E. Entrapment Protection Devices:
1. Each gate operator shall be provided with inherent entrapment protection devices which comply with Class III of UL Standard 325. Unless specified otherwise, the primary entrapment protection device shall be adjustable motor RPM sensing and the secondary entrapment protection device shall be adjustable motor current sensing.
Site Access System
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17600-4
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Key Pads:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide key pads in the location shown within the Contract Documents. Each key pad shall be pedestal mounted for operation of an automatic gate operator at each entry point as shown on the Drawings. Key pads shall be suitable for outdoor exposure.
2. Key pads shall be furnished by a Security System Subcontractor that has been approved by the CITY.
B. Vehicle Sensor System:
1. Unless specified otherwise, each gate operator shall be provided with a vehicle sensor system. Each vehicle sensor system shall consist of in-ground vehicle detector loops for entrance and exit, lead-in cables, appurtenances, and gate operator integral control inputs for detector loops.
2. Detector loop cable shall be #14 AWG (minimum), stranded copper, single conductor, with cross-linked polyethylene insulation and suitable for direct burial. Loop size and number of turns shall be as determined by the gate operator manufacturer for vehicles ranging in size from small automobiles to large high bed trucks. Sufficient quantity of turns shall be provided to ensure the loop functions properly with the gate operator detector loop controls. The detector loop cable shall be continuous (no splices).
3. Lead-in cable shall be #16 AWG, stranded thinned copper, twisted pair, with aluminum/polyester shield, tinned copper drain, and polyethylene insulation. Lead-in cable shall be twisted four times per foot, minimum.
C. Photoelectric Entrapment Protection Sensors:
1. Photoelectric sensors shall include separate transmitter and receiver units, mounting arms, wiring, and appurtenances. Sensors shall prevent gate closure on obstructions within its path.
D. Key Pad Pedestals:
1. Location shall be as specified in Section 2.2.A.1.
2. Pedestal shall be constructed of rectangular steel tubing with a base plate that is sized per the card reader manufacturer’s mounting recommendations. The steel tubing shall be capable of concealing the conductors required for card reader operation. Each card reader housing shall be provided with solid back plate sized to accommodate the proposed key pad, and solid top and sides to shield the key pad from direct sunlight exposure.
3. The CONTRACTOR and the Security System Subcontractor shall be responsible for coordinating pedestal design, fabrication and construction. The CONTRACTOR shall confirm key pad pedestal housing heights, coating, colors and customization options with the CITY.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION AND INSPECTION
A. Manufacturer shall inspect and test each automatic gate operation component to assure smooth opening and closing, quite operation, control input response and proper function.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. CONTRACTOR shall install the site access system, including gate operators and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation instruction and approved shop drawings, UL Standards, and as indicated in the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall connect all necessary electrical power and control wiring, including furnishing of all necessary materials in addition to the provided with the specified equipment. Wiring materials and installation shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturer’s requirements.
Site Access System
Vernon Well No. 22 Equipment and Site Improvements Page 17600-5 B. CONTRACTOR shall provide a NEMA 4X stainless steel junction box or pull box directly adjacent to gate operator for supply power and remote communication conduits, as shown in the Contract Documents.
C. CONTRACTOR shall install entrance and exit vehicle sensor system detector loops for each gate operator.
Detector loops shall be placed in slots that are saw cut into the pavement. Detector loop location and dimensions shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s approved shop drawings. Slot width and depth shall be as determined by the gate operator manufacturer. Detector loop cable shall be placed into the slots and filled with epoxy in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.
D. Transition from detector loop cable to lead-in cable shall be in a precast concrete hand hole located directly adjacent to the driveway.
E. CONTRACTOR shall install grounding rod through the gate operator support foundation that is sized per the manufacturer’s recommendation. The operator cabinet enclosure shall be bonded to the ground rod with a #6 AWG bare copper conductor.
F. CONTRACTOR shall install warning signs securely with stainless steel fasteners and within view of both sides of the gate as required by the manufacturer and UL 325.
3.3 TESTING, STARTUP & TRAINING
A. Manufacturer’s representative shall adjust the gate operator and accessories in accordance with the equipment installation manual and shall test the adjustments to verify correct settings for the installation. Entrapment protection shall be tested separately and independently with the other entrapment protection disabled. -END OF SECTION -
Appendix A
VERNON STANDARD DRAWINGS
SV1466 - Pipe Supports Across Trenches
V2264 - Typical Trench Paving Section
V2264
TYPICAL TRENCH
PAVING SECTION
REVISIONS
V2264
TYPICAL TRENCH PAVING SECTION
FOR SEWER LATERAL
REVISIONS
WV1830 - City of Vernon Frame &
Cover for Water Service
LOCATION MAP NOT TO SCALE PROJECT SITE VICINITY MAP NOT TO SCALE VERNON, CALIFORNIA 90058 4305 S. SANTA FE AVE PUBLIC UTILITIES DEPARTMENT PLANS FOR CITY OF VERNON WORK SITE LOCATION WELL NO. 22
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg
W:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-G1.0 TITLE SHEET.dwg - Tab: TITLE SHEET - by mmills on 12/01/21 at 11:15:01 AM Dimscale = 10; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com
Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22
N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" 50TH ST
BOYLE AVE FRUITLAND AVE
SOTO ST TITLE SHEET G1.0 RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGE TO ANY PUBLIC OR PRIVATE VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL LOCATION AND SIZE OF ALL UTILITIES, PIPES, AND/OR STRUCTURES AND SHALL BE NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASCERTAIN THE TRUE UTILITIES, SHOWN OR NOT SHOWN HEREON STANDARD SYMBOLS: = WDSE
T FIRE DEPT. CONNECTION GRADE BREAK FINISHED SURFACE FLOW LINE GAS VALVE RISER HIGH POINT LOS ANGELES JUNCTION LINEAR FEET MANHOLE NOT IN CONTRACT POST INDICATOR VALVE LF = PIV
=
=== NIC MHLAJ= GVR
= HP=
==
= FSGB FL MOC MIDPOINT OF CURVE SIDEWALK SEWER MANHOLE THICKNESS TOP OF CURB TRAFFIC PULL BOX TOP OF "X" WATER VALVE RISER EXISTING ELEVATION PROPOSED ELEVATION WATER MANHOLE TOP OF RAIL (TRACK) =
= (153.34) 153.34
= WMH
=
== TXWVR TH
=
= TPB TR
= SW
= SMH TC= P = PROPERTY LINE RADIUS POWER POLE R/W RIGHT OF WAY =
R
= PL
=
L PP
= PVMT
= PAVEMENT (A.C./CONC.) ASPHALT CONCRETE BEGIN CURVE BEGIN CURB RETURN BACK OF WALK CATCH BASIN C = CENTERLINE CB = CL=
== BC BCR BW
= AC
= VERNON STANDARD LEGEND: C-G
= CURB-GUTTER EXIST
= EXISTING FIRE HYDRANT FINISHED GROUND/GRADE FH = FDC = FG = CHAIN LINK FENCE CONCRETE STORM DRAIN STORM DRAIN MANHOLE END CURVE RETURN DRIVEWAY APPROACH ELECTIC MANHOLE EDGE OF GUTTER EXISTING ELECTRIC PULL BOX EMH = EX
= EPB
= ECR= EG= CONC
=
=
D
= DMH DWY
= CLF
=
L ECL
= EAST OF CENTERLINE WCL
= WEST OF CENTERLINE TL
= TRAFFIC LOOP THR= TRAFFIC HOME RUN TSC
= TRAFFIC SIGNAL CABINET WATER OR GAS VALVE TRAFFIC SIGNAL = TREE== GRATE POWER POLE BENCH MARK FIRE HYDRANT==== SEWER MANHOLE WATER MANHOLE STORM DRAIN MANHOLE ELECTRIC MANHOLE TELEPHONE MANHOLE==== OVR = OIL VALVE RISER TS
= TRAFFIC SIGNAL RW
= RECLAIMED WATER S.P.P.W.C
= STD. PLANS FOR PUBLIC TMH
= TELEPHONE MANHOLE SG
= STRAIGHT GRADE WORKS CONSTRUCTION
= RCB REINFORCED CONC. BOX CALTRANS STANDARDS A20A to A20D PAVEMENT MARKERS LACFCD L.A.D.W.P = LOS ANGELES COUNTY
= FLOOD CONTROL DISTRICT LOS ANGELES DEPARTMENT OF WATER AND POWER LAC = LOS ANGELES COUNTY COV
= CITY OF VERNON D.D.I.= DISTRICT DRAIN. IMPROVE.
= EXIST. A.C. PAVEMENT ES-4A to ES-8 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND TRAFFIC LINES POTHOLED THICKNESS STD = STANDARD RAILWAY COMPANY CITY OF VERNON GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES: STATIONING IS ALONG THE CENTERLINE OF STREET. WORKS ASSOCIATION AND ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA. ANY CONTRACTOR PERFORMING WORK ON THIS PROJECT SHALL BECOME FAMILIAR WITH THE FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION - SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA CHAPTERS OF THE AMERICAN PUBLIC THE CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE 2018 EDITION OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS WORK TO BE DONE IS SHOWN IN HEAVY SOLID LINES, AND PER CONTRACT NO. 1192-19. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FURNISHING AND MAINTAINING ALL TRAFFIC CONTROLS AND THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE CITY OF VERNON DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL ACTIVITIES WITH UTILITY OWNERS AND RAILROAD COMPANIES. AT LEAST 48 HOURS PRIOR TO THE BEGINNING OF WORK. PHONE NO. (323) 583-8811. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT UNDERGROUND SERVICE DIG ALERT AT 811 DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FROM ITS OPERATIONS, WHETHER OR NOT THESE FACILITIES ARE SITES AND SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO EXISTING FACILITIES RESULTING 8. SIGNS DURING THE ENTIRE PROJECT. 1. 3. 2. 4. 2 DAYS PRIOR TO ANY DIGGING. 6. 7. 5. SHOWN ON THESE PLANS. PROJECT LOCATION SHEET LIST TABLE DWG. NO SHEET NO. SHEET TITLE GENERAL 1 G1.0 TITLE SHEET
2 G2.0 GENERAL NOTES
3 G2.1 CONSTRUCTION NOTES
4 G2.2 CONSTRUCTION NOTES
5 G3.0 WELL 22 HYDRAULIC PROFILE CIVIL6 C1.0 PROPOSED SITE PLAN 7 C2.0 GRADING PLAN
8 C3.0 15-IN SD PLAN AND PROFILE9 C3.1 15-IN SD PRVATE PLAN AND PROFILE 10 C3.2 12-IN WATER PLAN AND PROFILE 11 C3.3 8-IN SEWER PLAN AND PROFILE 12 C4.0 CIVIL DETAILS 1 13 C4.1 CIVIL DETAILS 2 MECHANICAL 14 M1.0 MECHANICAL SITE PLAN 15 M2.0 MECHANICAL SECTIONS 16 M2.1 MECHANICAL BUILDING 17 M2.2 MECHANICAL BUILDING 18 M3.0 MECHANICAL DETAILS 1 19 M3.1 MECHANICAL DETAILS 2 20 M3.2 MECHANICAL DETAILS 3 21 M3.3 MECHANICAL DETAILS 4 22 M3.4 MECHANICAL DETAILS 5 23 M3.5 MECHANICAL DETAILS 6 STRUCTURAL 24 S1.0 STRUCTURAL NOTES 25 S1.1 STRUCTURAL NOTES 26 S1.2 STRUCTURAL NOTES 27 S2.0 FOUNDATION PLAN 28 S2.1 ROOF FRAMING PLAN 29 S3.0 ELEVATIONS 30 S4.0 CONCRETE DETAILS 31 S5.0 STEEL DETAILS 32 S5.1 STEEL DETAILS 33 S6.0 MASONRY DETAILS ELECTRICAL 34 E0.0 ELECTRICAL NOTES 35 E0.1 ELECTRICAL LEGEND 36 E1.0 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 37 E1.1 PANEL SCHEDULE 38 E2.0 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN 39 E2.1 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PLAN 40 E2.2 LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE PLAN 41 E3.0 GROUNDING PLAN 42 E4.0 CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE 43 E5.0 PLC IO DIAGRAM 44 E6.0 CONTROL SCHEMATIC I 45 E6.1 CONTROL SCHEMATIC II 46 E7.0 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 47 E7.1 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 2 48 E7.2 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 3 INSTRUMENTATION 49 I0.0 P&ID LEGEND AND SYMBOLS 50 I1.0 NETWORK DIAGRAM 51 I2.0 WELL 22 P&ID 52 I2.1 SES AND GENERATOR CATHODIC PROTECTION 53 CP1.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION DETAILS 1 54 CP1.1 CATHODIC PROTECTION DETAILS 2 55 CP1.2 CATHODIC PROTECTION DETAILS 3 56 CP1.3 CATHODIC PROTECTION DETAILS 4 57 CP1.4 CATHODIC PROTECTION DETAILS 5 58 CP1.5 CATHODIC PROTECTION DETAILS 6 FOR REFERENCE ONLY 59 REF1 UTILITY REFERENCE SHEET I 60 REF2 UTILITY REFERENCE SHEET II 1 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS OWNER ADDRESS VERNON PUBLIC UTILITIES DEPARTMENT 4305 S. SANTA FE AVE. VERNON, CA 90058 CONTACT: MARK AUMENTADO, E.I.T. WELL NO. 22 SITE ADDRESS 2828 E. 50TH ST. VERNON, CA 90058 DESIGN ENGINEER PACIFIC ADVANCED CIVIL ENGINEERING 17520 NEWHOPE STREET, SUITE 200 FOUNTAIN VALLEY, CA 92708 CONTACT: DUNCAN LEE, P.E. Benchmark Note: THE ELEVATIONS SHOWN HEREON ARE BASED UPON THE LOS ANGELES COUNTY PUBLIC WORKS BENCH MARK No. LY-10571, RIVERA QUAD 2005 ADJUSTMENT, ELEVATION= 184.160 FEET, (NAVD 88). Datum Statement: THE BEARINGS SHOWN HEREON ARE BASED ON THE BEARING BETWEEN POINT NO. 10001 AND POINT NO. 10002, BEING N89°02'08"E, AS DERIVED BY REAL TIME NETWORK MEASUREMENT BASED UPON THE CALIFORNIA COORDINATE SYSTEM 1983 (CCS83), ZONE V, NORTH AMERICAN DATUM OF 1983 (NA2011, EPOCH 2018.750). STATION NORTHING EASTING 10001 1821813.5646 6495119.6178 10002 1881846.9198 6497100.7429 GENERAL NOTES 1. THE OWNER SHALL REFER TO THE CITY OF VERNON OR THEIR REPRESENTATIVE. THE CITY SHALL REFER TO THE CITY OF VERNON OR THEIR REPRESENTATIVE. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO THE CONTRACTOR HIRED TO COMPLETE THE WORK. THE DESIGN ENGINEER SHALL REFER TO PACIFIC ADVANCED CIVIL ENGINEERING. 2. ALL WORK ON THIS PROJECT SHALL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH 1. THESE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS; 2. THE LATEST EDITION OF THE CITY OF VERNON'S DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS; 3. AWWA SPECIFICATIONS. 3. ALL REQUIRED PERMITS AND NECESSARY CITY BUSINESS LICENSE(S) SHALL BE OBTAINED BY THE CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. 4. DURING ALL PHASES OF CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING SUSPENSION OF WORK, UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBSERVE, FOLLOW AND IMPLEMENT ALL THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NPDES AND STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PROGRAM AND KEEP THE WORK SITE CLEAN AND FREE FROM RUBBISH AND DEBRIS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO ABATE DUST NUISANCE BY CLEANING, SWEEPING AND SPRINKLING WITH WATER AND USING DUST FENCES OR OTHER METHODS AS DIRECTED BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE THROUGHOUT THE CONSTRUCTION OPERATION. 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL KEEP A STRICT RECORD OF ALL CHANGES AND SUBMIT THIS RECORD TO THE CITY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO COORDINATE TRANSFERRING "AS-BUILT" INFORMATION ON THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND DELIVER THE CERTIFIED "AS-BUILT" PLANS TO THE CITY BEFORE THE RELEASE FOR OCCUPANCY OR FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT SHALL BE FILED. 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL EXERCISE DUE CARE TO AVOID INJURY TO EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS OR FACILITIES, UTILITY FACILITIES, ADJACENT PROPERTY, AND TREES AND SHRUBBERY THAT ARE NOT TO BE REMOVED. ALL DAMAGE CAUSED TO STREETS, INCLUDING HAUL ROUTES, ALLEYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS OR STREET FURNISHINGS, OR TO PRIVATE PROPERTY SHALL BE REPAIRED AT THE SOLE EXPENSE OF THE CONTRACTOR TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE CITY. 7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DESIGNATE AND KEEP ON THE PROJECT AT ALL TIMES DURING ITS PROGRESS A COMPETENT SUPERINTENDENT WHO SHALL NOT BE REPLACED WITHOUT A WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CITY. THE SUPERINTENDENT WILL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE AT THE SITE AND SHALL HAVE AUTHORITY TO ACT ON BEHALF OF THE CONTRACTOR. ALL COMMUNICATIONS GIVEN TO THE SUPERINTENDENT SHALL BE AS BINDING AS IF GIVEN TO THE CONTRACTOR. DURING PERIODS WHEN THE WORK IS SUSPENDED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE APPROPRIATE ARRANGEMENTS FOR ANY EMERGENCY WORK WHICH MAY BE REQUIRED. 8. WHEN THE WORK OR ANY PORTION OF IT IS SUFFICIENTLY COMPLETE TO BE UTILIZED OR PLACED INTO SERVICE, THE CITY SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT UPON WRITTEN NOTIFICATION TO THE CONTRACTOR TO UTILIZE SUCH PORTIONS OF THE WORK AND TO PLACE THE OPERABLE PORTIONS INTO SERVICE AND TO OPERATE SAME. UPON SAID NOTICE AND COMMENCEMENT OF UTILIZATION OR OPERATION BY THE CITY, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RELIEVED OF THE DUTY OF MAINTAINING THE PORTIONS SO UTILIZED OR PLACED INTO OPERATION; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, THAT NOTHING IN THIS NOTE SHALL BE CONSTRUED AS RELIEVING THE CONTRACTOR OF THE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR COMPLETING THE WORK IN ITS ENTIRETY, FOR MAKING GOOD DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIALS, FOR PROTECTING THE WORK FROM DAMAGE, AND FOR BEING RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGE. 9. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SO CONDUCT HIS OPERATIONS AS TO OFFER THE LEAST POSSIBLE OBSTRUCTION AND INCONVENIENCE, AND HE SHALL HAVE UNDER CONSTRUCTION NO GREATER LENGTH OR AMOUNT OF WORK THAN HE CAN PROSECUTE PROPERLY WITH DUE REGARD TO THE RIGHTS OF THE PUBLIC. CONVENIENT ACCESS TO DRIVEWAYS, HOUSES, AND BUILDINGS ALONG THE LINE OF WORK SHALL BE MAINTAINED AND TEMPORARY CROSSINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED AND MAINTAINED IN GOOD CONDITION. NO MORE THAN ONE CROSSING OR INTERSECTION STREET OR ROAD SHALL BE CLOSED AT ANY ONE TIME. 10. UNTIL THE ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE THE RESPONSIBLE CHARGE AND CARE OF THE WORK AND OF THE MATERIALS TO BE USED THEREIN (INCLUDING MATERIALS FOR WHICH HE HAS RECEIVED PARTIAL PAYMENT OR MATERIALS WHICH HAVE BEEN FURNISHED BY THE CITY) AND SHALL BEAR THE RISK OF INJURY, LOSS, OR DAMAGE TO ANY PART THEREOF BY THE ACTION OF ELEMENTS OR FROM ANY OTHER CAUSE, WHETHER ARISING FROM THE EXECUTION OR FROM THE NONEXECUTION OF THE WORK. 11. IN ACCORDANCE WITH GENERALLY ACCEPTED CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SOLELY AND COMPLETELY RESPONSIBLE FOR CONDITIONS OF THE JOB SITE, INCLUDING SAFETY OF ALL PERSONS AND PROPERTY DURING PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK, AND THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FULLY COMPLY WITH ALL STATE, FEDERAL AND OTHER LAWS, RULES, REGULATIONS, AND ORDERS RELATING TO SAFETY OF WORKERS AND ALL OTHERS. THIS MAY INCLUDE THE ISSUANCE OF PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT. 12. THE LANDS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY FOR THE FACILITY TO BE CONSTRUCTED WILL BE PROVIDED BY THE OWNER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE HIS OWN ARRANGEMENTS AND PAY ALL EXPENSES FOR ADDITIONAL AREA REQUIRED BY HIM BEYOND THE LIMITS OF THE OWNER'S LANDS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY. 13. DIG ALERT SHALL BE NOTIFIED BY CALLING 1-800-227-2600 PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION OR PIPELINE INSTALLATION TO SCHEDULE AN INSPECTION. INSPECTION MUST BE MADE BEFORE TRENCHING FOR BELOW-GROUND PIPING IS BACK-FILLED. 14. ALL FIELD SURVEYING SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. 15. ANY INSPECTION BY THE CITY OR THE ENGINEER SHALL NOT IN ANY WAY RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR FROM ANY OBLIGATION TO PERFORM THE WORK IN STRICT COMPLIANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE CODES AND AGENCY REQUIREMENTS. 16. IF A CONFLICT OCCURS BETWEEN ANY OF THE PROJECT DOCUMENTS AND PLANS THE MORE STRINGENT SHALL APPLY. 17. THE ENGINEER WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSTRUCTION MEANS, METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES ON PROCEDURES OR FOR SAFETY PRECAUTIONS OR PROGRAMS UTILIZED IN CONNECTION WITH THE WORK, AND WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO CARRY OUT THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 18. THE EXISTENCE AND LOCATIONS OF ALL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES AS SHOWN ON THESE PLANS WERE ASCERTAINED BY EXISTING INFORMATION AND ARE APPROXIMATE. NEITHER THE OWNER NOR THE ENGINEER ASSUMES ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITIES NOT SHOWN OR NOT IN THE LOCATION SHOWN. 19. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE OWNER AND CITY AND THE ENGINEER OF ALL DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO THE COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. 20. PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL EXPOSE EXISTING WATER SYSTEM AT THE PROPOSED CONNECTION POINTS AND VERIFY ITS EXISTING ELEVATION, LOCATION, AND ACTUAL DIAMETER. 21. ALL BURIED ELECTRICAL CONDUIT SHALL BE ENCASED IN RED CONCRETE. REF REFERENCE W/ WITH TOS TOP OF SLAB FL FLOW LINE FF FINISHED FLOOR ELECT ELECTRICAL CONT. CONTINUOUS CLR CLEAR ABBREVIATIONS MANHOLE OR MAINTENANCE HOLE ELEVATION EXHAUST EACH WAY EQUIPMENT EACH FACE END OF CURVE EACH EXISTING EDGE OF PAVEMENT ELECTRIC ECCENTRIC EXH EQUIP EXIST. E.W. EPEL. ELEC ECC EFECEA NORMALLY OPEN NORTHING NORMAL WATER LEVEL NORMALLY CLOSED NOT TO SCALE MILLION GALLONS PER DAY MILLIGRAMS PER LITER MISCELLANEOUS MINIMUM, MINUTE MECHANICAL JOINT
NN/O N/C NTS NWL MGD MJ MG/L MISC MIN MH DRAWING DISSOLVED OXYGEN DIAMETER DETAILS DIGITAL INPUT COLD WATER CENTER CHECK VALVE CYLINDER DISSOLVED AIR FLOATATION ELECTRICAL POWER DUCTILE IRON PIPE DWG DIA DTL DIP DO ECTR CYL DAF DI CVCW CHUCK COUPLING CUBIC FOOT PER SECOND CLEANOUT TO GRADE CUBIC FOOT PER HOUR CUBIC FOOT PER MINUTE CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CLEANOUT CONSTRUCTION BOTTOM BEGIN VERTICAL CURVE CPLG CMU COTG CONST COCFH CFM CFS BOT BVC CH MECHANICAL MOTOR CONTROL CENTER LEVEL TRANSDUCER LOW PRESSURE JUNCTION BOX POUNDS MAXIMUM MANUFACTURER INVERT POUNDS PER DAY LOW WATER LEVEL LINEAR FEET MCC MECH LTMAX. MFR L.W.L. LPJBLBS INV. LBS/D LF HERTZ INVERT ELEVATION INFLUENT INCHES HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC INSIDE DIAMETER GALLONS PER MINUTE HORSEPOWER HIGH WATER LEVEL HORIZONTAL IRRIGATION HZINFL INIEIDIRR HOA GPM HPH.W.L. HORIZ. ARCH ARCHITECTURAL AIR RELEASE VALVE BEGINNING OF CURVE BLIND FLANGE BEAM, BENCHMARK AIR VACUUM VALVE BFBMBCARV AVV APPROXIMATELY ANALOG INPUT ASPHALT CONCRETE AGGREGATE BASE APPROX AI A.C. A.B. GALLONS PER DAY GALLONS GAUGE FORCE MAIN FEET PER SECOND FEET FUTURE GALVANIZED FLANGE GRADE BREAK GPD GAL GAGALV GB FMFPS FTFUT FLG FLOOR DRAIN FINISHED GROUND FIRE HYDRANT FDFGFH UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE VOLTS ALTERNATING CURRENT VCP W.S. WAS W/O WU.N.O. TEMP VAC TSP VERT. TYP VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE WATER SURFACE WITHOUT WATER TEMPERATURE TWISTED SHIELDED PAIR VERTICAL TYPICAL REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE SEQUENCING BATCH REACTOR REMOVE AND RELOCATE (REINSTALL) REMOVE AND SAVE (SALVAGE) RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE TEL TBT&B TBA TDH STA SECT. SQ. SPEC. SHT. TO BE ABANDONED TOP AND BOTTOM TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD THRUST BLOCK TELEPHONE STATION SPECIFICATION SECTION SQUARE SHEET R&R SBR SSCH. R&W R&S RWRPM REQ'D RAS RED RQMT REMOVE AND WASTE RECLAIMED WATER SLOPE SCHEDULE REQUIREMENT REQUIRED REDUCER PRESSURE SWITCH, PIPE SUPPORT POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH PRESSURE REGULATING (REDUCING) VALVE POWER POLE, PIPE PENETRATION NET POSITIVE SECTION HEAD POINT OF REVERSE CURVE PSPSI PVRPVC PRV PRFV PPPRC PLUG VALVE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RADIUS PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE PG OCODNPSH PRESSURE GAUGE OUTSIDE DIAMETER ON CENTER LFPS LOW FLOW PUMP STATION PCC PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE CML & C CONCRETE MORTAR LINED & COATED FLG'S FLANGED HDPE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE SF. SQUARE FEET TC TOP OF CURB TG TOP OF GRATE LI LEVEL INDICATOR SCOPE OF WORK XX SHEET WHERE DETAIL IS SHOWN DETAIL OR SECTION LETTER LEGEND M6B 1 CONTROL PANEL DETAIL LETTER SHEET #
XXX DECOMPOSED GRAVEL FILL CONCRETE EQUIPMENT CALL OUT (SEE EQUIPMENT LIST) PROPERTY BOUNDARY EXISTING 1' CONTOUR EXISTING 5' CONTOUR PROPOSED 1' CONTOUR PROPOSED 5' CONTOUR X EXISTING FENCEX PROPOSED CHAINLINK FENCE PROPOSED FUTURE 5' CONTOUR SETBACK 1555
1555 CONSTRUCTION NOTES INCL. FITTINGS, VALVES & MISC. EQUIPMENT (SEE THE SAME SHT.) ASPHALT BACKFILL ENGINEERED BACKFILL DEMO 1. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE PIPE SUPPORTS PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS, PROJECT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS AND AT THE LOCATIONS INDICATED ON THE PLANS. 2. ALL PROCESS PIPES SHALL BE COLOR COATED PER THE SPECIFICATIONS WITH THE EXCEPTION OF STAINLESS STEEL PIPES. ALL ABOVE GROUND PIPES SHALL ALSO BE OUTFITTED WITH A FLOW DIRECTION ARROW. 3. ALL ANCHORING/FASTENING SYSTEMS (INCLUDING NUTS, BOLTS, WASHERS, ETC.) SHALL BE 316 S.S. REGARDLESS OF LOCATION, U.N.O. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL FOR EACH EQUIPMENT ITEM PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. INSTALLATION DETAILS FOR ALL EQUIPMENT ITEMS SHALL BE PER RESPECTIVE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S SHOP DRAWINGS AND RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. 5. ELEVATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND COMPONENTS ARE APPROXIMATE. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY FITTING AND PIPE APPURTENANCES REQUIRED FOR PROPER INSTALLATION AND SHALL ACCOUNT FOR ADEQUATE LAY LENGTH COMPLETE AND IN PLACE. 7. PRECAST CONCRETE AND PREFABRICATED BUILDING MANUFACTURER SUPPLIER SHALL PROVIDE STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS STAMPED BY A REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER IN CALIFORNIA TO DOCUMENT DESIGN OF THEIR RESPECTIVE STRUCTURE. CONSTRUCTION NOTES: WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC EXISTING UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL EXISTING ACCESS ROAD CONDUIT PROPOSED UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONDUIT EXISTING WATER LINE EXISTING UTILITY POLE EXISTING LIGHT POLE THE CITY OF VERNON WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENT PROJECT WILL CONSIST OF THE CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION OF THE POTABLE WATER WELL BOOSTER PUMP AND ASSOCIATED APPURTENANCES, YARD PIPING, CIVIL, MECHANICAL, STRUCTURAL, ELECTRICAL AND SITE WORK. THE PROJECT WILL INCLUDE, BUT WILL NOT BE LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: 1. NEW CIVIL SITE GRADING WORK, 15" RCP STORM DRAIN, 12" DI WELL DISCHARGE, 8" SEWER, SITE SECURITY UPGRADES AND ASSOCIATED APPURTENANCES. 2. NEW PREFABRICATED EQUIPMENT BUILDING, CONCRETE FOOTING AND PILES, CHEMICAL DOSING EQUIPMENT AND ON-SITE STORAGE,ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED APPURTENANCES. 3. MECHANICAL AND PROCESS PIPING, VALVES AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES. 4. NEW ELECTRICAL CONDUIT, CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTATION, AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRED FOR WELL OPERATION. GENERAL GRADING NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR TO FOLLOW RECOMMENDATIONS LISTED IN THE GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION REPORT PROVIDED BY CONVERSE. SHOULD ANY CONFLICTS ARISE BETWEEN THE EVALUATION AND THESE PLANS, THE CIVIL ENGINEER SHALL BE CONTACTED AND THE GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION RECOMMENDATIONS SHALL BE FOLLOWED. 2. THE ENGINEER MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR GUARANTEE REGARDING EARTHWORK QUANTITIES OR THAT THE EARTHWORK FOR THIS PROJECT WILL BALANCE DUE TO VARIOUS FIELD CONDITIONS, CHANGING SOIL TYPES, ALLOWABLE CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS THAT ARE BEYOND THE CONTROL OF THE ENGINEER. 3. PRIOR TO THE BIDDING OF WORK, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL THOROUGHLY SATISFY HIMSELF AS TO THE ACTUAL CONDITIONS AND EARTHWORK QUANTITIES, IF ANY. NO CLAIM SHALL BE MADE TO THE OWNER OR ENGINEER FOR ANY EXCESS OF DEFICIENCY HEREIN, ACTUAL OR RELATIVE. 4. THE ENGINEER/SURVEYOR WILL PERFORM FIELD SURVEYS FOR PAD ELEVATION CERTIFICATIONS UPON NOTIFICATION BY THE GRADING CONTRACTOR THAT THE PADS ARE COMPLETE AND READY FOR CERTIFICATION ONLY AS NEEDED. IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT CERTIFICATION PROVIDES ONLY A REPRESENTATIVE ELEVATION OF THE AVERAGE GRADE OF EACH LOT, BUILDINGS OR UNIT PAD, AND SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUED TO INCLUDE YARD AND STREET SUBGRADE CERTIFICATION OR CERTIFICATION THAT THE ENTIRE PAD IS LEVEL, THAT IS WAS CONSTRUCTED IN THE DESIGN LOCATION OR WAS GRADED TO THE CROSS-SECTION SET FORTH ON THE PLANS OR AS DESIGNATED IN THE GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION. 5. AN APPROVED GRADING AND DRAINAGE PLAN MUST BE ON THE JOBSITE AT ALL TIMES. DEVIATIONS FROM THIS PLAN MUST BE PRECEDED BY AN APPROVED PLAN REVISION. 6. HAUL PERMITS, WHEN REQUIRED, MUST BE OBTAINED PRIOR TO OR CONCURRENTLY WITH THE GRADING AND DRAINAGE PERMIT. 7. THE PLANS SHALL COMPLY WITH THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT'S ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES, AS PUBLISHED IN FEDERAL REGISTER ON JULY 26, 1991, AS PERTAINS TO CURB AND RAMP, RAMP, CROSSWALK, SLOPE AND CROSS-SLOPE OF SIDEWALK, AND PARKING REQUIREMENTS. 8. AS STATED IN THE SITE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT, SITE DEWATERING WILL BE REQUIRED IN ORDER TO CONSTRUCT THE PROPOSED IMPROVEMENTS. 9. SUBSOIL OF ALL STRUCTURES SHALL BE PREPARED PER THE SITE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. THIS SPECIFICALLY INCLUDES REMOVING THE SPECIFIED SOIL UNDER THE PROPOSED WELL LOCATION AND REPLACING WITH ENGINEERED FILL. PI PLC POINT OF INTERSECTION PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER FIRE DEPARTMENT NOTES 1. ADDITIONAL SIGNAGE AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS MAY BE REQUIRED. LOCATION AND TYPE SHALL BE DETERMINED PRIOR TO FINAL FIRE DEPARTMENT INSPECTION. 2. ALL WORKS SHALL COMPLY WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF THE CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE. 3. PERMITS SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THE FIRE CODE OFFICIAL. PERMIT(S) AND FEES, IF ANY, SHALL BE PAID BY THE CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ISSUANCE OF ANY AND/OR ALL PERMITS. ISSUED PERMITS SHALL BE KEPT ON THE PREMISES DESIGNATED THEREIN AT ALL TIMES AND SHALL BE READILY AVAILABLE FOR INSPECTION BY THE FIRE CODE OFFICIAL. 4. FINAL APPROVAL IS SUBJECT TO FIELD INSPECTIONS. MINIMUM 48 HOURS NOTICE REQUIRED TO ANY LIFE-SAFETY FIRE INSPECTION. OTHER CONDITIONS MAY APPLY AT TIME OF INSPECTIONS AND SUBJECT TO CORRECTIONS.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-G2.0 GENERAL NOTES.dwg - Tab: GENERAL NOTES - by mmills on 08/18/21 at 11:33:54 AM Dimscale = 40; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" 22. PRIOR TO ANY POTABLE WATER CONNECTIONS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PRESSURE TEST AND DISINFECT ALL NEWLY CONSTRUCTED FACILITIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE DISTRICTS REQUIREMENTS AND ALL APPLICABLE AWWA STANDARDS AND PASS A BACTERIA CONTAMINATION TEST. ALL DISINFECTION AND BACTERIA TESTING SHALL BE UNDER THE OBSERVATION OF THE OWNER'S/CITY REPRESENTATIVE. 23. ANY WORK TO BE CONDUCTED IN AN AREA DEFINED BY OSHA TO BE A CONFINED SPACE SHALL FOLLOW THE NECESSARY OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS AS DESIGNATED BY THE APPLICABLE REGULATORY AGENCIES. ALL PARTICIPANTS CONDUCTING WORK IN A CONFINED SPACE ENVIRONMENT MUST BE TRAINED AND CERTIFIED TO CONDUCT WORK IN A CONFINED SPACE. PRIOR TO ANY WORK IN AN AREA DEFINED AS A CONFINED SPACE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CREATE AN ENTRY PLAN THAT SHALL SATISFY ALL THE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS BY ALL REGULATORY AGENCIES (SEE ALSO SPECIFICATIONS). 24. ALL DISINFECTION WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED BY PERSONNEL CERTIFIED BY THE CA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 9, DIVISION 5 OF THE HEALTH AND SAFETY CODE AND CITY STANDARDS. PRIOR TO THE COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A DISINFECTION PLAN TO THE CITY FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL BY THE CITY. A COPY OF THE CERTIFICATE SHALL BE PROVIDED TO THE CITY PRIOR TO THE COMMENCEMENT OF DISINFECTION. CML & EC CONCRETE MORTAR LINED & EPOXY COATED GENERAL NOTES G2.0 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - Construction Notes.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-G2.1 CONSTRUCTION NOTES.dwg - Tab: CONSTRUCTION NOTES - by mmills on 12/06/21 at 11:46:34 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" C1 INSTALL 4,170 SQ. FT. OF 4" A.C. ON 4" A.B. INSTALL 576 SQ. FT. OF 6" PERVIOUS CONCRETE ON 4" A.B. CONSTRUCT 3' WIDE CONCRETE V-GUTTER PER DETAIL A, SHEET C1.0. CONSTRUCT 27' WIDE DRIVEWAY PER CITY OF VERNON STD. PLAN PV693. CONSTRUCT 3'x3' CONCRETE CATCH BASIN WITH H-20 ALUMINUM GRATE. INSTALL 2,000 PSI CLASS IV 15" RCP STORM DRAIN AND FITTINGS. CORE DRILL INTO EX. 36" SD MH. TIE NEW 15" RCP SD INTO EX. INVERT. INSTALL 48"Ø MANHOLE PER SPPWC STANDARD PLAN NO. 200-3. INSTALL 4' STUB OUT OF 15" RCP TO BE PLUGGED WITH BRICK AND MORTAR FOR FUTURE CONNECTION. CONSTRUCT TRENCH BACKFILL PER CITY OF VERNON STANDARD PLAN V2264. INSTALL 15" RCP CONNECTION TO ENERGY DISSIPATION STRUCTURE. INSTALL SINGLE AUTOMATIC SWING GATE PER DETAIL A, SHEET C4.0. POWER AND CONTROL PER ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENTATION SHEETS. GATE, MOTOR OPERATOR AND KEY PAD TO BE PROVIDED AS A COMPLETE SYSTEM IN A DEFERRED SUBMITTAL. INSTALL DOUBLE SWING GATE PER DETAIL B, SHEET C4.0. NOT USED P.I.P. SOUTH AND SOUTHEAST EXISTING DOUBLE SWING GATE AND SIGNAGE. INSTALL 12' TALL CMU WALL PER STRUCTURAL. WALL TO EXTEND 18" NORTH AND SOUTH OF PROPOSED FRP BUILDING. INSTALL 12" DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS. CONNECT TO EXIST. 12" FLANGED DUCTILE IRON TEE W/ INSULATING JOINT. INSTALL 2" COMBINATION AIR VALVE AND FITTINGS PER DETAIL B, SHEET C4.1. INSTALL 12" GATE VALVE (MJ RESTRAINEDxFLG). INSTALL 12" 45° DUCTILE IRON ELBOW (RESTRAINED). INSTALL 12" 90° DUCTILE IRON ELBOW (RESTRAINED). DEMOLISH EXISTING SOUTHEAST SINGLE SWING MANWAY AND INSTALL WROUGHT IRON MANWAY. REMOVE AND RELOCATE PARKING SIGNAGE PER CITY STANDARDS. ENERGY DISSIPATION STRUCTURE PER MECHANICAL. NOT USED. INSTALL TERMINAL CLEANOUT STRUCTURE PER SPPWC STANDARD PLAN NO. 204-2. INSTALL 8" PVC SEWER PIPE WITH A MINIMUM 4% SLOPE PER SHEET C3.3. INSTALL 12"x12" CITY OF VERNON WELL 22 SITE DESCRIPTION SIGN ON THE WEST SIDE OF THE PUMP PEDESTAL PER DETAIL B, SHEET C1.0. INSTALL 2" SCH. 80 PVC POTABLE WATER SITE USE LINE PER DETAIL A, SHEET C3.2 AND WATER FLUSH. INSTALL KEY CARD READER PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 17600. INSTALL REMOVABLE BOLLARD PER DETAIL C, SHEET C4.1. C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 INSTALL WALL-MOUNTED NFPA SIGN FOR CHLORINE PER DETAIL C, SHEET C1.0. C34 INSTALL 6" CONCRETE CURB PER DETAIL D, SHEET C4.1. INSTALL 12"x12"x12" DUCTILE IRON PIPE TEE (FLGxFLGxFLG). M2 M4 M3 M1 INSTALL 12"-90° DUCTILE IRON PIPE ELBOW (FLGxFLG). M5 M7 M6 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 INSTALL 12" DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (FLGxGROOVED). INSTALL 12" COUPLING (GROOVED). INSTALL WATER MAIN THRUST BLOCK PER DETAIL D, SHEET M3.4. M15 M16 INSTALL CONCRETE PUMP PAD, PEDESTAL AND SHADE STRUCTURE PER STRUCTURAL AND DETAIL E, SHEET M3.5. M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 INSTALL VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP, MOTOR, DISCHARGE HEAD AND ASSOCIATED APPURTENANCES PER MECHANICAL DETAILS. INSTALL 12" DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (FLGxFLG). INSTALL 5'(H)x5'(L)x6'(H) PRECAST ENERGY DISSIPATION CONCRETE SPLASH PAD W/ ALUMINUM STEEL GRATE. INSTALL 12"-45° DUCTILE IRON PIPE ELBOW (FLGxFLG). INSTALL 3/4" STAINLESS STEEL CHEMICAL INJECTION QUILL AND FEED LINE. INSTALL 12"-90° FLG. DUCTILE IRON PIPE ELBOW WITH INSECT SCREEN. INSTALL 12" DUCTILE IRON BLIND FLANGE. INSTALL CHLORINE HOUSEKEEPING PAD PER DETAIL A, SHEET M3.5. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. SEE SECTION "SES (NORTH WALL)" AND "(NORTH WALL)" PER DETAIL D, SHEET E7.1. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. SEE SECTION "MCC SECTION (EAST WALL)" PER DETAIL D, SHEET E7.1. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. SEE SECTION "MCC SECTION (SOUTH WALL)" PER DETAIL D, SHEET E7.1. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. SEE SECTION "PLC (WEST WALL)" PER DETAIL D, SHEET E7.1. INSTALL EMERGENCY EYEWASH STATION PER DETAIL B, SHEET M3.5. NOT USED. PORTABLE GENERATOR POINT OF CONNECTION JUNCTION BOX PER ELECTRICAL. INSTALL 12"-90° DUCTILE IRON PIPE ELBOW (MJxMJ). INSTALL PIPE SUPPORT PER DETAIL C, SHEET M3.4. INSTALL 4" FLOOR DRAIN WITH P-TRAP AND 4" SCH. 80 PVC DRAIN LINE PER DETAIL E, SHEET M3.4. INSTALL 4" FLOOR DRAIN WITH P-TRAP AND 4" SCH. 80 PVC DRAIN LINE PER DETAIL F, SHEET M3.4. INSTALL 12" INSULATING FLANGE KIT. M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 INSTALL 3 8" O.D. x 1
4" I.D. PVDF CHEMICAL TUBING IN 1" SCH. 80 PVC CONDUIT. INSTALL 3 8" O.D. PVDF CHEMICAL TUBING. INSTALL 2" SCH. 80 PVC VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS W/ ROOF JACK AND INSECT SCREEN. INSTALL 2" CHLORINE TANK FILL LINE WITH 2" TRUE-UNION BALL VALVE, 45° ELBOW AND 2" CHEMLOCK FITTING. INSTALL CHLORINE INJECTION PUMP SKID. INSTALL 2" SCH. 80 PVC OVERFLOW PIPE. M34 M35 INSTALL 1" PTFE FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINT (PROCO STYLE 442-BD OR EQUAL). INSTALL CHLORINE TANK HOLD DOWN CLIPS PER MFR REQUIREMENT. M36 INSTALL HOSE BIB PER DETAIL B, SHEET M3.5. INSTALL ROOF MOUNTED PIPE SUPPORT PER DETAIL D, SHEET M3.5. M37 INSTALL 3 8" O.D. x 1
4" I.D. PVDF CHEMICAL TUBING IN 1" SCH. 80 PVC CONDUIT FOR DOSING PUMP PRESSURE RELIEF. M38 INSTALL 2" SCH. 80 PVC POTABLE WATER SITE USE LINE PER DETAIL A, SHEET C4.2. M39 INSTALL 1" CONTINUOUS-LUBE WATER FLUSH SUPPLY ASSEMBLY PER DETAIL C, SHEET M3.2. M40 INSTALL 12"x10" DUCTILE IRON REDUCER (FLGxFLG). M41 INSTALL 12" THICK CONCRETE PAD. M42 INSTALL 4" THICK ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HOUSEKEEPING PAD. M43 INSTALL 18"(L)x12"(W)x6"(H) CONCRETE CONTAINMENT CURB W/ DRAIN. M44 INSTALL 12" SQ 20 GAUGE ALUMINUM DUCTING. M45 INSTALL STANCHION MOUNTED REMOTE FLOW TRANSMITTER. M46 INSTALL 12" BLIND FLANGE WITH 2" NPT TAP. CONSTRUCTION NOTES G2.1 3 CIVIL CONSTRUCTION NOTES MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES 200-4.
STRUCTURAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - Construction Notes.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-G2.2 CONSTRUCTION NOTES.dwg - Tab: CONSTRUCTION NOTES - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 2:54:16 PM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" S1 2'Ø CIDH PILE, 8 TYP. PER DETAIL 'A' ON SHEET S4.0 S2 WELL HEAD STRUCTURE PER DETAIL 'F' ON SHEET S4.0 CONSTRUCTION NOTES G2.2 4 ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES E1 SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION, "SES", 480V, 800A, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE, NEMA 1, 66" W x 90" H x 24" D. E3 PORTABLE STANDBY GENERATOR 480V, 3Ø, 4W, 400 KW, 500 KVA, 600 A, 0.8 PF, CAMLOCK CONNECTIONS, TIER 4F, TOWABLE, ON TRAILER HITCH, CUMMINS OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 288" L x 102" W. E4 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER "MCC-PS", 480V, 800A, 3 PHASE, 3 WIRE, NEMA 1, TYPE ALLEN BRADLEY CENTERLINE 2100, EATON FREEDOM OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 60" W x 90" H x 20" D. E5 PUMP STATION PLC PANEL, PAINTED STEEL, HEAVY DUTY, FREESTANDING, NEMA 12, TYPE HUBBELL OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 36" W x 90" H x 20" D. E6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE, FOR WELL PUMP, 480V, 350 HP, ACTIVE FRONT END DRIVE, IP 54, TYPE ALLEN BRADLEY 755TL OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 63" W x 90" H x 28" D. E7 25 KVA DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER, 480-120/240V, 1 PHASE, 3 WIRE, WITH PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CIRCUIT PROTECTION, #6 INSULATED GROUND TO GROUND BUS, MOUNTED INSIDE MCC-PS. E8 PANELBOARD "A", 120/240V, SINGLE PHASE, 3 WIRE, 30 CIRCUITS, 225 AMP FRAME, 150 AMP MAIN BREAKER, BOLT ON TYPE, MOUNTED INSIDE MCC-PS. E9 GENERATOR TAP BOX, 800 AMP, 600 V, 3 PHASE, 3 POLE, NEMA 3R, STANCHION MOUNTED, CAMLOCK, TYPE SQUARE D SPQTB608RS OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. E10 POWER QUALITY METER, ETHERNET, TYPE ALLEN-BRADLEY POWER MONITOR 1000, 1408-EM3A-ENT OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. E11 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE, MINIMUM 120 KA PER PHASE, INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. E12 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR, #4/0 BARE COPPER, CONNECT TO GROUND RING THROUGH APPROVED MEANS, SEE DETAILS AND GROUNDING PLAN. E13 GROUND AND BOND EQUIPMENT OR ENCLOSURE PER DETAILS AND GROUNDING PLAN, SEE SHEET E3.0 AND E7.0. GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER SHALL BE LOCKABLE IN THE OPEN POSITION, IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC 445.18(B). E14 E15 E16 REFERENCE UTILITY DRAWINGS FOR INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ON CABLING/CONDUIT, JUNCTION BOXES, ETC. FROM THE EXISTING UTILITY POLE TO THE SERVICE ENTRANCE. E17 UTILITY TRANSFORMER, PER CITY OF VERNON REQUIREMENTS, 480V, PAD MOUNTED, SEE DETAIL "A" - SHEET E7.2, FOR REFERENCE. E18 BOOSTER PUMP "PMP-022100" PER MECHANICAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. GROUND PUMP MOTOR CASING. E19 STUB UP CONDUIT 6" ABOVE GROUND, MOUNT TO CONCRETE PAD. SEE CONDUIT SCHEDULE, PLAN LAYOUTS, AND PANEL LOAD FOR ADDITIONAL CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN ON THIS DIAGRAM. E20 TEMPORARY CABLE FOR USE WITH PORTABLE GENERATOR. CHEMICAL INJECTION PUMPS, PMP-022101 AND PMP-022102, PER MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS, 120V, PLUG INTO RECEPTACLE, SEE LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE PLAN. FLOW METER "FIT-022140", PER MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS, 120 VAC, 4-20mA, REMOTE TRANSMITTER FIELD MOUNTED ON STANCHION NEAR PIPE. ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVE, V-022123, 240V, SINGLE PHASE, INSTALL WARNING LABEL ON VALVE ACTUATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY GIVING THE LOCATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER PROVIDING POWER. MOTOR STARTER FOR EXHAUST FAN, 240 VAC, 1 HP, SINGLE PHASE, NEMA 4X, WALL MOUNTED, TYPE GREENHECK, PART NUMBER MS-1P, OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. FLOW METER "FIT-022141", PER MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS, PROVIDED BY CITY, COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH DEVICE SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS. AIR CONDITIONER, OUTDOOR UNIT, 240V, SINGLE PHASE, COORDINATE TYPE WITH BUILDING MANUFACTURER. CONNECT TO NEMA 3R, OUTDOOR DISCONNECT SWITCH. MOTORIZED GATE OPERATOR, 240V, SINGLE PHASE, HEAVY DUTY, INDUSTRIAL, COMPATIBLE WITH KEY PADS, AUX. RELAY CONTACTS. E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P2", 11" X 18", MAINTAIN 6" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM FENCE, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1. UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P3", 11" X 18", MAINTAIN 6" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM FENCE, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1. E27 E28 E30 E31 EXHAUST FAN, SINGLE PHASE, NEMA 4X, PER MECHANICAL PLANS. E29 UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P1", 11" X 18", MAINTAIN 6" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM FENCE, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1. UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C1", 11" X 18", MAINTAIN 6" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM FENCE, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1. E32 E33 UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C2", 11" X 18", MAINTAIN 6" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM FENCE, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1. CONDUIT STUB UP LOCATION. STUB UPS SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN 28" x 14" AREA CENTERED ON 38" x 24" CONCRETE PAD. E2 EXOTHERMIC WELD PER DETAIL "A" - E7.0. #4/0 BARE GROUND RING, MINIMUM 30" BELOW GRADE. GROUND INSPECTION ROD PER DETAIL "E" - E7.0. GROUND ROD PER DETAIL "B" - E7.0. EQUIPMENT GROUND BAR. GROUND TO REBAR PER DETAIL "C" - E7.0. GROUND WATER PIPES. GROUND TO FENCELINE PER DETAIL "H" - E7.0. GROUND MOTOR FRAME. #2/0 BARE COPPER, EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR (TYP) E60 E61 E62 E63 E64 E65 E66 E67 E68 E69 E34 UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C3", 11" X 18", MAINTAIN 6" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM FENCE, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1. E35 E36 PUMP PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, "PIT-022150", 24 VDC, 4-20mA, TYPE ROSEMOUNT, PART NUMBER 3051CG4A22A1AM5, OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. PUMP DISCHARGE HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH, "PSH-022151", NC/NO CONTACT, 5-250 PSI OPERATING RANGE, TYPE SQUARE D, PART NUMBER 9012G, OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. SYSTEM PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, "PIT-022152", 24 VDC, 4-20mA, TYPE ROSEMOUNT, PART NUMBER 3051CG4A22A1AM5, OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. E37 E38 E39 NAOCL TANK LEVEL TRANSMITTER, "LIT-022181", 24 VDC, 4-20mA, TYPE ROSEMOUNT SERIES 3100 OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. INTRUSION SWITCH "NS-022171A", ELECTRICAL ROOM DOOR, NEMA 4, NC/NO CONTACT, TYPE EATON, OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. E40 INTRUSION SWITCH "NS-022171B", CHEMICAL ROOM DOOR, NEMA 4X, NC/NO CONTACT, TYPE EATON OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. E41 UNDERGROUND FIBER PULL BOX "PB-F1", 11" X 17", MAINTAIN 12" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM POWER CONDUIT, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1, PER VPU APPROVAL. E42 E43 E44 E45 E46 UNDERGROUND FIBER PULL BOX "PB-F2", 11" X 17", MAINTAIN 12" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM POWER CONDUIT, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1, PER VPU APPROVAL. GATE KEYPAD, STANCHION MOUNTED, TYPE DOORKING 1500 SEREIS OR VPU APPROVED EQUAL. CONTROL JUNCTION BOX "JB-C2", NEMA 4X, STAINLESS STEEL, 16" H X 12" W X 6" D, PADLOCKABLE, STUB UP 6" ABOVE GROUND, MOUNT TO CONCRETE PAD. WELL LEVEL TRANSDUCER, "LT-022180", 4-20mA, TYPE DRUCK PTX 1230 OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, SEE MECHANICAL PLANS. CATHODIC PROTECTION RECTIFIER APPROXIMATE LOCATION. SEE SHEETS CP1.0 - CP1.5 FOR DETAILS. E48 CONTROL JUNCTION BOX "JB-C1", NEMA 4X, STAINLESS STEEL, 16" H X 12" W X 6" D, PADLOCKABLE, STANCHION MOUNTED. E47 EMERGENCY STOP PUSH BUTTON, LOCKABLE, OUTDOOR RATED, STANCHION MOUNTED TO CONCRETE PAD. ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES CONT.
CITY OF VERNON DISTRIBUTION NETWORK OPERATING HGL = 370' 200 190 185 195 -925 -935 12" 180 175 -30 -35 -100 -105 -110 -930 M.S.L. EL. 340 335 350 345 360 355 365 200 190 185 195 -925 -935 180 175 -30 -35 -100 -105 -110 -930 M.S.L.340 335 350 345 360 355 365 EL. 10" 12" 330 325 320 325 320 330 FM 370 370 375 375 380 380 385 385 390 390 LEGENDVALVE
F FLOW METER CHECK VALVE FM HYDRAULIC GRADE LINE PROPOSED PIPELINE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-G3.0 HYDRAULIC PROFILE.dwg - Tab: WELL 22 HYDRAULIC PROFILE - by mmills on 09/22/21 at 8:52:53 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" NOTES: 1. STEP DRAWDOWN TESTS WERE CONDUCTED BY RICHARD C. SLADE & ASSOCIATES LLC 2. DRAWDOWN DATA IS BASED UPON MARCH 17TH, 2020 TEST. THE STATIC WATER LEVEL AND PUMPING DRAWDOWN WILL VARY BASED UPON THE SEASON. EXISTING PIPELINE VERNON WELL NO. 22 BOOSTER PUMP DISCHARGE EL. 194' 2100 GPM @ 500' TDH POINT OF CONNECTION TO CITY OF VERNON'S EXISTING DISTRIBUTION NETWORK EL. 185.89'WELL NO. 22 PUMP CURVE WELL 22 HYDRAULIC PROFILE G3.0 5 STATIC WATER LEVEL EL. -30' PUMP DRAWDOWN AT 2100 GPM EL. -108' BOTTOM OF WELL CASING EL. -930' FINISHED GRADE EL. 191' PUMP TO WASTE REDUCER
W W W W W W W W
SD SD SD
SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SS SS SS SS
S 27' 37' 10' 8'
34.4' 50' 30' 20'
3'
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - Construction Notes.dwg; B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-C1.0 PROPOSED SITE PLAN.dwg - Tab: PROPOSED SITE PLAN - by mmills on 12/06/21 at 9:36:38 AM Dimscale = 96; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" WELL #22 CIVIL SITE PLAN SCALE: 1" = 10'-0" GENERATOR POINT OF CONNECTION PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS CHLORINE STORAGE ROOM 12" DI WELL DISCHARGE PIPING PER SHEET C3.2 15" RCP STORM DRAIN PER SHEET C3.1 DETAIL A: 3' V-DITCH SCALE: N.T.S. CONSTRUCTION NOTES: PREFABRICATED FIBERGLASS ELECTRICAL ROOM C2 EXISTING PROPERTY LINE C1 INSTALL 4,170 SQ. FT. OF 4" A.C. ON 4" A.B. INSTALL 576 SQ. FT. OF 6" PERVIOUS CONCRETE ON 4" A.B. CONSTRUCT 3' WIDE CONCRETE V-GUTTER PER DETAIL A, SHEET C1.0. CONSTRUCT 27' WIDE DRIVEWAY PER CITY OF VERNON STD. PLAN PV693. C2 C3 C4 C7 INSTALL 48"Ø MANHOLE PER SPPWC STANDARD PLAN NO. 200-3. INSTALL SINGLE AUTOMATIC SWING GATE PER DETAIL A, SHEET C4.0. POWER AND CONTROL PER ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENTATION SHEETS. GATE, MOTOR OPERATOR AND KEY PAD TO BE PROVIDED AS A COMPLETE SYSTEM IN A DEFERRED SUBMITTAL. INSTALL DOUBLE SWING GATE PER DETAIL B, SHEET C4.0. NOT USED P.I.P. SOUTH AND SOUTHEAST EXISTING DOUBLE SWING GATE AND SIGNAGE. INSTALL 12' TALL CMU WALL PER STRUCTURAL. WALL TO EXTEND 18" NORTH AND SOUTH OF PROPOSED FRP BUILDING. INSTALL 2" COMBINATION AIR VALVE AND FITTINGS PER DETAIL B, SHEET C4.1. INSTALL 12" GATE VALVE (MJ RESTRAINEDxFLG). DEMOLISH EXISTING SOUTHEAST SINGLE SWING MANWAY AND INSTALL WROUGHT IRON MANWAY. REMOVE AND RELOCATE PARKING SIGNAGE PER CITY STANDARDS. C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C1 C3 C3 C14 C4 C18 C20 C21 C22 C11 C24 INSTALL TERMINAL CLEANOUT STRUCTURE PER SPPWC STANDARD PLAN NO. 204-2. INSTALL 8" PVC SEWER PIPE WITH A MINIMUM 4% SLOPE PER SHEET C3.3. INSTALL 12"x12" CITY OF VERNON WELL 22 SITE DESCRIPTION SIGN ON THE WEST SIDE OF THE PUMP PEDESTAL PER DETAIL B, SHEET C1.0. INSTALL 2" SCH. 80 PVC POTABLE WATER SITE USE LINE PER DETAIL A, SHEET C3.2 AND WATER FLUSH. INSTALL REMOVABLE BOLLARD PER DETAIL C, SHEET C4.1. C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 INSTALL WALL-MOUNTED NFPA SIGN FOR CHLORINE PER DETAIL C, SHEET C1.0. C34 INSTALL 6" CONCRETE CURB PER DETAIL D, SHEET C4.1. C28 C29 EXISTING PROPERTY LINE C11 CONSTRUCT 3'x3' CONCRETE CATCH BASIN WITH H-20 ALUMINUM GRATE. C23 NEW 15" RCP STORM DRAIN PER SHEET C3.0 IN COORDINATION WITH THE WATER REPLENISHMENT DISTRICT CITY OF VERNON DETAIL B: PLAQUE WELL 22 EST. 2021 12" 12" C30 C31 C20 C17 C7 C14 INSTALL KEY CARD READER PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 17600. EXISTING POWER POLE EXISTING FIRE HYDRANT EXISTING R/W C32 6 (TYP.) 1/2" BLACK PRESSED LETTERS 10
5 0 10 20 SPACE FOR CITY PORTABLE GENERATOR (N.I.C.) C11 3 0 OX 0COR
10" MIN.
4" MIN. YELLOW RED BLUE C33 1" BLACK PRESSED LETTERS 1/2" BLACK PRESSED LETTERS NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM THE LOCATION OF TEE AND VALVES AND THE TYPE OF CONNECTIONS INSTALLED PER "50TH ST WATER MAIN REPLACEMENT" AS - BUILT PLANS. 2. SIGN DESCRIPTION IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY. THE FINAL LETTERING SHALL BE COORDINATED AND APPROVED BY CITY PRIOR TO FABRICATION. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY FITTINGS AND PIPE APPURTENANCES REQUIRED FOR PROPER INSTALLATION AND SHALL ACCOUNT FOR ADEQUATE LAY LENGTH. THIS INCLUDES PROVIDING THE NECESSARY FLANGE ADAPTERS NEEDED FOR PROPER CONNECTION. 4. ALL DUCTILE IRON PIPE SHALL BE CLASS 350. ALL PIPE AND PIPE APPURTENANCES SHALL BE CEMENT MORTAR LINED AND COAL TAR EPOXY COATED. ALL UNDERGROUND PIPING SHALL BE POLYETHYLENE DOUBLE WRAPPED. ALL BOLTS AND NUT FASTENERS SHALL BE 316 STAINLESS STEEL, UNO. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS PER APPLICABLE AWWA REQUIREMENTS. 6. ALL DAMAGED CEMENT LINER AND COAL TAR EPOXY COATING SHALL BE REPAIRED IN THE FIELD. 7. PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL EXPOSE THE EXISTING PIPE LINES AT THE PROPOSED CONNECTION POINTS AND VERIFY HORIZONTAL LOCATION, ELEVATION, MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION, AND SIZE. DIMENSIONS OF STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND COMPONENTS ARE APPROXIMATE. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 8. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL PIPE SUPPORTS PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS. ALL DRY AREA PIPE SUPPORTS SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL U.N.O. 9. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL PUMP BASE, GUIDE RAILS, AND BRACKETS PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFIRM SUPPLY OF PUMP MOUNTING EQUIPMENT WITH PUMP SUPPLIER. 10. ALL PROCESS PIPES SHALL BE COLOR COATED PER THE SPECIFICATIONS WITH THE EXCEPTION OF STAINLESS STEEL PIPES. ALL ABOVE GROUND PIPES SHALL ALSO BE OUTFITTED WITH A FLOW DIRECTION ARROW. 11. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL FOR EACH EQUIPMENT ITEM PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. INSTALLATION DETAILS FOR ALL EQUIPMENT ITEMS SHALL BE PER RESPECTIVE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S SHOP DRAWINGS AND RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. 12. GROOVE FITTINGS MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF FLANGE FITTINGS FOR ALL ABOVE GROUND D.I. PIPING. 13. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL TEMPORARY PIPING AND EQUIPMENT NEEDED FOR PROCESS ISOLATION, BYPASS, AND TRANSITION. 14. ALL YARD PIPING SHALL BE SURVEYED AT ALL FITTINGS PRIOR TO BACKFILL. MATERIAL: ANTIQUE OR BLACKENED BRASS SEE NOTE 1. (SEE NOTE 2.) DETAIL C: NFPA CHLORINE SIGN SCALE: N.T.S. WHITE 4" 3' 4" 4" 1.5' 1.5' SEE NOTE 2. C34 C34 C32 (TYP.) SCALE: N.T.S. C14 FRP BUILDING CONCRETE SLAB LIMITS PER STRUCTURAL PLANS 6 10
9 1211 19
7 5 1 2
4 3 14 13 16 17 15 18
8 200-4.
-0.2% -2.5%
-3.9%
-3.5%
-1.0%
-1.0%
-3.3% -0.5%
-0.7%
-1.0%
-0.2%
-1.1%
-3.2%
-2.0%
-3.7%
-2.7%
-0.8%
-2.7%
-3.9% FS 190.60 FS 190.70 TC 191.20 FS 190.35 TC 190.85 FS 190.57 TC 191.07 FS 190.82 TC 191.32 -0.4% FS 190.11 FS 188.97 FS 190.45 FS 190.33 FS 189.84 FS 190.23 FS 189.84 FS 190.74 FS 190.61 TC 191.16 FS 190.66 190.4
190.3
190.2
190.1 189.9
190.0 FS 190.01 14+00 14+08 14+00
14+36
SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS S 190.5
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - Construction Notes.dwg; B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-C2.0 GRADING PLAN.dwg - Tab: GRADING PLAN - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 9:47:00 AM Dimscale = 10; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" SCALE: 1" = 5' CONSTRUCTION NOTES:
5 2.5
0 5 10
12' 48' C2 C1 C1 C3 SITE OF LOT (AFTER FRONTAGE DEDICATION) - 5,217 S.F. PERVIOUS CONCRETE AREA - 576 S.F. NET ADDED IMPERVIOUS AREA - 4,641 S.F. C22 C4 C1 INSTALL 4,170 SQ. FT. OF 4" A.C. ON 4" A.B. INSTALL 576 SQ. FT. OF 6" PERVIOUS CONCRETE ON 4" A.B. CONSTRUCT 3' WIDE CONCRETE V-GUTTER PER DETAIL A, SHEET C1.0. CONSTRUCT 27' WIDE DRIVEWAY PER CITY OF VERNON STD. PLAN PV693. C2 C3 C4 INSTALL 12' TALL CMU WALL PER STRUCTURAL. WALL TO EXTEND 18" NORTH AND SOUTH OF PROPOSED FRP BUILDING. REMOVE AND RELOCATE PARKING SIGNAGE PER CITY STANDARDS. C22 C23 C23 7 PAD EL. 191.0± TOP OF PUMP PEDESTAL EL. 192.6±
15 IN SD 180 185 190 195 180 185 190 195 12+00 12+50 13+00 13+50 S= 0.0042 STA 12+43.67
EL 183.70
STA 12+41.7
RIM EL 189.74
STA 13+05.9
RIM EL 190.16
EX. 15" SD
STA 12+41.67
EL 184.06
STA 13+03.87
EL 183.95
STA 13+07.87
EL 184.05 PROPOSED 15" RCP SD STA 13+05.84 INV 184.70
STA 12+39.67
EL 183.60 LINE DATA LINE # L1 DISTANCE 60.09' BEARING N89°05'53"E START POINT N 1821820.64, E 6495506.51 END POINT N 1821821.59, E 6495566.59 13+04 12+44 L1 13+00 EAST 50TH STREET W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
13+20
13+06 SD SD SD
SD SD SD
SS SS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - Construction Notes.dwg; B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-C3.0 SD PLAN AND PROFILE.dwg - Tab: 15-IN SD PLAN AND PROFILE - by mmills on 12/01/21 at 10:42:16 AM Dimscale = 10; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" SCALE: 1"=10' EXIST. GRADE C5 C5 C6 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: C7 C6 C8 STA. 12+41.7 PROFILE HORIZ. 1"= 10' VERT. 1"= 2' L1 ABANDONED 10" WATER, 12' N. OF ℄
15" SD 6" N. OF
CITY OF VERNON
℄
6" GAS 7' S. OF
CITY OF VERNON
℄
SCG
6" GAS 10.5' S. OF ℄
CITY OF VERNON
8" SEWER 14' S. OF ℄
CITY OF VERNON STA. 13+05.9 C7 ⅊ C9 C9 C9 SEE SD PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET C3.1 (SEE PACE "50TH ST WATER MAIN
REPLACEMENT" PLANS) INSTALL 2,000 PSI CLASS IV 15" RCP STORM DRAIN AND FITTINGS. CORE DRILL INTO EX. 36" SD MH. TIE NEW 15" RCP SD INTO EX. INVERT. INSTALL 48"Ø MANHOLE PER SPPWC STANDARD PLAN NO. 200-3. INSTALL 4' STUB OUT OF 15" RCP TO BE PLUGGED WITH BRICK AND MORTAR FOR FUTURE CONNECTION. CONSTRUCT TRENCH BACKFILL PER CITY OF VERNON STANDARD PLAN V2264. C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C8 C9 NEW 12" DI WATER, 3' S. OF ℄
(SEE PACE " 50TH ST WATER MAIN
REPLACEMENT" PLANS) 10
5 0 10 20 SEE WATER PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET C3.2 ⅊
⅊
⅊ SEE PROPOSED SITE PLAN SHEET C1.0 SEE SEWER PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET C3.3 8 NOTES: 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL POTHOLE THE EXISTING WATER LINE, STORM DRAIN LINE, SEWER LINE, PROPOSED TIE-IN LOCATIONS AND ALL CRITICAL UTILITIES TO CONFIRM SIZE, DEPTH AND LOCATION PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES AND ALLOW FOR CORRECTIONS AND NEEDED. 200-4.
2.5' EX. 6" GAS
EX. 8" SEWER 15 IN SD PRIVATE 180 185 190 195 180 185 190 195 12+75 13+00 13+50 14+00 14+50 STA 13+52.26
EL 185.89
STA 13+55.26
EL 185.99
STA 14+11.26
EL 186.33
STA 14+14.26
EL 186.43
STA 14+36.29
EL 186.56
STA 13+05.9
RIM EL 190.16
STA 13+53.8
RIM EL 188.97
STA 14+12.8
RIM EL 190.01
PROPOSED 15" RCP SD
STA 13+05.76
EL 183.95
PROPOSED 12" DIP WATER
STA 13+94.11
EL 184.17
STA 13+07.78
EL 184.70
S= 0.0268 S= 0.0061 S= 0.0061
EX. 12" WATER
0.68'
0.33' LINE DATA LINE # L1L2 DISTANCE 109.84' 20.69' BEARING S1°06'13"E N88°41'39"E START POINT N 1821821.62, E 6495568.59 N 1821711.80, E 6495570.70 END POINT N 1821711.80, E 6495570.70 N 1821712.28, E 6495591.39 EAST 50TH STREET
W W W 13+20 14+00 14+08 13+06 14+00
14+36 SS SS SS SS
S
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - Construction Notes.dwg; B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-C3.1 SD PRIVATE PLAN AND PROFILE.dwg - Tab: 15-IN SD PRVATE PLAN AND PROFILE - by mmills on 12/01/21 at 10:44:57 AM Dimscale = 10; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" SCALE: 1"=10' EXIST. GRADE C5 C5 PROPOSED GRADE PROFILE HORIZ. 1"= 10' VERT. 1"= 2' 44.48 L.F. C5 C5 C5 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: C7 C11 C11 STA. 13+05.9 C7 C11 STA. 13+53.8 STA. 14+12.8 SEE SD PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET C3.0 SEE WATER PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET C3.2 L1 L1 L2 C26 C10 STA. 14+36.29 ABANDONED 10" WATER, 12' N. OF ℄ CITY OF VERNON 6" GAS 7' S. OF ℄ SCG 6" GAS 10.5' S. OF ℄ CITY OF VERNON 8" SEWER 14' S. OF ℄ CITY OF VERNON 15" SD 6" N. OF ℄ CITY OF VERNON ℄
⅊ C9 C9 C9 C9 C9 C5 INSTALL 2,000 PSI CLASS IV 15" RCP STORM DRAIN AND FITTINGS. C7 INSTALL 48"Ø MANHOLE PER SPPWC STANDARD PLAN NO. 200-3. C11 CONSTRUCT 3'x3' CONCRETE CATCH BASIN WITH H-20 ALUMINUM GRATE. CONSTRUCT TRENCH BACKFILL PER CITY OF VERNON STANDARD PLAN V2264. INSTALL 15" RCP CONNECTION TO ENERGY DISSIPATION STRUCTURE. C9 C10 C26 ENERGY DISSIPATION STRUCTURE PER MECHANICAL. NEW 12" DI WATER, 3' S. OF ℄ (SEE PACE "50TH ST WATER MAIN REPLACEMENT" PLANS) SEE SEWER PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET C3.3 55.50 L.F. 21.46 L.F. C5 C9 C11 10 5 0 10 20 SEE SHEET C4.0
⅊⅊
⅊⅊⅊
℄ (SEE PACE " 50TH ST WATER MAIN REPLACEMENT PLANS)
9 C26 NOTES: 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL POTHOLE THE EXISTING WATER LINE, STORM DRAIN LINE, SEWER LINE, PROPOSED TIE-IN LOCATIONS AND ALL CRITICAL UTILITIES TO CONFIRM SIZE, DEPTH AND LOCATION PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES AND ALLOW FOR CORRECTIONS AND NEEDED. PROPERTY LINE 200-4.
L1
L2 L3
L4 11+50 10+19
11+00
W W W 13+20 14+00 14+08 13+06 14+00
14+36
SD SD
SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SS SS SS SS
S 12 IN WATER 180 185 190 195 180 185 190 195 9+75 10+00 10+50 11+00 11+50 11+75
3.92' EX. 6" GAS
EX. 10" WATER
STA 11+50
EL 193.35
STA 10+19
EL 186.34
STA 11+53.59
EL 193.85
S= Vertical
STA 10+99.10
EL 184.31
STA 11+11.77
EL 184.03
STA 11+33.41
EL 183.92
STA 11+50
EL 183.84
S= -0.0301
STA 10+20.60
EL 186.34
EX. 8" SEWER S= 0.0000
S= -0.0218 S= -0.0050 S= -0.0050
STA 10+31.6
EL 187.34 PROPSED 15" RCP SD STA 11+05.55 INV 186.23
2.25' LINE DATA LINE # L1L2L3L4 DISTANCE 80.10' 12.68' 21.53' 16.80' BEARING S0°54'27"E S43°53'47"W S1°06'13"E N88°53'47"E START POINT N 1821818.25, E 6495573.50 N 1821738.17, E 6495574.76 N 1821729.03, E 6495565.97 N 1821707.50, E 6495566.39 END POINT N 1821738.17, E 6495574.76 N 1821729.03, E 6495565.97 N 1821707.50, E 6495566.39 N 1821707.83, E 6495583.18
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - Construction Notes.dwg; B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-C3.2 WATER PLAN AND PROFILE.dwg - Tab: 12-IN WATER PLAN AND PROFILE - by mmills on 12/01/21 at 11:13:44 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" EXIST. GRADE C12 C12 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: SCALE: 1"=10' PROPOSED GRADE (TYP.) C13 C15 C15 C16 C16 C13 STA. 10+01.56 STA. 10+99.20 C15 C15 STA. 11+11.90 C16 STA. 11+33.41 STA. 10+22.54 SEE SD PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET C3.1 L1 L1
L2 L3 L4
L4 NOTE: 1. PIPE DEFLECTION SHALL NOT EXCEED 2° DEFLECTION AT MECHANICAL JOINTS AND FITTINGS. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL POTHOLE THE EXISTING WATER LINE, STORM DRAIN LINE, SEWER LINE, PROPOSED TIE-IN LOCATIONS AND ALL CRITICAL UTILITIES TO CONFIRM SIZE, DEPTH AND LOCATION PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES AND ALLOW FOR CORRECTIONS AND NEEDED. ABANDONED 10" WATER, 12' N. OF ℄ CITY OF VERNON 6" GAS 7' S. OF ℄ SCG 6" GAS 10.5' S. OF ℄ CITY OF VERNON 8" SEWER 14' S. OF ℄ CITY OF VERNON 15" SD 6" N. OF ℄ CITY OF VERNON ℄
⅊ SEE MECHANICAL PLANS FOR ABOVE GROUND PIPING C9 C9 (TYP.) PROFILE HORIZ. 1"= 10' VERT. 1"= 2' C24 NEW 12" DI WATER, 3' S. OF CL (SEE PACE "50TH ST WATER MAIN REPLACEMENT" PLANS) C25 (E. 50th ST. ℄ STA. 13+10.63) C9 CONSTRUCT TRENCH BACKFILL PER CITY OF VERNON STANDARD PLAN V2264. INSTALL 12" DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS. CONNECT TO EXIST. 12" FLANGED DUCTILE IRON TEE W/ INSULATING JOINT. C12 C13 INSTALL 2" COMBINATION AIR VALVE AND FITTINGS PER DETAIL B, SHEET C4.1. INSTALL 12" GATE VALVE (MJ RESTRAINEDxFLG). C24 C25 SEE SEWER PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET C3.3 10 5 0 10 20 C25 STA. 10+31.60 C24 ⅊
⅊
⅊
⅊⅊
℄ SEE SD PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET C3.0 DOUBLE POLYETHYLENE WRAP AND CP JOINT BOND ALL JOINTS, FITTINGS AND DUCTILE IRON PIPE (SEE PACE " 50TH ST WATER MAIN REPLACEMENT" PLANS) 1" SCH.40 STAINLESS STEEL TO EMERGENCY EYE WASH STATION & SHOWER 1" SCH.40 STAINLESS STEEL TO HOSE BIBB (NEAR BUILDING) 2" REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW DEVICE2" UNION 12" DISCHARGE PIPING DETAIL - A SITE WATER SCHEMATIC N.T.S. 1" SCH. 40 STAINLESS STEEL TO CONTINUOUS-LUBE WATER FLUSH ASSEMBLY DI SADDLE TAP WITH 2" NPT THREAD 2" UNION 10 INSTALL 12" 45° DUCTILE IRON ELBOW (RESTRAINED). INSTALL 12" 90° DUCTILE IRON ELBOW (RESTRAINED). C15 C16 1" ISOLATION VALVE (TYP). PROPERTY LINE 180 185 190 195 180 185 190 195 12+75 13+00 13+50 14+00 14+25 EX. 6" GAS
STA 13+22.49
EL 182.79
STA 14+08.32
EL 186.22
STA 13+20.4
RIM EL 190.01
S= 0.0400
4" PVC DRAIN PIPE
STA 13+90.89
EL 185.75STA 13+20.40 INV 181.78 1.4' LINE DATA LINE # L1 DISTANCE 87.92' BEARING S1°04'46"E START POINT N 1821808.04, E 6495581.80 END POINT N 1821720.14, E 6495583.45 W W W 13+20 14+00 14+08 13+06 14+00
14+36
SD SD
SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SS SS SS SS
S L1
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - Construction Notes.dwg; B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-C3.3 SEWER PLAN AND PROFILE.dwg - Tab: 8-IN SEWER PLAN AND PROFILE - by mmills on 12/01/21 at 11:02:00 AM Dimscale = 10; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" SCALE: 1"=10' EXIST. GRADE PROPOSED GRADE PROFILE HORIZ. 1"= 10' VERT. 1"= 2' CONSTRUCTION NOTES: C7 SEWER TIE-IN STA. 13+20 C7 SEE SD PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET C3.0 SEE WATER PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET C3.2 L1 ABANDONED 10" WATER, 12' N. OF ℄ CITY OF VERNON 6" GAS 7' S. OF ℄ SCG 6" GAS 10.5' S. OF ℄ CITY OF VERNON 8" SEWER 14' S. OF ℄ CITY OF VERNON 15" SD 6" N. OF ℄ CITY OF VERNON ℄
⅊ C7 INSTALL 48"Ø MANHOLE PER SPPWC STANDARD PLAN NO. 200-3. INSTALL TERMINAL CLEANOUT STRUCTURE PER SPPWC STANDARD PLAN NO. 204-2. INSTALL 8" PVC SEWER PIPE WITH A MINIMUM 4% SLOPE PER SHEET C3.3. C28 C29 NEW 12" DI WATER, 3' S. OF CL (SEE PACE "50TH ST WATER MAIN REPLACEMENT" PLANS) SEE SD PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET C3.1 C29 C29 10 5 0 10 20 ⅊
⅊ ⅊
⅊ ⅊
℄ SEE SD PLAN AND PROFILE SHEET C3.0 C28 (SEE PACE " 50TH ST WATER MAIN REPLACEMENT" PLANS) C28STA. 14+08.32 50TH ST. STA. 13+20 11 NOTES: 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL POTHOLE THE EXISTING WATER LINE, STORM DRAIN LINE, SEWER LINE, PROPOSED TIE-IN LOCATIONS AND ALL CRITICAL UTILITIES TO CONFIRM SIZE, DEPTH AND LOCATION PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES AND ALLOW FOR CORRECTIONS AND NEEDED. PROPERTY LINE 200-4.
SINGLE GATE ENTRANCE DETAIL N.T.S
E NOTES: 1. MANUFACTURER SHALL DESIGN FENCING FOR APPLICABLE SITE LOADS. 2. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 05562 FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS DETAILS. 3. WELD ALL BAR CONNECTIONS PER THE MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. 4. EXACT HEIGHT AND WIDTH OF FENCE TO BE DETERMINED IN THE FIELD BY CONTRACTOR. 5. AUTOMATIC GATE SYSTEM NOT SHOWN.SINGLE GATE ENTRANCE ELEVATION DOUBLE GATE ENTRANCE ELEVATION SINGLE GATE ENTRANCE PLAN DOUBLE GATE ENTRANCE PLAN ROAD SIDE WELL SIDE N.T.S C N.T.S
A DOUBLE GATE ENTRANCE DETAIL N.T.S
B STABILIZER ROD N.T.S
D GATE RAIL FENCE POST SIDE VIEW
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-C2.0 CIVIL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: CIVIL DETAILS 1 - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 10:22:30 AM Dimscale = 96; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" 12 SEE STABILIZER ROD DETAIL 3 1/4" 3' MIN. (TYP)
HEIGHT PER MF'R
25 2
1 " 13 2
1 " 8' 14' O.C. (TYP) 2" HINGE CLEARANCE DOOR LATCH WITH LOCK (TYP.) 2" HINGE CLEARANCE GUARD RAIL (SEE DETAIL) GATE UPRIGHT 2" X 12 GA. WELD ON BOX HINGE (SEE NOTE 3) 4" x 1 4" SQUARE GATE POST REINFORCED CONCRETE FOOTINGS PER MF'R REQUIREMENTS 2.75" PALE (WELDED CONNECTIONS) STRAIGHT SPIKED PICKETS (TRIDENT STYLE) TRAFFIC TRAFFIC 4" x 1 4" SQUARE GATE POST 8' TALL FENCE 14' WIDE x 8' HIGH WROUGHT IRON DOUBLE SWINGING GATE 3" LATCH CLEARANCE 15' WIDE x 8' HIGH WROUGHT IRON MOTORIZED SWING GATE TRAFFIC TRAFFIC 8' TALL FENCE 4" x 1 4" SQUARE GATE POST 3 1/4" (TYP) REINFORCED CONCRETE FOOTINGS PER MF'R REQUIREMENTS
HEIGHT PER MF'R
25 1
2 13 " 1
2 " 8' 3' MIN. 15' O.C. (TYP) 2" HINGE CLEARANCE GUARD RAIL (SEE DETAIL) WELD ON BOX HINGE (SEE NOTE 3) 2.75" PALE (WELDED CONNECTIONS) STRAIGHT SPIKED PICKETS (TRIDENT STYLE) 4" x 1 4" SQUARE GATE POST GATE UPRIGHT 2" X 12 GA. 4 x POST WIDTH (TYP). WELL SITE 3' MIN.
FOOTING DEPTH 8'
POST HEIGHT VARIES PER MF'R 55TH ST FENCE POST AND FOOTING 4" SQUARE POST CAP 4" x 1 4" SQUARE GATE POST REINFORCED CONCRETE FOOTINGS PER MF'R REQUIREMENTS STRAIGHT SPIKED PICKETS (TRIDENT STYLE) 4"x 3/4" PIPE BURIED IN GROUND FOR RODS TO ENTER WHEN GATE IS CLOSED 6"x1" PIPE WELDED TO DOOR FRAME GATE RAIL 24" x 3/4" ROD WITH 6" HANDLE BENT IN UPPER BRACKET w/ KEY LOCK PALE WELDED TO RAIL (SEE NOTE 3) 2" 2"
C
D
B REMOVABLE BOLLARD DETAIL TYPICAL FENCE SECTION DETAIL A CONCRETE CURB LIMITS N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S
25 1
2 "13 1
2 " 8' 8' O.C. (TYP)
3' MIN. N.T.S REINFORCED CONCRETE FOOTINGS PER MF'R REQ. 2.75" PALE (WELDED CONNECTIONS) STRAIGHT SPIKED PICKETS (TRIDENT STYLE) 4" 12 GA. GATE POST HEIGHT PER MF'R REQ. GUARD RAIL PER MF'R REQ. 2" COMBINATION AIR VALVE ASSEMBLY 3 2
1 STREET
4 5
8 EXISTING CURB & GUTTER24" MIN. 1/2" GAP ALL AROUND (TYP.) DETAIL A EXISTING SIDEWALK 7 42" MIN. CLEARANCE OF UNOBSTRUCTED SIDEWALK 1/4" PER FOOT MIN. SLOPE 14" 4 9 23" R/W
6 1" MIN REFER TO NOTE 1 NOTES: 1. SS 316, WEDGE ANCHOR, 3 8" DIAMETER, 3" LENGTH WITH NUT. 2. IF NO SIDEWALK EXISTS, UNIT TO BE CONSTRUCTED ON A 2' X 2' X 6" DEEP CONCRETE FOUNDATION & FASTENED AS IN NOTE 1. 3. IF NO SIDEWALK OR CURB EXISTS PIPE BARRICADES SHALL BE INSTALLED PER STANDARD PLAN. 4. SADDLE AND CORP STOP SHALL BE WRAPPED WITH NO-OX-ID "A SPECIAL GREASE AND TAPE AND POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT PER AWWA C105. SADDLE AND CORP. STOP SHALL BE WRAPPED WITH NO-OX-ID "A" SPECIAL GREASE AND TAPE AND POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT PER AWWA C105. FOR 12" DIAMETER OR LESS DISTRIBUTION LINE ITEM DESCRIPTION 1 2" SERVICE SADDLE
2 VALVE BOX ASSEMBLY PER CITY STANDARD
3 TYPE "K" SOFT 2" COPPER WATER TUBING SERVICE LINE WRAPPED IN 8 MIL P.E. 4 2" CORPORATION STOP, PACK-JOINT
5 2" AIR AND VACUUM RELEASE VALVE BY DEZURIK.
6 ORNAMENTAL UNIT, LOW DENSITY, POLYETHYLENE, 20" DIAMETER x 36" HEIGHT, SANDSTONE FINISH BY ARMORCAST, MODEL P6002002 7 2" BRASS 90° ELBOW, M.I.P. INLET x F.I.P. OUTLET
8 2" 90° ELBOW, PACK-JOINT9 MUSHROOM CAP EXTENSION, PINNED IN PLACE WHEN CORP STOP IS GREATER THAN 48" IN DEPTH 4 " MIN.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-C2.0 CIVIL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: CIVIL DETAILS 2 - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 10:22:30 AM Dimscale = 96; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" 13
EASTERLY PROPERTY LINE
WESTERLY PROPERTY LINE
6" 3'-4" 8'-0" 1'-0" ±34'-5" WROUGHT IRON FENCE TYP. W/ 6" CONCRETE CURB SEE SHEET C2.0 FOR FINISHED GRADE 9'-7" 4'-4" 5'-0" 5'-8" 4'-7"
3'-7" 7'-2"
10'-0"
12'-0" 2'-6"
6'-4"
SD SD SD SD SD SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS
SS
SS
S 10'-5" 16'-7"
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - Construction Notes.dwg; B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-M1.0 MECHANICAL SITE PLAN.dwg - Tab: MECHANICAL SITE PLAN - by mmills on 12/06/21 at 11:49:11 AM Dimscale = 36; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" WELL #22 MECHANICAL SITE PLAN SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" ELECTRICAL ROOM CHLORINE STORAGE ROOM (EPOXY COATED FLOOR) 12" DI WELL DISCHARGE PIPING PER CIVIL CM2.0 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LIST ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONS QTY. 1 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP FLOWSERVE 12EMB MULTI-STAGE VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP, 2,100 GPM @ 500' TDH, 350 HP, 480V, 3 PHASE, 60 HZ (VFD CONTROLLED), NSF61 CERTIFIED 1 2 FIBER REINFORCED POLYMER BUILDING ORENCO - FRP PACKAGED BUILDING W/ TWO SEPARATE STRUCTURES CONSISTING OF A 10'(L)X10'(W)X10'(H) CHLORINE ROOM AND A 17'(L)X12'(W)X10'(H) ELECTRICAL ROOM (COMPLETE PACKAGE TO BE PROVIDED AS A DEFERRED SUBMITTAL) 1 3 CHECK VALVE VAL-MATIC 7800 12" GLOBE STYLE CHECK VALVE WITH PRESSURE GAUGE AND VALVE POSITION INDICATOR, ASME/ANSI B16.42 CLASS 250 FLANGED CONNECTION, ASTM A536 DUCTILE IRON, EPOXY COATED, NSF61/NSF372 CERTIFIED 2 4 ISOLATION VALVE DEZURIK BAW 12" BUTTERFLY VALVE W/ HANDWHEEL, ASME/ANSI B16/1 CLASS 250 FLANGED CONNECTION, ASTM A126 CAST IRON BODY, EPOXY COATED, NSF61/NSF372 CERTIFIED 7 5 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER ROSEMOUNT 3051C GAUGE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, -14.7 TO 300 PSI (3 PSI MINIMUM SPAN), 4-20 MA OUTPUT W/ DIGITAL HART PROTOCOL, LCD DISPLAY 2 6 FLOW METER ROSEMOUNT 8750W 12" MAGNETIC FLOW METER WITH REMOTE TRANSMITTER, ASME/ANSI B16.5 CLASS 250 FLANGED CONNECTION, 24 VDC POWER, 4-20 MA OUTPUT W/ DIGITAL HART PROTOCOL & SCALABLE PULSE, NSF61/NSF372 CERTIFIED 1 7 HIGH VOLUME AIR RELEASE/VACUUM VALVE APCO 146DAT 3" HIGH VOLUME AIR RELEASE/VACUUM VALVE W/ DOUBLE ACTING THROTTLING DEVICE AND WATER DIFFUSER, DUCTILE IRON BODY 1 8 EXHAUST FAN GREENHECK CUE WALL MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN AND DUCTING, 200 CFM MINIMUM AT 0.2 IN WG, SPEED CONTROL, 120V, 1 PHASE, 60 HZ 1 9 A/C SYSTEM DAIKIN - SPLIT A/C SYSTEM WITH OUTDOOR CONDENSER UNIT, INDOOR WALL/ROOF-MOUNTED FAN AND PIPING, 48,000 BTU/HR. RATED COOLING CAPACITY, INDOOR UNIT - 240V, 1 PHASE, 60 HZ, AND OUTDOOR UNIT - 240V, 1 PHASE, 60 HZ, SPEED CONTROL 1 10 CHEMICAL STORAGE TANK POLYPROCESSING - 475 GALLON, 4' Ø X 5'-2" SIDE WALL HEIGHT (6'-3 1/4" OVERALL HEIGHT) OPAQUE WHITE DOUBLE WALL NAOCL STORAGE TANK WITH SEISMIC TIE DOWNS (SIGNED AND STAMPED CALCULATIONS TO BE PROVIDED BY MF'R) 1 11 VALVE ACTUATOR AUMA SQ ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATOR W/ MANUAL HANDWHEEL, 30 SECOND OPEN/CLOSE TIME, 240V, 1 PHASE, 60 HZ1 12 COMBINATION AIR VALVE APCO 140C 2" COMBINATION AIR RELEASE VALVE AND AIR/VACUUM VALVE WITH BALL VALVE TAP, DUCTILE IRON BODY, THREADED NPT CONNECTION, NSF61/NSF372 CERTIFIED 2 13 CHEMICAL FEED SKID PULSATRON PES2S DOUBLE SERIES MP POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT DIAPHRAGM PUMP SKID WITH DEGASSING HEAD ASSEMBLY, 42 GPD @ 150 PSI, 120V POWER FOR EACH PUMP, 1 PHASE, 60 HZ, 4-20 MA DIGITAL HART PROTOCOL & SCALABLE PULSE, NSF61/NSF372 CERTIFIED 1 BM2.0
AM2.0 15" RCP STORM DRAIN PER CIVIL INSTALL 12"x12"x12" DUCTILE IRON PIPE TEE (FLGxFLGxFLG). M2 M4 M3 M1 INSTALL 12"-90° DUCTILE IRON PIPE ELBOW (FLGxFLG). M5 M7 M6 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 INSTALL 12" DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (FLGxGROOVED). INSTALL 12" COUPLING (GROOVED). INSTALL WATER MAIN THRUST BLOCK PER DETAIL D, SHEET M3.4. M15 M16 INSTALL CONCRETE PUMP PAD, PEDESTAL AND SHADE STRUCTURE PER STRUCTURAL AND DETAIL E, SHEET M3.5. M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 INSTALL VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP, MOTOR, DISCHARGE HEAD AND ASSOCIATED APPURTENANCES PER MECHANICAL DETAILS. INSTALL 12" DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (FLGxFLG). INSTALL 5'(H)x5'(L)x6'(H) PRECAST ENERGY DISSIPATION CONCRETE SPLASH PAD W/ ALUMINUM STEEL GRATE. INSTALL 12"-45° DUCTILE IRON PIPE ELBOW (FLGxFLG). INSTALL 3/4" STAINLESS STEEL CHEMICAL INJECTION QUILL AND FEED LINE. INSTALL 12"-90° FLG. DUCTILE IRON PIPE ELBOW WITH INSECT SCREEN. INSTALL 12" DUCTILE IRON BLIND FLANGE. INSTALL CHLORINE HOUSEKEEPING PAD PER DETAIL A, SHEET M3.5. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. SEE SECTION "SES (NORTH WALL)" AND "(NORTH WALL)" PER DETAIL D, SHEET E7.1. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. SEE SECTION "MCC SECTION (EAST WALL)" PER DETAIL D, SHEET E7.1. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. SEE SECTION "MCC SECTION (SOUTH WALL)" PER DETAIL D, SHEET E7.1. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. SEE SECTION "PLC (WEST WALL)" PER DETAIL D, SHEET E7.1. INSTALL EMERGENCY EYEWASH STATION PER DETAIL B, SHEET M3.5. NOT USED. PORTABLE GENERATOR POINT OF CONNECTION JUNCTION BOX PER ELECTRICAL. INSTALL 12"-90° DUCTILE IRON PIPE ELBOW (MJxMJ). INSTALL PIPE SUPPORT PER DETAIL C, SHEET M3.4. INSTALL 4" FLOOR DRAIN WITH P-TRAP AND 4" SCH. 80 PVC DRAIN LINE PER DETAIL E, SHEET M3.4. INSTALL 4" FLOOR DRAIN WITH P-TRAP AND 4" SCH. 80 PVC DRAIN LINE PER DETAIL F, SHEET M3.4. INSTALL 12" INSULATING FLANGE KIT. CONSTRUCTION NOTES: M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 4 1
3 12 M7 M6 M12 M9 3 M9
4 M11
4 M10
8 13
9 M19 M14 M15 M17 M18
4 M3 M45 M5 M3
4 M8 M9 M11 M5
4 5 M3 M4 M9 M4 M4
5 7 11 M21 CENTER OF PUMP BARREL LINES UP WITH CENTER OF 18" CASING N: 1821722.64 E: 6495577.71 "FLUSH VALVE" LEGEND: CONCRETE PAD 6 M16
SLOPE TO
FLOOR DRAIN
SLOPE TO
FLOOR DRAIN M26 M24
9 AM2.1
BM2.1 M32 M33 INSTALL CHLORINE INJECTION PUMP SKID. INSTALL 2" SCH. 80 PVC OVERFLOW PIPE. M34 M35 INSTALL 1" PTFE FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINT (PROCO STYLE 442-BD OR EQUAL). INSTALL CHLORINE TANK HOLD DOWN CLIPS PER MFR REQUIREMENT. M36 INSTALL HOSE BIB PER DETAIL B, SHEET M3.5. M37 INSTALL 3 8" O.D. x 1
4" I.D. PVDF CHEMICAL TUBING IN 1" SCH. 80 PVC CONDUIT FOR DOSING PUMP PRESSURE RELIEF. M38 INSTALL 2" SCH. 80 PVC POTABLE WATER SITE USE LINE PER DETAIL A, SHEET C4.2. M39 INSTALL 1" CONTINUOUS-LUBE WATER FLUSH SUPPLY ASSEMBLY PER DETAIL C, SHEET M3.2. M40 INSTALL 12"x10" DUCTILE IRON REDUCER (FLGxFLG). M41 INSTALL 12" THICK CONCRETE PAD. M42 INSTALL 4" THICK ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HOUSEKEEPING PAD. M43 INSTALL 18"(L)x12"(W)x6"(H) CONCRETE CONTAINMENT CURB W/ DRAIN. M44 INSTALL 12" SQ 20 GAUGE ALUMINUM DUCTING. M45 INSTALL STANCHION MOUNTED REMOTE FLOW TRANSMITTER. M46 INSTALL 12" BLIND FLANGE WITH 2" NPT TAP. M36 M32 2 2 M35 M33 M31 M30 M28 M29 M37
DM2.0 M39 M23 M23M23 M23 M23 M4 14 M40 M32 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 INSTALL 3 8" O.D. x 1
4" I.D. PVDF CHEMICAL TUBING IN 1" SCH. 80 PVC CONDUIT. INSTALL 3 8" O.D. PVDF CHEMICAL TUBING. INSTALL 2" SCH. 80 PVC VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS W/ ROOF JACK AND INSECT SCREEN. INSTALL 2" CHLORINE TANK FILL LINE WITH 2" TRUE-UNION BALL VALVE, 45° ELBOW AND 2" CHEMLOCK FITTING. INSTALL CHLORINE INJECTION PUMP SKID. 10 M44M25 M25 MOTOR STARTER. SEE ELECTRICAL FOR WIRING SITE WATER USE PER SHEET C3.2 M15 M23 M23 NOTES: 1. THE CITY OF VERNON HAS DICTATED THAT WELL NO. 22 SHALL NOT HAVE AN ON-SITE PRV. THE PUMP-TO-WASTE VALVING AND PROPOSED OPERATION HAS BEEN DICTATED BY THE CITY OF VERNON. PACE IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE PIPING CONFIGURATION DICTATED BY THE CITY. 9'-8"
3' ± 3'-8" 7'-2" 3'-7" 4'-4" 5'-0" 5'-8"
3' ± M22 M23 INSTALL 12"-90° DUCTILE IRON PIPE ELBOW (MJxMJ). INSTALL PIPE SUPPORT PER DETAIL C, SHEET M3.4.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - Construction Notes.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG; B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-M2.0 MECHANICAL SECTIONS.dwg - Tab: MECHANICAL SECTIONS - by mmills on 09/22/21 at 9:58:06 AM Dimscale = 96; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 FESS I A NEER I L ENG D No. C44825 O I F R N I A E A T VC C I O F I A L L Exp. 03-31-22N PRO O S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN S . L EE MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" 3' ± PER CIVIL TO 15" STORM DRAIN 12" D.I. WELL DISCHARGE PIPE PUMP DISCHARGE SECTION B SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" SECTION C SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" INSTALL 12"x12"x12" DUCTILE IRON PIPE TEE (FLGxFLGxFLG). M4 M3 INSTALL 12"-90° DUCTILE IRON PIPE ELBOW (FLGxFLG). M5 M7 M6 M8 M9 M10 INSTALL 12" DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (FLGxGROOVED). INSTALL 12" COUPLING (GROOVED). INSTALL 12" DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (FLGxFLG). INSTALL 12"-45° DUCTILE IRON PIPE ELBOW (FLGxFLG). INSTALL 3/4" STAINLESS STEEL CHEMICAL INJECTION QUILL AND FEED LINE. INSTALL 12"-90° FLG. DUCTILE IRON PIPE ELBOW WITH INSECT SCREEN. CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 3 M4 M5 4 M3 M6 M7 M9 M5 SLOPE PER CIVIL SLOPE PER CIVIL 7 M4 5 12 # EQUIPMENT LIST CALL OUT. SEE SHEET M1.0 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. M13 M3 M4 M12 4 M46 M9 M105 M3 M22 M20 NOT USED. CENTERLINE EL. 193.85 CENTERLINE EL. 193.85 M9 CENTERLINE EL. 193.85 11 4 "FLUSH VALVE" M9 M23 M23 M23 4 M12 M13 INSTALL WATER MAIN THRUST BLOCK PER DETAIL D, SHEET M3.4. INSTALL 5'(H)x5'(L)x6'(H) PRECAST ENERGY DISSIPATION CONCRETE SPLASH PAD W/ ALUMINUM STEEL GRATE. M38 M38 INSTALL 2" SCH. 80 PVC POTABLE WATER SITE USE LINE PER DETAIL A, SHEET C4.2. LEGEND: CONCRETE PAD SECTION A SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" CENTERLINE EL. 193.85 M23 M4 M4 M9 M5 ASPHALT CONCRETE ASPHALT CONCRETE ASPHALT CONCRETE 3 6 M3 M9 M6 SECTION D SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" M23 ASPHALT CONCRETE M8 M23 15 M23 M26 M26 INSTALL 12" INSULATING FLANGE KIT. M40 M40 INSTALL 12"x10" DUCTILE IRON REDUCER (FLGxFLG). 2 x DIA.
AIR GAP M4 M45 INSTALL STANCHION MOUNTED REMOTE FLOW TRANSMITTER. M46 INSTALL 12" BLIND FLANGE WITH 2" NPT TAP. M45 M20 (TYP.)
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - Construction Notes.dwg; B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-M2.1 MECHANICAL SECTIONS.dwg - Tab: MECHANICAL BUILDING - by mmills on 09/22/21 at 10:04:12 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" WELL #22 BUILDING SECTION B SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 10 M18 M14 M14 INSTALL CHLORINE HOUSEKEEPING PAD PER DETAIL A, SHEET M3.5. M25 M24 M27 M27 M28 M28 M37 M30 M29 M30 M31 M33 M35 M34 13 5'-10" 1'-2" 3'-5" 5'-9" 5'-1" 2 5'-8" EQUIPMENT LIST CALL OUT. SEE SHEET M1.0 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. # LEGEND: CONCRETE PAD 16 M29 M24 27'-0" 2"
10'-0" M41 M32
2 8'-0" M18 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. SEE SECTION "PLC (WEST WALL)" PER DETAIL D, SHEET E7.1. M24 M25 INSTALL 4" FLOOR DRAIN WITH P-TRAP AND 4" SCH. 80 PVC DRAIN LINE PER DETAIL E, SHEET M3.4. INSTALL 4" FLOOR DRAIN WITH P-TRAP AND 4" SCH. 80 PVC DRAIN LINE PER DETAIL F, SHEET M3.4. M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 INSTALL 3 8" O.D. x 1
4" I.D. PVDF CHEMICAL TUBING IN 1" SCH. 80 PVC CONDUIT. INSTALL 3 8" O.D. PVDF CHEMICAL TUBING. INSTALL 2" SCH. 80 PVC VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS W/ ROOF JACK AND INSECT SCREEN. INSTALL 2" CHLORINE TANK FILL LINE WITH 2" TRUE-UNION BALL VALVE, 45° ELBOW AND 2" CHEMLOCK FITTING. INSTALL CHLORINE INJECTION PUMP SKID. INSTALL 2" SCH. 80 PVC OVERFLOW PIPE. M34 M35 INSTALL 1" PTFE FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINT (PROCO STYLE 442-BD OR EQUAL). INSTALL CHLORINE TANK HOLD DOWN CLIPS PER MFR REQUIREMENT. INSTALL ROOF MOUNTED PIPE SUPPORT PER DETAIL D, SHEET M3.5. M41 INSTALL 12" THICK CONCRETE PAD. M42 INSTALL 4" THICK ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HOUSEKEEPING PAD. M37 INSTALL 3 8" O.D. x 1
4" I.D. PVDF CHEMICAL TUBING IN 1" SCH. 80 PVC CONDUIT FOR DOSING PUMP PRESSURE RELIEF. M42 (DEGASSING) (DISCHARGE)(SUCTION) PIPE LOCATED OUTSIDE 3'-0"
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - Construction Notes.dwg; B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-M2.2 MECHANICAL SECTIONS.dwg - Tab: MECHANICAL BUILDING - by mmills on 09/22/21 at 10:10:34 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" WELL #22 BUILDING SECTION A SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" CONSTRUCTION NOTES:
9 2 M19 INSTALL EMERGENCY EYEWASH STATION PER DETAIL B, SHEET M3.5. M19 M36 M21 5'-1" 5'-10" EQUIPMENT LIST CALL OUT. SEE SHEET M1.0 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. # LEGEND: CONCRETE PAD 17 4'-0" 1'-7" 27'-0" 4'-6" 5'-10" M36 M44 M41 10'-0"
8'-0" M24 2"
8'-0" M31 M43 M21 PORTABLE GENERATOR POINT OF CONNECTION JUNCTION BOX PER ELECTRICAL. M24 INSTALL 4" FLOOR DRAIN WITH P-TRAP AND 4" SCH. 80 PVC DRAIN LINE PER DETAIL E, SHEET M3.4. M31 INSTALL 2" CHLORINE TANK FILL LINE WITH 2" TRUE-UNION BALL VALVE, 45° ELBOW AND 2" CHEMLOCK FITTING. M36 INSTALL HOSE BIB PER DETAIL B, SHEET M3.5. M41 INSTALL 12" THICK CONCRETE PAD. M42 INSTALL 4" THICK ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HOUSEKEEPING PAD. M43 INSTALL 18"(L)x12"(W)x6"(H) CONCRETE CONTAINMENT CURB W/ DRAIN. M44 INSTALL 12" SQ 20 GAUGE ALUMINUM DUCTING. 8 M42
WELL CASING CONNECTION
B
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-M3.0 MECHANICAL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: MECHANICAL DETAILS 1 - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 10:22:24 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" A GROUND SURFACE EL. 190.60'± TOP OF EXISTING 18" CASING 3" GRAVEL FEED 48" CONDUCTOR CASING 4" CAMERA TUBE 2" SOUNDING TUBE CASING SECTION A 36" CONDUCTOR CASING N.T.S PLAN / SECTION OF EXISTING CASING AND TUBING N.T.S PLAN OF EXISTING CASINGS AND TUBINGS 3" GRAVEL FEED EXISTING 48" O.D. 1/2" WALL THICKNESS LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SHALLOW SURFACE CONDUCTOR CASING EXISTING 18" I.D. 5/16" WALL THICKNESS HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA) BLANK WELL CASING EXISTING 36" O.D. 1/2" WALL THICKNESS LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) DEEP CONDUCTOR CASING NOTE: EXACT LOCATION OF 3" AND SMALLER TUBES TO BE DETERMINED BY PUMP MFR. 4'-6" WELL HEAD 4'-0" 2'-3.5" 9'-0" 7'-0" 5'-0" 30°
2'-3.5"
8'-6"
5'-0"
4'-0"
10'-6" NOTES: 1. MOTOR NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY 2. TO PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE PUMP CASING, THE PUMP BOWL, THE EDGE OF THE 1.5" MULTI-PURPOSE TUBE, AND TO ACCOUNT FOR THE CASING BEING SLIGHTLY OUT OF PLUMB, THE CENTER OF THE PUMP SHAFT WILL LINE UP WITH THE CENTER OF THE 18" WELL CASING NEAR THE GROUND SURFACE. 3. All WETTED PARTS AND MATERIALS SHALL BE NSF61 CERTIFIED. 2" SOUNDING TUBE 4" CAMERA TUBE WELL CASING CENTER COORDINATES N: 1821722.64 E: 6495577.71 EXISTING 18" I.D. 5/16" WALL THICKNESS HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA) BLANK WELL CASING DISCHARGE HEAD, PUMP AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY PER PLANS 9' X 10.5' CONCRETE PAD FOR THE PUMP ASSEMBLY AND REMOVABLE COLUMNS AND ENCLOSURE 12" CHECK VALVE 4" I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 80 CAMERA TUBE AND REMOVABLE CAP ASSEMBLY 2' LONG 12" DIAMETER CML&EC DUCTILE IRON PIPE PRESSURE GAUGE AND PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY 3" I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 40 GRAVEL FEED TUBE WITH REMOVABLE CAP ASSEMBLY 1.5" THICK 48" X 48" WELL CASING ANCHOR PLATE (HSLA) WELDED TO THE 18" WELL CASING WITH ADDITIONAL OPENINGS FOR SMALLER DIAMETER TUBES, TUBES ARE NOT WELDED TO THE ANCHOR PLATE (BELOW GROUND) CONDUIT FOR CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION PER ELECTRICAL 3" AIR VACUUM AND RELEASE WITH DOUBLE ACTING THROTTLING DEVICE AND WATER DIFFUSER, APCO 146DAT WITH WELD O-LET ASSEMBLY 2" I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 80 SOUNDING TUBE W/LEVEL TRANSDUCER ASSEMBLY 3" I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 40 WELL VENT LINE WITH REMOVABLE CAP ASSEMBLY WELD O-LET ASSEMBLY, TYP. 12" INSULATING JOINT ASSEMBLY 2" STEEL ABOVE GROUND ACCESS ASSEMBLY WITH A THREADED CAP FOR ACCESS TO THE 1.25" SCHEDULE 80 PVC PIPE 12"X10" CML&EC DUCTILE IRON REDUCER 5'X5' RAISED CONCRETE BASE 2" 60° I.D LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 40 ABOVE GROUND ACCESS PORT ASSEMBLY 20° 48" SQ. x 2" THICK SOLE PLATE W/ 18" DIAMETER OPENING PER PUMP MANUFACTURER (ABOVE GROUND) TOP OF 18" I.D. X 36" I.D., 5/16" WALL THICKNESS HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA) CASING EXTENSION EXPANDER 2" 2" 1-1/4"Ø HOLE (4 TYP.)
F M3.1
A
- 18
55°
A
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-M3.0 MECHANICAL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: MECHANICAL DETAILS 2 - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 10:22:24 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" WELL HEAD CASING SECTION (FACING WEST) SLOPE 2" SLOPE WELL CASING EXTENSION PIPE EXISTING 18" WELL CASING CUT AS SHOWN F.P. NOTE: 1. BOTH CAMERA TUBE AND GRAVEL FEED TUBE ARE NOT SHOWN HERE 2. CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM NOT SHOWN HERE 3. IN ORDER TO PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE PUMP CASING WITH THE EDGE OF THE PUMP BOWL AND THE EDGE OF THE 1.5" MULTI-PURPOSE TUBE, AND ALSO TO ACCOUNT FOR THE CASING BEING SLIGHTLY OUT OF PLUMB, THE CENTER OF THE PUMP SHAFT WILL LINE UP WITH THE CENTER OF THE 18" WELL CASING NEAR THE GROUND SURFACE 2" 5'-0" 5'-0"
2" 350HP RUSI USEM MOTOR BY US MOTOR (NIDEC) OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL 2" 60° I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 40 ABOVE GROUND ACCESS PORT ASSEMBLY 48" SQ. x 2" THICK SOLE PLATE W/ 18" DIAMETER OPENING PER PUMP MANUFACTURER (ABOVE GROUND) NON-SHRINK GROUT 9/16" WIDE WORM GEAR HOSE CLAMP WITH QUICK RELEASE, 201/301 STAINLESS STEEL, 5/16" SCREW SIZE, 0.022" THICK, TO SECURE THE MULTI-PURPOSE TUBE TO THE PUMP COLUMN AT 5' INTERVALS, TYP. 2" STEEL PIPE ABOVE GROUND ACCESS ASSEMBLY WITH A THREADED CAP FOR ACCESS TO THE 1.25" SCHEDULE 80 PVC PIPE 4" ASPHALT CONCRETE 4" AGGREGATE BASE CUT AND REMOVE TOP SECTION OF THE EXISTING 36" CONDUCTOR CASING TO MATCH THE ADJACENT 48" CONDUCTOR CASING AND CHIP DOWN CONCRETE ADJACENT TO THE 18" WELL CASING DOWN AS REQUIRED TO EL. 190.60' ALL AROUND TEMPORARY BACKING PLATE 4 - 1" x 32" LONG ANCHOR BOLTS (F-1554, GR. 55) W/ 3" x 1 4" PL. & DOUBLE NUT 11.5" WIDE CONCRETE FOOTING WITH ENCASED METAL THREADED FEMALE ANCHORS FOR ABOVE GROUND REMOVABLE ENCLOSURE PER PLANS 2" I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 80 SOUNDING TUBE W/ LEVEL TRANSDUCER ASSEMBLY 1/2" CONCRETE EXPANSION JOINT WITH CAULKING ON TOP WITH EXPANSION FABRIC IN BETWEEN 3" I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) WELL VENT LINE WITH REMOVEABLE CAP ASSEMBLY 1.5" THICK 48" X 48" WELL CASING ANCHOR PLATE (HSLA) WELDED TO THE 18" WELL CASING WITH ADDITIONAL LARGER OPENINGS FOR SMALLER DIAMETER TUBES, AND TUBES ARE NOT WELDED TO THE ANCHOR PLATE (BELOW GROUND) 5' OF OVER-EXCAVATION, SCARIFICATION, AND RECOMPACTION ON ALL SIDES, TYP. 5' OF OVER-EXCAVATION, SCARIFICATION, AND RECOMPACTION ON ALL SIDES, TYP. APPROXIMATE LIMIT OF OVER-EXCAVATION, SCARIFICATION, AND RECOMPACTION FF EL = 190.60' 1.5" THICK WELL CASING ANCHOR PLATE 10" CAST IRON DISCHARGE HEAD WITH 10" FLANGE OUTLET BY FLOWSERVE, OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL TOP OF CONC. EL = 192.60' EXISTING 48" O.D. 1/2" WALL THICKNESS LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SHALLOW SURFACE CONDUCTOR CASING EL = 190.90' EXISTING ANNULAR GROUT SEAL 10" PUMP DISCHARGE COLUMN PIPE (PUMP BARREL) PER PUMP MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS EXISTING 18" I.D. 5/16" WALL THICKNESS HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA) BLANK WELL CASING EXISTING 36" O.D. 1/2" WALL THICKNESS LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) DEEP CONDUCTOR CASING CUT AND REMOVE TOP SECTION OF THE EXISTING 18" WELL CASING AND WELD A 18" I.D. X 36" I.D., 5/16" WALL THICKNESS HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA) CASING EXTENSION EXPANDER AS SHOWN 1'-3" 1'-6" OPENING
1" EL = 185.60' N.T.S19 4"
A
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-M3.0 MECHANICAL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: MECHANICAL DETAILS 3 - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 10:22:24 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" WELL PROFILE N.T.S20 NOTES: 1. WELL PROFILE IS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL PUMP AND ASSOCIATED PIPING IN ACCORDANCE TO RICHARD C. SLADE & ASSOCIATES GROUNDWATER REPORT. 1,160' BELOW GROUND SURFACE 1,120' BELOW GROUND SURFACE MAXIMUM INSTALLATION DEPTH 0' GROUND SURFACE 5' BELOW GROUND SURFACE SEE SHEET M3.1 FOR MOTOR AND CONCRETE PAD DETAILS EXIST. 36" LOW CARBON STEEL CONDUCTOR CASING EXIST. 18" HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY ROSCOE MOSS FULL-FLO LOUVERED WELL CASING, 0.055" SLOT OPENING 11 STAGE PUMP BOWLS PER PUMP MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS INFLATABLE PACKER SYSTEM PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS PUMP INLET W/ SCREEN PER PUMP MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS WELL BASEPLATE 6x16 GRADIATION GRAVEL PACK 10" PUMP DISCHARGE COLUMN PER PUMP MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS 3.25' ABOVE GROUND SURFACE 2' ABOVE GROUND SURFACE STATIC WATER LEVEL ESTIMATED WATER PUMPING LEVEL 400' BELOW GROUND SURFACE 220.8' BELOW GROUND SURFACE 299.1' BELOW GROUND SURFACE EXIST. CONDUIT DEPTH LOCATION ITEM SIZE (IN) DEPTH (BGS) GRAVEL FEED TUBE 3" 575' CAMERA TUBE 4" 580'-590' SOUNDING TUBE 2" 600-601'
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-M3.0 MECHANICAL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: MECHANICAL DETAILS 4 - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 10:22:24 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION"
E INSULATED CABLE WITH LEVEL TRANSDUCER
3 8" TWISTED POLYPROPYLENE SYNTHETIC ROPE PLASTIC TIE WRAP TO PREVENT CUTTING OF WATERPROOF SHEATH CABLE (INSTALL TIES AT TYPICAL 5' SPACINGS WITH SLACKS AT EACH SPACING INTERVALS) LEVEL TRANSDUCER EXISTING 2" I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 80 PIPE FOR SOUNDING TUBE WITH PORT FROM 600 TO 601 FEET BELOW GROUND SURFACE. MOUNTING DETAIL TRANSMITTER DETAIL L
A
S
TIC
TIE
W
R
A
P
T
O
P
R
E
V
E
N
T
C
U
T
TIN
G
O
F
A
T
E
R
P
R
O
O
F
S
H
E
A
T
H
C
A
B
L
E (IN
S
T
A
L
L
TIE
S AT TYPICAL 5' SPACINGS WITH SLACKS AT EACH SPACING INTERVALS) CAST JUNCTION BOX 1" GALVANIZED IRON CONDUIT WITH TRANSDUCER CABLE TO INDICATOR MOUNTED ON WELL CONTROL PANEL IN THE ELECTRICAL ROOM EXISTING 2" I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 80 SOUNDING TUBE. CUT TO FIT NEW SOUND TUBE ASSEMBLY. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) BUTT STRAP 2" I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 80 PIPE FOR SOUNDING TUBE. BUTT WELDED INSULATED CABLE WITH LEVEL TRANSDUCER TOP OF CONCRETE PUMP BASE 12" TYP. 2" MIN.
3 8" TWISTED POLYPROPYLENE SYNTHETIC ROPE ATTACH WIRE ROPE TO EYE BOLT CAULKING 2" LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 80 BLIND FLANGE CHORD GRIP ANGLE TO BE ESTABLISHED IN THE FIELD. 15 DEGREES OR LESS. EXACT DEPTH TO BE DETERMINED IN THE FIELD BUTT WELDED STEEL SOLE PLATE OPENING IN THE SOLE PLATE (SIZE TO BE DETERMINED IN THE FIELD) GROUTING C
A
B CONTINUOUS-LUBE WATER FLUSH SUPPLY ASSEMBLY TO BE CONNECTED AND WELDED TO THE 36" X 18" I.D. BY 5 16" WALL THICKNESS HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA) WELL CASING EXTENSION 3" I.D. SCH 40 LOW CARBON STEEL VENT PIPE 3" SCH. 40 THREADED LOW CARBON STEEL TEE, TYP. 3" I.D. SCH. 40 LOW CARBON STEEL VENT PIPE W/ PLUG (THREADED) 3" THREADED LOW CARBON STEEL INSECT SCREEN 3" SCH. 40 THREADED LOW CARBON STEEL ELBOW, TYP. 3" I.D. SCH. 40 LOW CARBON STEEL VENT NIPPLE (THREADED) 6"
TYPICAL EDGE OF STEEL SOLE PLATE 1" MIN. GROUTING TOP OF CONCRETE PUMP BASE 3" VERTICAL WELL AIR VENT (TYP) 11" STAINLESS STEEL BALL VALVE
6'-4" NOTE: 1. PLANS SHOW A 1" WATER SUPPLY REDUCING TO 3 4" TO BE COMPATIBLE WITH THE PUMP MANUFACTURER'S WATER FLUSH ASSEMBLY POINT OF CONNECTION. HOWEVER, THE INSTALLED PIPE DIAMETER WILL BE PER THE SUBMITTED PUMP MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS . 2. PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS, THE WATER FLUSH SUPPLY WILL BE CONTINUOUS AND ALWAYS LEFT OPEN, WHEN THE PUMP IS ON AND OFF. 1" STAINLESS STEEL UNION PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE, IF REQUIRED BY PUMP MFR. CLA-VAL CRD-L OR APPROVED EQUAL STAINLESS STEEL BALL VALVE 1"x 3 4" STAINLESS STEEL REDUCING BUSHING 4'-4" (PIPE AND VALVE TO CLEAR CONCRETE PUMP BASE) PUMP DISCHARGE HEAD 3 4" INSULATING JOINT CENTERLINE EL. 193.85
3 4" THREADED SCH 40 STAINLESS STEEL NIPPLE 1" THREADED SCH 40 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE STEEL SOLE PLATE 1" THREADED SCH40 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE TO DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE 4" 18"X36" CASING EXTENSION EXPANDER TOP OF CONCRETE EL. 192.60 1" METER (PROVIDED BY CITY) PUMP MOTOR SOUNDING TUBE WITH TRANSDUCER 4" CAMERA TUBE D 3" GRAVEL FEED WITH THREADED CAP LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) BUTT STRAP 4" I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 80 CAMERA TUBE AND REMOVABLE CAP ASSEMBLY BUTT WELDED TOP OF CONCRETE PUMP BASE STEEL SOLE PLATE ANGLE TO BE ESTABLISHED IN THE FIELD. 15 DEGREES OR LESS. NOTE: 1. ASSEMBLY MATERIAL IS TO BE SIMILAR TO THE EXISTING CAMERA TUBE 4" THREADED LOW CARBON STEEL CAP EXISTING 4" I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 80 CAMERA TUBE. CUT TO FIT NEW CAMERA TUBE ASSEMBLY. 2" MIN. 6" TYP. CAULKING BUTT WELDED OPENING IN THE SOLE PLATE (SIZE TO BE DETERMINED IN THE FIELD) GROUTING LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) BUTT STRAP 3" I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 80 GRAVEL TUBE. BUTT WELDED TOP OF CONCRETE PUMP BASE STEEL SOLE PLATE ANGLE TO BE ESTABLISHED IN THE FIELD. 15 DEGREES OR LESS. NOTE: 1. ASSEMBLY MATERIAL IS TO BE SIMILAR TO THE EXISTING GRAVEL TUBE 3" THREADED LOW CARBON STEEL CAP EXISTING 3" I.D. LOW CARBON STEEL (LCS) SCH. 80 GRAVEL TUBE. CUT TO FIT NEW GRAVEL TUBE ASSEMBLY. 3" MIN. 6" TYP. CAULKING BUTT WELDED OPENING IN THE SOLE PLATE (SIZE TO BE DETERMINED IN THE FIELD) GROUTING N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S21 NOTE: 1. ASSEMBLY MATERIAL IS TO BE SIMILAR TO THE WELL CASING NOTE: 1. ASSEMBLY MATERIAL TO BE SIMILAR TO THE EXISTING SOUNDING TUBE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-M3.0 MECHANICAL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: MECHANICAL DETAILS 5 - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 10:22:24 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 FESS I A NEER I L ENG D No. C44825 O I F R N I A E A T VC C I O F I A L L Exp. 03-31-22N PRO O S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN S . L EE MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" F 2" STEEL ABOVE GROUND ACCESS ASSEMBLY A C NOTE: 1. ASSEMBLY MATERIAL IS TO BE AS SHOWN. 1.25" SCH 80 PVC PIPE TO BE STRAPPED TO THE PUMP COLUMN TOP OF CONCRETE PADSTEEL SOLE PLATE NON-SHRINK GROUT (EDGE OF SOUL PLATE) 2" I.D STEEL ABOVE GROUND ACCESS ASSEMBLY 2" STEEL THREADED CAP 6" TYP. 18"X36" CASING EXTENSION EXPANDER F.P. 2" STEEL SPARE ABOVE GROUND ACCESS ASSEMBLY B TOP OF CONCRETE PADSTEEL SOLE PLATE NOTE: 1. ASSEMBLY MATERIAL IS TO BE AS SHOWN. NON-SHRINK GROUT (EDGE OF SOUL PLATE) 2" I.D STEEL SPARE ABOVE GROUND ACCESS PORT ASSEMBLY 2" STEEL THREADED CAP 6" TYP. 18"X36" CASING EXTENSION EXPANDER F.P. FLOOR DRAIN SECTION E EQUIPMENT DRAIN SECTION N.T.S N.T.S PIPE/FLANGE SUPPORT DETAIL N.T.S 4-12 14-16 5/8 1/2 18-36 7/8 NOTE: PIPE SUPPORT SPACING AND QUANTITY PER SPECIFICATIONS. USE 316 S.S MATERIAL FOR UNDERWATER INSTALLATIONS AND GALVANIZED STEEL FOR ALL OTHER INSTALLATIONS 3/4" THK. STEEL PLATE THREADED STAND PIPE SIZE PER TABLE ADJUSTABLE PIPE SADDLE SUPPORT WITH U-BOLT AND THREADED PIPE ADJUSTER PER TABLE, COOPER B-LINE OR EQUAL AS REQUIRED FINISHED FLOOR 4" 3" 6" 3" 2 1/2" 4" "B" "A" 1/4" 3/8" 3/8" NEOPRENE GASKET (TEFLON GASKET FOR AIR LINE) S.S. BOLTS SIZE PER TABLE GROUT 2' X 2'X 18" CONC FOOTING WHERE REQ'D #4 @ 10" O.C. 6 - #4 1'-6" THRUST AND GRAVITY BLOCKS THRUST BLOCKS FOR TEES, PLUGS, REDUCERS AND HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL UP BENDS PIPE DIAMETER VALVES AND CROSSES 4" 6" 8" 12" 6 CUBIC YARDS 2.5 CUBIC YARDS 1.5 CUBIC YARD 21 CUBIC FEET GRAVITY BLOCKS FOR VALVES, CROSSES AND VERTICAL DOWN BENDS TIE BAR TIE BAR VALVE CROSS 128 4 & 6 PIPE DIAMETER 4715 TEES, PLUGS & REDUCERS 90° BEND 621 1253 45° BENDS 22.5° BENDS 236 10 BEARING AREA SQUARE FEET REDUCER TEE AND PLUG VERTICAL DOWN BEND, 90°, 45°, 22.5° TIE BAR VARIABLE 12-INCH MIN. VARIABLE, 12" MIN. HORIZONTAL BEND 11.25° BENDS 123 45° 45° 90°, 45°, 22.5° 21 CUBIC FEET 1.5 CUBIC YARD 2.5 CUBIC YARDS 6 CUBIC YARDS 90° VERTICAL DOWN 45° VERTICAL DOWN 3 CUBIC YARDS 1.5 CUBIC YARD 21 CUBIC FEET 11 CUBIC FEET 22.5° VERTICAL DOWN 1.5 CUBIC YARD 19 CUBIC FEET 10 CUBIC FEET 7 CUBIC FEET GENERAL NOTES FOR ALL BLOCKS 1. BEARING AREAS SHALL BE INCREASED AT THE OPTION OF CITY ENGINEER IF SOIL BEARING PRESSURE IS LESS THAN 1500 PSF. 2. CONCRETE SHALL BE 2000 PSI OR GREATER. 3. BEARING AREAS OF BLOCK IN LINE OF RESULTANT THRUST SHALL BE AGAINST 4. TIE BARS SHALL BE 1/2" EPOXY COATED REBAR (PER ASTM 767 AND D3983) OR STAINLESS STEEL (WHEN EXPOSED) WITH ACI HOOKED ENDS. ALL REBAR EXPOSED TO SOIL SHALL BE GREASED AND WRAPPED WITH NO OX ID "A" SPECIAL GREASE AND WRAP. 5. MINIMUM CONCRETE THICKNESS = 12" 6. THRUST BLOCKS FOR PIPE SIZES LARGER THAN 12-INCHES SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE DESIGN ENGINEER, AND APPROVED BY THE CITY ENGINEER, DESIGN CRITERIA SHALL BE MAXIMUM SOIL BEARING CAPACITY OF 1500 LBS/SQ.FT. OR SITE CONDITIONS WHICH EVER IS LESS, A DESIGN PRESSURE OF 150 PSI, AND A FACTOR SAFETY OF 1.5. UNDISTURBED EARTH. N.T.S D N.T.S N.T.S22 6" SIZE PER PLAN
SIZE PER PLAN
CTR.
4" MIN CLR (TYP) 4" MIN CLR (TYP) 6" 3" 6" 3" BOLT 1/4"Ø S.S. TUBING (1/4" THICK) HOLLOW 3x3 SS 1/4 6" 3/4" 3/4" FFE 6" 3/4" 3/4" REDUCE AS NEEDED BOLT 1/4"Ø S.S. 1/4" THICK SS PLATE 6"Wx6"L SEE MECH PLANS FOR CONTINUATION 316 S.S. HOSE RACK. 3/4" HOSE BIBB 3/4" ISOLATION VALVE 1/4"Ø S.S. BOLTS WITH 4" EMBED (MIN.) 3/4" PIPE. (SEE PIPE SCHEDULE FOR MATERIAL). INSTALL UNISTRUT SUPPORT TO HOSE RACK INSTALL 3/4" ANTI SIPHON DEVICE 2'-0"
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-M3.0 MECHANICAL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: MECHANICAL DETAILS 6 - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 10:22:24 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" D
F HOUSEKEEPING PAD DETAIL
A
C ROOF MOUNTED PIPE SUPPORT EYEWASH SHOWER STATION
B SHADE STRUCTURE ROOF VENTE NOT USED N.T.S N.T.S HOSE BIBB/RACK DETAIL N.T.S SHOWER HEAD SHOWER ON/OFF PULL HANDLE EYE WASH ON/OFF HAND CONTROL EYE WASH ON/OFF FOOT PETAL 1 1/4"Ø EYE WASH DRAIN EYE WASH STATION SHOWER HEAD SHOWER ON/OFF PULL HANDLE EYE WASH ON/OFF HAND CONTROL EYE WASH ON/OFF FOOT PETAL EYE WASH DRAIN EYE WASH STATION 2"Ø POTABLE WATER INLET NOTE: 1. EMERGENCY EYEWASH STATION SHALL BE GUARDIAN G1902P OR EQUAL ANCHOR PER MFR'S REQUIREMENT ANCHOR PER MFR'S REQUIREMENT 2" THICK NON-SHRINK GROUT PROPOSED BUILDING SLAB. SEE STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR DETAILS #4 @ 6" OC EW (TYP @ EQ PAD) #4 @ 12" OC EW (TYP) 304SS EQ. ANCHOR BOLTS. DRILL AND EPOXY w/SIMPSON SET-XP EPOXY (OR EQUAL) (4" MIN. EMBED DEPTH). SIZE, AMT., LOCATIONS PER TANK MF'R REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE NON-SHRINK GROUT, WASHERS, NUTS, ETC. AS REQUIRED TO LEVEL/ SECURELY FASTEN EQUIPMENT TO PAD LEAVE BARS PROTRUDING OUT ABOVE FLOOR SLAB, TURN AND LAP w/EQ. PAD REBAR AS SHOWN PER MIN. LAP LENGTH REQUIREMENTS TURN AND LAP w/FLOOR SLAB REBAR AS SHOWN PER MIN. LAP LENGTH REQUIREMENTS 1" MIN. THICK NON-SHRINK GROUT, 45° CHAMFERED EDGES (TYP) CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD SEE SECTION FOR REINFORCEMENT DETAILS N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S PIPE HANGER UNISTRUT J1205-J12015 1/2"Ø THREADED ROD W/ NUTS & WASHERS FRP BUILDING MANUFACTURER RECOMMEND CONNECTION TO ROOF 23 NOTE: 1. ACCESS HATCH SHALL HAVE AN ABSOLUTE MINIMUM CLEAR OPENING OF 42" EXTRUDED ALUMINUM VENT HINGED ACCESS HATCH ALUMINUM SOFFIT PANEL 12'-0"
4'-0" 4'-0" MIN UNOBSTRUCTED OPENING
1 GENERAL STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS, AND THE ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, CIVIL, SITE DRAWINGS ETC. CONSULT THESE DRAWINGS FOR PENETRATIONS AND DETAILS NOT SHOWN ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. ANY CONFLICTS BETWEEN THE DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, EXISTING CONDITIONS, ETC. SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD FOR RESOLUTION PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH AFFECTED WORK. ANY COST INCURRED FROM NEGLECT OF THIS COORDINATION SHALL BE PAID FOR BY THE CONTRACTOR. EXISTING CONDITIONS: ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS MUST BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD AGAINST EXISTING CONDITIONS. SUCH DIMENSIONS INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, THOSE DIMENSIONS WITH "±" SHOWN AFTER THE NUMERICAL MEASUREMENT. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ARE NOT PURPORTED TO BE COMPLETE OR CORRECT. ANY DISCREPANCIES MUST BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH ANY AFFECTED PARTS OF WORK. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE ALL NECESSARY MEANS TO VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCING LAYOUTS OF PILES, PREPARATION OF SHOP DRAWING, ETC. THE FIRST SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS MUST CONTAIN CORRECT CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS OBTAINED FROM CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OBSERVATIONS AND MEASUREMENTS. IF CONDITIONS AND/OR DIMENSIONS VARY GREATLY FROM THOSE SHOWN, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD PRIOR TO THE PREPARATION OF SHOP DRAWINGS. COORDINATE ALL OTHER WORK WITH ALL DRAWINGS. ALL WORK SHALL BE DONE IN A MANNER THAT WILL NOT DAMAGE THE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION THAT ARE TO REMAIN. ERECTION AND SHORING: IT IS SOLEY THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO DETERMINE ERECTION AND SHORING PROCEDURES AND SEQUENCE TO ENSURE THE STABILITY OF THE BUILDING, SOIL EXCAVATIONS, AND ALL OTHER PROJECT COMPONENTS DURING CONSTRUCTION. THIS INCLUDES BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE ADDITION OF NECESSARY SHORING, SHEETING, & TEMPORARY BRACING. IT SHALL ALSO BE SOLELY THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROTECT ADJACENT STRUCTURES, EXISTING UTILITIES, ETC. FROM DAMAGE DURING CONSTRUCTION. FRAMING PENETRATIONS: CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE QUANTITY, SIZE, ANDLOCATION OF ALL COMPONENTS SHOWN WITHIN THE CONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND CIVIL DOCUMENTS, TO ENSURE THAT ALL SUBCONTRACTORS PERFORM THEIR RESPECTIVE SCOPE OF WORK TAKING EVERY PRECAUTION POSSIBLE TO AVOID CONFLICT WITH STRUCTURAL FRAMING SHOWN WITHIN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. UNAVOIDABLE FRAMING PENETRATIONS MAY OR MAY NOT APPEAR ON THE STRUCTURAL DOCUMENTS; CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. SEE TYPICAL DETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL REINFORCING REQUIREMENTS AT FRAMING PENETRATIONS. ANY PENETRATIONS THAT ARE NOT SHOWN ON CONTRACT DRAWINGS OR APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE MADE IN ANY FOUNDATION MEMBERS, FLOOR SLABS, CONCRETE BEAMS, ETC. WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. THE EXPENSE FOR ALL ADDITIONAL PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD COSTS, LABOR, FRAMING, REINFORCING, ETC. REQUIRED TO CORRECT AND/OR STRENGTHEN ANY AVOIDABLE FRAMING PENETRATIONS DUE TO THE LACK OF THE CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION OF THE OTHER COMPONENTS OF CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE BORE SOLELY BY THE CONTRACTOR. TYPICAL DETAILS: SECTIONS AND DETAILS LABELED AS "TYPICAL" OR "TYP." ANYWHERE ON THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SHALL APPLY TO ALL SITUATIONS THAT OCCUR ON THE PROJECT THAT ARE THE SAME AS OR SIMILAR TO THOSE SPECIFICALLY DETAILED. SUCH SECTIONS AND DETAILS SHALL APPLY WHETHER OR NOT THEY ARE CALLED-OUT AT EACH LOCATION. QUESTIONS REGARDING APPLICABILITY OF TYPICAL DETAILS SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD. SUBSTITUTIONS: ALL SUBSTITUTIONS FOR PRODUCTS AND/OR MATERIALS OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED WITHIN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SHALL BE SUBMITTED PRIOR TO FINAL BIDS BEING SUBMITTED. FINAL BIDS SHALL BE BASED ON PRODUCTS AND/OR MATERIALS SHOWN WITHIN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OR APPROVED PRIOR TO FINAL BID SUBMISSION. ANY SUBSTITUTIONS SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL AFTER FINAL BIDS HAVE BEEN SUBMITTED SHALL BE REVIEWED FOR EQUIVALENCE BY A CALIFORNIA LICENSED ENGINEER HIRED AND PAID FOR BY THE CONTRACTOR, A LETTER STAMPED AND SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER VERIFYING EQUIVALENCE SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR RECORD, AND ALL POST-BID APPROVED SUBSTITUTIONS SHALL RESULT IN A CREDIT TO THE OWNER. DISCREPANCIES: ALL DISCREPANCIES, CONFLICTS, AND/OR AMBIGUITIES WITHIN THECONTRACT DOCUMENTS, WHETHER WITHIN THE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS, OR BETWEEN THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD FOR CLARIFICATION PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BIDS. IF CLARIFICATION IS NOT GIVEN ON DISCREPANCIES, CONFLICTS, AND/OR AMBIGUITIES WITHIN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BIDS, INTERPRETATION WILL BE GIVEN DURING THE PROJECT SOLELY BY THE PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD. ANY COST INCURRED FROM INTERPRETATIONS OF DISCREPANCIES, CONFLICTS, AND/OR AMBIGUITIES SHALL BE BORE SOLEY BY THE CONTRACTOR. DAMAGE TO EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN: ALL WORK SHALL BE DONE IN A MANNER THAT WILL NOT DAMAGE ANY EXISTING CONSTRUCTION THAT IS TO REMAIN. ALL EXPENSES INCURRED FOR CORRECTIVE WORK TO REPAIR EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD SHALL BE BORE SOLELY BY THE CONTRACTOR. 2 FOUNDATION
3 CONCRETE
3 CONCRETE - CONTINUED REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT & CLEARANCES: ALL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE PLACED WITHIN THE MORE STRINGENT TOLERANCES SET FORTH IN ACI 318-14, ACI 350-06, ACI 117-10, AND THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS.
UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE ON THE SECTIONS AND/OR DETAILS, REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE PLACED SUCH THAT THERE IS MINIMUM A CLEAR SPACING BETWEEN BARS SHALL BE THE GREATER OF 1 1 2 IN., 1
1 2 x db (BAR DIAMETER), OR 4
3 TIMES THE MAXIMUM SIZE OF AGGREGATE. ADDITIONALLY, THE FOLLOWING CONCRETE COVER CLEARANCES SHALL BE PROVIDED THROUGHOUT THE PROJECT: SLAB: 1 1 2" CLEAR BOTTOM; 1
1 2" CLEAR TOP EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER
3 4" CLEAR TOP ALL OTHER. BEAMS: 3" CLEAR TO STIRRUPS BOTTOM EARTH FORMED, 3" CLEAR TO STIRRUPS SIDES EARTH FORMED, 1
1 2" CLEAR TO STIRRUPS TOP, 1
1 2" CLEAR TO STIRRUPS BOTTOM & SIDES BOARD FORMED, 2" CLEAR TO LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT BOTTOM & SIDES BOARD FORMED. FOOTINGS: 3" CLEAR TO STIRRUPS BOTTOM EARTH FORMED, 3" CLEAR TO STIRRUPS SIDES EARTH FORMED, 2" CLEAR TO STIRRUPS TOP, 2" CLEAR TOSTIRRUPS BOTTOM & SIDES BOARD FORMED, 2" CLEAR TO LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT BOTTOM & SIDES BOARD FORMED. COLUMNS: 1 1 2" CLEAR, TYPICAL. WALLS: 2" CLEAR EACH SIDE ALL OTHER, TYPICAL.
REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE OF ASTM A615 GRADE 60 DEFORMED BARS, FREE OF OIL, SCALE, AND RUST. REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE FABRICATED AND PLACED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TYPICAL BENDING DIAGRAM & PLACING DETAILS OF ACI, STANDARDS & SPECIFICATIONS OF THE LATEST REVISIONS. REINFORCING SHALL BE SECURED IN PLACE BY THE USE OF METAL TIES AND SUPPORTED BY METAL, BOLSTERS, CHAIRS, SPACERS, AND OTHER DEVICES. SUPPORTS FOR ELEVATED SLABS SHALL HAVE LEGS PROTECTED WITH PLASTIC. ALL MECHANICAL SPLICES SHALL COMPLY WITH ACI 318-14 REQUIREMENTS. BAR ENDS MUST BE TAPER THREADED WITH COUPLER MANUFACTER'S BAR THREADED TO ENSURE PROPER TAPER AND THREAD ENGAGEMENT. BARS SHALL BE TIGHTENED TO THE MANUFACTUERER'S RECOMMENDED WRENGH SETTING. MECHANICAL THREADED BAR SPLICES SHALL BE AS MANUFACTURED BY ERICO CONCRETE PRODUCTS OR AS APPROVED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. CONDUITS, SLEEVES, AND PIPES EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE: ALL PENETRATIONS NOT SPECIFICALLY SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR REQUIREMENTS OF CONDUITS, SLEEVES, AND PIPES EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR MUST COORDINATE ALL WORK TO FOLLOW THE ABOVE GUIDELINES AT HIS EXPENSE. TESTING & QUALITY ASSURANCE: SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS. THE TESTING LABORATORY SHALL SUBMIT DOCUMENTATION OF HAVING MET THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM E329, OF THE LATEST REVISION.
MINIMUM REQUIRED DEVELOPMENT, HOOK EMBED., LAP SPLICE, & HOOK LENGTHS FOR F'c OF 4000 PSI THRU 5000 KSI WITH 60 KSI REINFORCEMENT - U.N.O. (ALL LAP SPLICES SHALL BE CLASS B UNLESS SPECIFICALLY ALLOWED OTHERWISE) BAR SIZE DEVELOPMENT LENGTH (l ) HOOK EMBED (l ) LAP SPLICE LENGTH (l ) HOOK LENGTH LAP CLASS A LAP CLASS B TOP BARS OTHER BARS TOP BARS OTHER BARS TOP BARS OTHER BARS STD 90° HOOK 180° HOOK #3 1'-7" 1'-3" 8" 1'-7" 1'-3" 2'-0" 1'-7" 6" 5" #4 2'-1" 1'-7" 10" 2'-1" 1'-7" 2'-8" 2'-1" 8" 6" #5 2'-7" 2'-0" 1'-0" 2'-7" 2'-0" 3'-4" 2'-7" 10" 7" #6 3'-1" 2'-5" 1'-3" 3'-1" 2'-5" 4'-0" 3'-1" 1'-0" 8" #7 4'-6" 3'-6" 1'-5" 4'-6" 3'-6" 5'-10" 4'-6" 1'-2" 10" #8 5'-2" 4'-0" 1'-7" 5'-2" 4'-0" 6'-8" 5'-2" 1'-4" 11" #9 5'-10" 4'-6" 1'-10" 5'-10" 4'-6" 7'-7" 5'-10" 1'-7" 1'-3" d dh st
ldh THE FOUNDATION DESIGN IS BASED ON THE RECOMMENDATION OF THE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT TITLED “PROPOSED STRUCTURES AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FOR WELL NO. 22”, DATED JUNE 1, 2020 (CONVERSE PROJECT NO. 19-31-328-01) AND “ADDENDUM GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS”, DATED AUGUST 18, 2020. THE GEOTECHNICAL CONSULTANT FOR THIS PROJECT IS CONVERSE CONSULTANT LOCATED AT THE ADDRESS OF 3176 PULLMAN STREET, SUITE 108, COSTA MESA, CA 92626 AND MAY BE REACHED BY PHONE NUMBER OF (714) 444 9660. THE FOUNDATIONS FOR THE PROJECT SHALL CONSIST OF SPREAD FOOTINGS AND CAST-IN-DRILLED-HOLES (CIDH) PILE FOUNDATIONS. THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE REPORT SHALL BE FOLLOWED. GENERAL SITE CLEARING AREAS TO BE DEVELOPED SHALL BE CLEARED OF ALL SURFACE AND SUBSURFACE DELETERIOUS MATERIALS, INCLUDING DEBRIS, SHRUBS, ASSOCIATED ROOTS, ETC. CLEAN AND BACK FILL EXCAVATIONS EXTENDING BELOW THE PLANNED FINISHED SITE GRADES WITH SUITABLE MATERIAL COMPACTED TO THE RECOMMENDATIONS GIVEN BELOW. FOLLOWING CLEARING, STRIP THE SITE TO REMOVE SURFACE ORGANIC MATERIALS. STRIP ORGAINICS FROM THE GROUND SURFACE TO A DEPTH OF AT LEAST 2 TO 3 INCHES BELOW THE SURFACE. REMOVE STRIPPINGS FROM THE SITE OR USE THEM IN LANDSCAPE FILL, IF APPROVED. OVER EXCAVATION AND COMPACTION THE PROPOSED SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS SHALL REST ON EXISTING SOIL THAT IS PROPERLY PREPARED AS RECOMMENDED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. THE EXISTING SOIL SHALL BE OVER EXCAVATED TO A MINIMUM DEPTH OF 3 FEET BELOW THE BOTTOM OF THE FOUNDATIONS OR 6 FEET BELOW THE LOWEST ADJACENT GRADE AND EXTEND LATERALLY AT LEAST 5 FEET BEYOND THE FOOT PRINTS OF THE FOUNDATIONS. THE OVER EXCAVATION SHALL BE DEEPENED AS NEEDED TO REMOVE ANY EXISTING FILL AND ANY VERY SOFT OR SATURATED SOIL. THE BOTTOM OF THE FOUNDATIONS SHALL BE SCARIFIED TO A DEPTH OF 12 INCHES AND COMPACTED TO AT LEAST 90 PERCENT OF LABORATORY MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY AS DETERMINED BY ASTM D1557 TEST METHOD. THE SOIL SHALL BE MOISTURE CONDITIONED TO WITHIN 3 PERCENT OF OPTIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT FOR COARSE-GRAINED SOILS AND 0-2 PERCENT ABOVE OPTIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT FOR FINE-GRAINED SOILS. ALL FILL PLACED AT THE SITE SHALL BE COMPACTED TO AT LEAST 90 PERCENT OF THE LABORATORY MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY AS DETERMINED BY ASTM D1557 TEST METHOD. SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS 1. THE SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS ARE DESIGNED BASED ON AN ALLOWABLE NET VERTICAL BEARING PRESSURE OF 2,500 PSF, WITH A 300 PSF INCREASE FOR ADDITIONAL FOOT OF WIDTH TO A MAXIMUM VALUE OF 3,500 PSF. 2. THE BOTTOM OF THE FOOTING SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 18 INCHES BELOW THE LOWEST ADJACENT GRADE. 3. A COEFFICIENT OF FRICTION OF 0.35 CAN BE UTILIZED FOR LATERAL SLIDING RESISTANCE. 4. A PASSIVE PRESSURE OF 250 PCF CAN BE UTILIZED FOR STRUCTURES FOUNDED ON ENGINEERED FILL. THE PASSIVE PRESSURE CAN BE INCREASED BY 250 PSF PER ADDITIONAL FOOT OF DEPTH TO A MAXIMUM VALUE OF 2,000 PSF. WHEN PASSIVE PRESSURE AND FRICTION ARE COMBINED FOR LATERAL RESISTANCE, THE PASSIVE PRESSURE NEEDS TO BE REDUCED BY ONE-HALF. 5. A THIRD INCREASE OF THE BEARING CAPACITY AND PASSIVE RESISTANCE IS ALLOWED FOR WIND AND SEISMIC LOADS. CIDH PILES PILES SHALL BE INSTALLED PER THE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. THE PILE CAPACITIES BASED ON SKIN FRICTION FOR 3 DIAMETER CENTER TO CENTER SPACING ARE AS FOLLOWS: THE CAPACITIES CAN BE INCREASED BY A THIRD FOR WIND AND SEISMIC LOADS. INSPECTION, TESTING & QUALITY ASSURANCE DURING GRADING ACTIVITIES, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONSULT WITH THE PROJECT GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING FIRM FOR ADDITIONAL RECOMMENDATIONS TO ADDRESS SITE-SPECIFIC CONDITIONS AND IF UNSATISFACTORY SOIL CONDITIONS ARE ENCOUNTERED. ALLOWABLE AXIAL CIDH PILE CPACITIES (24-IN DIAMETER) PILE DEPTH (FEET) COMPRESSION (KIPS) TENSION (KIPS) 10 4.96 4.83 15 14.65 11.37 20 28.24 20.14 ALLOWABLE LATERAL PILE CPACITY (24-IN DIAMETER) PILE HEAD CONDITION PILE HEAD DEFLECTION (INCHES) MAXIMUM SHEAR (KIPS) MAX. BENDING MOMENT (KIP-FT) DEPTH TO MAX. BENDING MOMENT (FT, BELOW PILE HEAD) FREE 1 2 57.5 249.2 7.4 ALL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, FORMWORK, AND CONCRETE REINFORCING SHALL BE PERFORMED IN CONFORMANCE WITH SPECIFICATION 03300. ALL STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR BUILDING FOUNDATIONS, CIDH PILES, FOOTINGS, WALLS, BEAMS, SLABS, ETC. SHALL BE A READY-MIX CONCRETE OF NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATES ABLE TO ACHIEVE A 28 DAY STRENGTH OF 4,000 PSI WITH A WATER-TO-CEMENT RATIO NOT EXCEEDING 0.45. ALL STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR TANK FOUNDATIONS, FOOTINGS, WALLS, BEAMS, SLABS, ETC. SHALL BE A READY-MIX CONCRETE OF NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATES ABLE TO ACHIEVE A 28 DAY STRENGTH OF 4,500 PSI WITH A WATER-TO-CEMENT RATIO NOT EXCEEDING 0.42. THE MIX DESIGN SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO A RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY FOR APPROVAL. PROPOSED MIX DESIGN SHALL BE UNIQUELY IDENTIFIED BY A MIX NUMBER OR OTHER POSITIVE MEANS. MIX DESIGN AND VERTIFYING TEST REPORTS, PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 214 & ACI 318 OF THE LATEST REVISIONS, SHALL BE SUBMITTED AT LEAST 5 DAYS PRIOR TO USE. CALCIUM CHLORIDE SHALL NOT BE UTILIZED, OTHER ADMIXTURES MAY ONLY BE UTILIZED WITH THE APPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. ALL CONCRETE WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM STANDARD C94 FOR THE MEASURING, MIXING, TRANSPORTING, ETC. CONCRETE TICKETS SHALL BE TIME STAMPED WHEN THE CONCRETE IS BATCHED. THE MAXIMUM TIME ALLOWED FROM THE TIME MIXING WATER IS ADDED TO THE TIME THE CONRETE IS DEPOSITED, SHALL NOT EXCEED ONE AND ONE HALF HOURS. IT SHALL BE THE DUTY OF THE TESTING LAB TO NOTIFY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE AND THE CONTRACTOR OF ANY NONCOMPLIANCE WITH THE ABOVE. NO HORIZONTAL JOINTS SHALL BE PERMITTED. VERTICAL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS IN FLOORS SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN THE MIDDLE THIRD OF SPANS OF SLABS, BEAMS, AND GIRDERS. JOINTS IN GIRDERS SHALL BE OFFSET A MINIMUM DISTANCE OF TWO TIMES THE WIDTH OF INTERSECTING BEAMS. A POUR SEQUENCE SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW. ALL VERTICAL CONCRETE SURFACES SHOWN ON THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SHALL BE BOARD FORMED. DESIGN, ERECTION, AND REMOVAL OF ALL FORMWORK, SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN ACI STANDARDS 301 AND 347. VAPOR BARRIER: PROVIDE A 15 MIL VAPOR RETARDER, CONFORMING TO ASTM E1745 CLASS A, ON TOP OF FILL UNDER ALL SLABS AND BEAMS. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. OMIT AT ALL PENETRATIONS AND SEAL AT PENETRATIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. VAPOR BARRIER SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS.-TYPICAL. REINFORCEMENT DETAILING: DETAILING OF CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 315 STANDARD, OF THE LASTEST REVISION. A STANDARD HOOK SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE TERMINATION OF ALL BEAM TOP REINFORCING BARS AND WHERE A HOOK IS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, BUT A SPECIFIC DIMENSION IS NOT GIVEN. ROTATE HOOKED END OF BARS AS NEEDED TO FIT WITHIN THE LIMITATION OF THE CONCRETE DIMENSIONS AND REQUIRED CLEARANCES; DO NOT CUT LENGTH OF HOOK. DETAILING AND PLACEMENT OF ALL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE BASED ON A MEMBER SPAN OF CENTER-OF-SUPPORT TO CENTER-OF-SUPPORT; THIS INCLUDES THE CENTER OF FOOTINGS AS THE CENTER-OF-SUPPORT. CONTINUOUS TOP BARS SHALL BE HOOKED AT NON-CONTINUOUS ENDS AND LAPPED 30 BAR DIAMETERS AT MID-SPAN. BOTTOM BARS SHALL LAP 9" AT CENTER OF INTERIOR SUPPORTS AND EXTEND 5" PAST CENTER-OF-SUPPORT AT NON-CONTINUOUS SUPPORTS. AT TEMPERATURE REINFORCEMENT, INTERMEDIATE HORIZONTAL BARS IN WALLS AND BEAMS, AND WHERE CONTINUOUS (CONT.) REINFORCEMENT IS CALLED FOR, A FULL TENSION LAP SPLICE SHALL BE PROVIDED AT SPLICES; SEE TABLE BELOW FOR REQUIRED LAP LENGTH. CORNER BARS WITH FULL TENSION LAPS, MATCHING CONTINUOUS BARS SIZE AND SPACING SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALL LONGITUDINAL BEAM REINFORCEMENT AND FOR ALL HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCEMENT. ALL BEAM STIRRUPS AND COLUMN TIES SHALL CONFORM TO SEISMIC DETAILING REQUIREMENTS. MINIMUM REQUIRED DEVELOPMENT, LAP SPLICE, HOOK LENGTHS, & HOOK EMBEDMENT ARE THE FOLLOWING TABLE. ALL REINFORCEMENT LAP SPLICES SHALL BE FULL CLASS B LAP SPLICE LENGTH UNLESS SPECIFICALLY ALLOWED OTHERWISE-TYPICAL. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH AND LAP SPLICES FOR ALL VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT IN WALLS SHALL BE 1.25 TIMES THE APPROPRIATE LENGTHS GIVEN IN THE TABLE BELOW.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - S.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-S1.0 STRUCTURAL NOTES.dwg - Tab: STRUCTURAL NOTES - by rching on 09/22/21 at 10:45:33 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS
17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com
Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 S.B.S R.C. S.B.S SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 STRUCTURAL NOTES S1.0 24 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK SHALL BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH SPECIFICATION 05120. GENERAL: ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN HAS BEEN PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LRFD DESIGN METHODOLOGY SET FORTH IN AISC 360-10. ALL STEEL THAT IS NOT FIREPROOFED SHALL RECEIVE A RUST PREVENTATIVE PRIMER COATING. COORDINATE ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL FIREPROOFING REQUIREMENTS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DOCUMENTS. ALL FABRICATION AND ERECTION SHALL CONFORM TO THE AISC 303-10 "CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES". STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES: THE FOLLOWING STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES SHALL CONFORM TO THE RESPECTIVE ASTM UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFICALLY INDICATED ELSEWHERE: STEEL WIDE-FLANGE SHAPES ASTM A992, GRADE 50 HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTIONS (HSS) ASTM A1085 STEEL PIPE ASTM A53, GRADE B OTHER STRUCTURAL SHAPES ASTM A36 STEEL PLATES ASTM A572, GRADE 50 CONNECTIONS: ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL CONNECTION ELEMENTS SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING RESPECTIVE SPECIFICATION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFICALLY INDICATED ELSEWHERE: BOLTS (HEADED) ASTM A325 OR ASTM F1852, TYPE 1 THREADED RODS ASTM A193, B7 ANCHOR RODS ASTM F1554, GRADE 55, SUPPLEMENT S1 NUTS ASTM A563, HEAVY HEX GRADE DH WASHERS ASTM F436, GRADE 1 WELD FILLER METALS E-70 MEETING AWS D1.1 & AWS 1.8 CLAUSE 6.3 AEWSC ASTM A29, GRADE 1010-1020 (Fy=51 KSI (MIN) & Fu=65 KSI (MIN)) LENGTH OF THREADED PORTION OF ALL BOLTS SHALL BE SUCH THAT THREADS DO NOT OCCUR IN THE SHEAR PLANE. ALL FIELD BOLTED CONNECTIONS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A325 AND BE 3 4" (MIN.) DIAMETER U.N.O. ALL BOLT HOLES SHALL BE STANDARD SIZE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. AUTOMATICALLY END WELDED SHEAR CONNECTORS (A.E.W.S.C.), OR SHEAR-STUD CONNECTORS, SHALL BE TYPE B AND MADE FROM ASTM A29 GRADES 1010 THROUGH 1020 MATERIAL, IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI/AWS D1.1, WITH A MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH OF 51 KSI AND MINIMUM TENSILE STRENGTH OF 65 KSI. ALL WELDED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS DEMAND CRITICAL AND SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM 316" FILLET WELD UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL WELDS SHALL BE MADE WITH E-70 ELECTRODES. WHEREVER MEMBERS ARE IN CONTACT WITH EACH OTHER AND A STRENGTH WELD IS NOT REQUIRED, THE JOINT SHALL BE SEALED WITH A FILLET WELD AS FOLLOWS. THE SIZE OF THE FILLET WELD TO BE PROVIDED WILL DEPEND ON THE THICKNESS OF THE THINNER PART JOINED AS FOLLOW: LESS THAN EQUAL TO 1 4" SHALL RECEIVE 1
8" FILLET WELD, OVER 1
4" TO 1
2" SHALL RECEIVE 316" FILLET WELD, OVER 1
2" TO 3
4" SHALL RECEIVE 1
4" FILLET WELD, AND OVER 3
4" SHALL RECEIVE 516" FILLET WELD. ALL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DETAILED FOR THE APPLICABLE SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY REQUIREMENTS AND THE SEISMIC FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM (SFRS) IN ACCORDANCE WITH AISC 341-10 AND AISC 358-10. CORNERS OF CONTINUITY PLATES AND STIFFENERS PLACED IN THE WEBS OF ROLLED SHAPES SHALL BE DETAILED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWS D1.8 CLAUSE 4.1. SEE GENERAL NOTE TITLED "DESIGN LOADS & OTHER DESIGN INFORMATION" FOR ADDITIONAL LOADING CHARACTERISTICS. GALVANIZING: ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES, PLATES, AND ALL MISCELLANEOUS
METAL ITEMS, AND CONNECTORS EXPOSED TO WEATHER OR MOISTURE, WHICH INCLUDES ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL THAT IS NOT ENCLOSED WITHIN A WATERTIGHT AND/OR CONDITIONED SPACE, AND ALL STEEL THAT IS INDICATED TO BE HOT-DIP
GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION (HDGAF) ON CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION (HDGAF). ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL TOBE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION (HDGAF) SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A123 AFTER FABRICATION, INCLUDING ALL SHOP WELDING AND DRILLING HAS BEEN COMPLETED. BOLT HOLES SHALL BE INCREASED AS NEEDED TO ACCOUNT FOR THE THICKNESS OF GALVANIZING. WELDING OF ALL GALVANIZED STEEL SHALL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS OF AWS D19.0. ALL DAMAGED GALVANIZED COATINGS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO DAMAGE DUE TO WELDING, SHALL BE REPAIRED WITH ZINC-BASED SOLDER (STICK GALVANIZING) IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A780. ALL FASTENERS JOINING AND/OR CONNECTING HOT-DIP GALVANIZED STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BOLTS, ANCHOR RODS, NUTS, WASHERS, & EMBEDDED PLATES, ARE TO BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A153. ALL DAMAGED COATING, INCLUDING DAMAGE DUE TO WELDING, SHALL BE REPAIRED WITH ZINC BASED SOLDER, OR STICK GALVANIZING, IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A780. TESTING & QUALITY ASSURANCE: WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS (WPSs) SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL. AS A MINIUMUM, THE INSPECTION SERVICE SHALL REVIEW THE WELDER'S QUALIFICATIONS AND CHECK ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL CONNECTIONS IN THE FIELD. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. 5 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)
5 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) - CONTINUED
8 ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE & MASONRY MINIMUM REQUIRED LAP SPLICE LENGTH TABEL FOR 60 KSI REINFORCEMENT IN MASONRY BAR SIZE 8" SMU BLOCK SINGLE REINFORCEMENT DOUBLE REINFORCEMENT #4 1'-9" 2'-0" #5 2'-2" 3'-2" #6 3'-7" 4'-6" #7 5'-0" 5'-3" #8 6'-0" NP 7 METAL ROOF DECK
S GENERAL: CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE EVERY PRECAUTION NECESSARY TO ENSURE THAT ANCHORS ARE ACCURATELY PLACED AND DO NOT CONFLICT WITH ANY STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. ANY STEEL MEMBERS THAT ARE TO BE ATTACHED TO MASONRY OR HARDENED CONCRETE SHALL BE FABRICATED FROM A FIELD DETERMINED TEMPLATE FOR THE LAYOUT OF CAST-IN-PLACE AND POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS. DURING THE INSTALLATION OF ALL POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS INTO MASONRY AND HARDENED CONCRETE, CONTRACTOR SHALL EXERCISE CARE TO ENSURE THAT NO EXISTING CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCEMENT IS NICK OR CUT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE EXISTING REINFORCEMENT BY MEANS OF SMALL DRILLED PILOT HOLES, OR OTHER APPROVED NON-DESTRUCTIVE MEANS, THEN DETERMINE THE LAYOUT OF THE POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS. POST-INSTALLED ANCHOR INSTALLATION TRAINING: ALL POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S PRINTED INSTATLLATION INSTRUCTIONS (MPII). PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE INSTALLATION OF ANY POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE MANUFACTURER OF THE POST-INSTALLED ANCHORING SYSTEM BEING USED. A REPRESENTATIVE FROM THE ANCHORING SYSTEM MANUFACTURER SHALL BE HIRED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL OF THE NECESSARY ON-SITE TRAINING AND/OR GUIDANCE TO ENSURE THE PROPER INSTALLATION OF THEIR PRODUCTS. ALL HOLES SHALL BE CLEANED WITH COMPRESSED AIR AND WIRE BRUSHED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. ONLY PERSONNEL WITH ACI ANCHOR INSTALLOR CERTIFICATION SHALL INSTALL POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS. AT THE PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD'S OPTION, PERSONNEL WITH ADEQUATE TRAINING MAY BE ALLOWED INSTALL POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS IF SUFFICIENT DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED. SEE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. ANCHOR TYPES: ALL CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHORS SHALL BE HEADED BOLTS OR THREADED RODS WITH A NUT WELDED NEAR THE LOWER SECTION OF THE ROD. POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS SHALL INCLUDE ALL WEDGE TYPE ANCHORS, ALL ADHESIVE SET TYPE ANCHORS, AND OTHER TYPES OF POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS THAT REQUIRE DRILLING INTO GROUTED AND HOLLOW MASONRY AND THE CONCRETE AFTER IT HAS HARDENED. INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS INTO CONCRETE: 1. CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHORAGE IN CONCRETE: A. MATERIALS: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ANCHORS SHALL CONSIST OF ASTM A193, B7 THREADED RODS, ASTM A563, HEAVY HEX GRADE DH NUTS, AND ASTM F436, GRADE 1 WASHERS. B. INSTALLATION: THE TOLERANCES FOR THE PLACEMENT OF EMBEDDED ITEMS SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 7.5, ENTITLED “INSTALLATION OF ANCHOR BOLTS, FOUNDATION BOLTS, AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS”, OF AISC 303-10, ENTITLED “CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES". 2. POST-INSTALLED ADHESIVE ANCHORAGE INTO CONCRETE: A. MATERIALS: POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORS SHALL BE ASTM A193, B7 THREADED RODS, ASTM A563, HEAVY HEX GRADE DH NUTS, AND ASTM F436, GRADE 1 WASHERS. B. INSTALLATION: ALL HOLES SHALL BE MADE ONLY WITH A HAMMER DRILL WITH A CARBIDE BIT; HOLES SHALL NOT BE MADE WITH A CORE DRILL. ALL HOLES SHALL BE CLEANED WITH COMPRESSED AIR AND WIRE BRUSHED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. INSTALLATION OF POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS INTO THE CMU BLOCK WALLS: THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE SHALL BE FOLLOWED WHEN INSTALLING POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS INTO THE CMU BLOCK WALLS. 1. CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHORS IN GROUTED CMU BLOCK: A. MATERIALS: CAST-IN-PLACE MASONRY ANCHORS SHALL CONSIST OF ASTM A307, GRADE A BOLTS WITH ASTM A563A, HEX NUTS, AND ASTM F844 WASHERS. B. INSTALLATION: WHERE ANCHOR PROTRUDES FROM SIDE FACE OF MASONRY FACE SHELL, THE FACE SHELL OF THE MASONRY UNIT WALL SHALL HAVE A HOLE CORED OR DRILLED THAT ALLOWS FOR 1 INCH CLEAR OF GROUT ALL AROUND THE ANCHOR BOLT, SUCH THAT DIAMETER OF HOLE SHALL BE 2" + BOLT DIAMETER. THE MINIMUM CLEAR DIMENSION FROM THE END OF THE HEADED ANCHOR BOLT TO THE INSIDE FACE OF THE SHELL SHALL BE 1 2". 2. POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS INTO CMU BLOCK: A. MATERIALS: ALL THREADED ROD ANCHORS SHALL BE CUT FROM ASTM F593, GROUP 1 STAINLESS STEEL THREADED ROD, CUT TO THE REQUIRED LENGTH, WITH A SQUARE END INSERTED INTO BLOCK. SET RODS WITH HILTI HIT-HY 70 ADHESIVE SYSTEM. ONCE THE APPLICABLE CURE TIME HAS ELAPSED, APPLY A MAXIMUM INSTALLATION TORQUE OF 10 FT. LBS.
THREADED RODS SHALL BE FREE OF OILS, SCALES, AND RUST. B. GROUTED MASONRY INSTALLATION: POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS INSTALLED INTO GROUTED MASONRY SHALL HAVE AN EMBEDDMENT DEPTH OF 6 3 4"-TYPICAL. FOLLOW ALL MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS. C. NON-GROUTED MASONRY INSTALLATION: POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS INSTALLED INTO NON-GROUTED MASONRY SHALL HAVE AN EMBEDDMENT DEPTH OF 2" INTO CMU WITH STAINLESS STEEL SCREEN TUBES. PROVIDE 3 4"x8" STAINLESS STEEL SCREEN TUBES THAT SHALL BE MODIFIED AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE THE REQUIRED LENGTH FOR A 2" EMBEDDMENT PAST THE FACE SHELL INTO CMU BLOCK. PROVIDE A FLANGE AT THE OPENING OF THE MODIFIED SCREEN TUBE FROM THE PORTION OF THE 3 4"x8" SCREEN TUBE THAT WAS MODIFIED. FOLLOW ALL MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS. WHEN DRILLING HOLES INTO NON-GROUTED MASONRY CELLS, CARE SHALL BE EXERCISED SO AS TO NOT BLOWOUT INNER FACE OF MASONRY CELL WALL. THIS CAN BE ACHIEVED BY DECREASING OR ELIMINATING THE HAMMERING FUNCTION OF THE DRILL MIDWAY THROUGH THE BLOCK FACE. AS AN ALTERNATIVE WHEN DRILLING INTO NON-GROUTED MASONRY, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONSIDER CORE DRILL.
ALL MASONRY WORK SHALL BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH SPECIFICATION 04200, UNIT MASONRY. GENERAL: ALL CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT (CMU) CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE "SPECIFICATION FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES", TMS 602-13/ACI 530.1-13/ASCE 6-13. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL DOCUMENTS FOR OTHER REQUIREMENTS OF MASONRY CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPLIT FACE BLOCK, JOINTTREATMENT, BLOCK SURFACE COLORS AND FINISHES, ADD MIXTURES IN CMU BLOCK, ETC. MASONRY: ALL CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT (CMU) CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORMTO THE ASTM C90, CBC 2019 SECTION 2103.1, AND ARTICLE 2.3 OF THE "SPECIFICATION FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES", TMS 602-13/ACI 530.1-13/ASCE 6-13.
CMU SHALL BE EITHER DOULE CELL (CLOSED-END) OR OPEN-END. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM AVERAGE NET-AREA COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH, f' m, OF 1900 PSI, WITH NO INDIVIDUAL UNIT FALLING BELOW 1700 PSI. ALL CMU SHALL BE LAID IN RUNNING BOND. MORTAR: MORTAR SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C270, TYPE S BY PROPORTION, CBC 2019 SECTION 2103.2, AND ARTICLES 2.1 AND 2.6-A OF THE "SPECIFICATION FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES", TMS 602-13/ACI 530.1-13/ASCE 6-13. ONLY TYPE S PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR SHALL BE USED. MORTAR FINS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM ALL CELLS THAT ARE TO BE GROUTED. ALL CMU SHALL HAVE FULL MORTAR BED JOINTS AND FULL MORTAR HEAD JOINTS. THICKNESS OF BED JOINTS SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 8". GROUT: GROUT SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C476 COURSE GROUT, CBC 2019 SECTION 2103.3, AND ARTICLE 2.2 OF THE "SPECIFICATION FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES", TMS 602-13/ACI 530.1-13/ASCE 6-13. GROUT SHALL HAVE A SLUMP OF 10 TO 11 INCHES, AS DETERMINED BY ASTM C143, AS "CORE-FILL GROUT-COURSE" AS MANUFACTURED BY QUIKRETE OR AN APPROVED EQUAL. GROUT SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH, f'g, OF 2500 PSI AT 28 DAYS, BUT NOT TO EXCEED 5000 PSI. AGGREGATESFOR GROUT MUST COMPLY WITH ASTM C404. ALL REINFORCED CELLS, AND ALL CELLS THAT ARE SHOWN TO HAVE ANCHORS, EMBEDS PLATES, ETC., SHALL BE FILLED SOLID FULL HEIGHT WITH PEA GRAVEL GROUT. GROUT SHALL BE SAMPLED AND TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C1019. THE GROUT SHALL BE PLACED IN LIFTS THAT ARE NOT TO EXCEED 5 FT. MASONRY SHALL CURE FOR A MINIMUM OF 4 HOURS PRIOR TO PLACING GROUT. STOP THE LEVEL OF GROUT AT LEAST 2", BUT NOT MORE THAN 4", BELOW THE TOP OF A MORTAR JOINT. IF THE HEIGHT OF WALL CONSTRUCTED PRIOR TO PLACING ANY GROUT EXCEEDS 5'-0", 4"x4" CLEANOUTS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE BASE OF ALL GROUTED CELLS. HEIGHT OF CMU WALL CONSTRUCTED PRIOR TO PLACING GROUT SHALL NOT EXCEED 12'-8". GROUT SHALL BE CONSOLIDATED (VIBRATED) AND RECONSOLIDATED, TO COMPLETELY FILL VOIDS AND BOND TO THE MASONRY SURFACES. PARTICULAR ATTENTION SHALL BE GIVEN TO GROUT CONSOLIDATION AT EMBEDDED CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHORS. REINFORCEMENT: STEEL REINFORCING SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A615 GRADE 60 DEFORMED BARS, CBC 2019 SECTION 2103.4, AND ARTICLE 2.4 OF THE "SPECIFICATION FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES", TMS 602-13/ACI 530.1-13/ASCE 6-13. ALL STEELREINFORCING SHALL BE FREE OF OIL, SCALE, AND RUST. CORNER BARS WITH FULL TENSION LAPS, MATCHING CONTINUOUS BARS SIZE AND SPACING, SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALL LONGITUDINAL "U"-BLOCK REINFORCEMENT AND FOR ALL HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCEMENT. LAP SPLICE LENGTHS OF REINFORCING BARS SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING TABLE: EMBEDDMENT AND SPLICE TABLE NOTES: IF THE COVER OR EDGE IS LESS THAN 1 BAR DIAMETER OR THE CENTER-TO-CENTER LATERAL BAR SPACING IS LESS THAN 3 DIAMETERS, SEE TMS 402/ACI 530 FOR APPROPRIATE GUIDANCE. JOINT REINFORCEMENT: HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE PREFABRICATED FOR EMBEDMENT IN HORIZONTAL MORTAR JOINTS OF MASONRY, MANUFACTURED AND WELDED IN 10 FOOT LENGTHS FROM COLD-DRAWN STEEL WIRE CONFORMING WITH ASTM A82. JOINT REINFORCING STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A951 AND ACI/ASCE 530, AND BE FREE OF OIL, SCALE, AND RUST. PREFABRICATED CORNERS AND TEES ARE REQUIRED FOR EACH TYPE OF WALL REINFORCING. JOINT REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE LAPPED 8" MINIMUM AT SPLICES. REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT: THE CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN PARALLEL BARS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN THE NOMINAL DIAMETER OF THE BARS, NOR LESS THAN 1 INCH. A MINIMUM CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN REINFORCING BARS AND THE INTERIOR SURFACE OF MASONRY CELLS OF 1 2 IN. SHALL BE MAINTAINED. REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE PLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING MASONRY COVER CLEARANCES, WITHIN THE TOLERANCES SET FORTH IN TMS 402/ACI 530, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE ON THE SECTIONS & DETAILS. REINFORCING BARS SHALL HAVE A MASONRY COVER NOT LESS THAN: MASONRY FACES EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER: FOR BARS LARGER THAN NO. 5: 2" CLEAR FOR NO. 5 BARS OR SMALLER: 1 1 2" CLEAR MASONRY FACES NOT EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER: FOR ALL BARS: 1 1 2" CLEAR REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT TOLERANCE: TOLERANCE FOR THE PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT STEEL IN WALLS AND FLEXURAL ELEMENTS SHALL BE ± 1 2", WHICH SHALL BE ACHIEVED WITH ADEQUATELY SPACED BAR POSITIONERS. TESTING & QUALITY ASSURANCE: ALL SAMPLING AND TESTING OF GROUT SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C1019. ALL SAMPLING AND TESTING OF MORTAR SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C780. PROVIDE AN INSPECTION HOLE AT THE BOTTOM OF EACH CELL FOR EACH LIFT TO ALLOW VISUAL INSPECTION AND TO REMOVE MORTAR DROPPING PRIOR TO GROUTING. TESTING LABORATORY SHALL INSPECT EACH CELL PRIOR TO AND DURING GROUTING. ALL METAL ROOF DECK WORK SHALL BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH SPECIFICATION 05313, STEEL ROOF DECK. DECKING MATERIAL: THE METAL ROOF DECK SHALL CONSIST OF TYPE B G90 GALVANIZED 1 1 2" DEEP 18 GAGE DECK, AS TYPE HSB-36 AS MANUFACTURED BY VERCO DECKING, INC. OR PRIOR APPROVED EQUAL. THIS DECK SHALL BE CONTINUOUS FOR 3 OR MORE SPANS. THE DECK SHALL HAVE A GALVANIZED G90 PROTECTIVE COATING IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A653. ALL DAMAGED COATING, INCLUDING DAMAGED COATING DUE TO WELDS, SHALL BE REPAIRED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A780. THIS DECK SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM PROPERTIES: YIELD STRENGTH (MIN.), Fy: 50 KSI TENSILE STRENGTH (MIN.), Fu: 62 KSI
DESIGN THICKNESS: 0.0478 IN (18 GAGE)EFFECTIVE MOMENT OF INERTIA, I+ : 0.302 IN 4/FT EFFECTIVEMOMENT OF INERTIA, I- : 0.306 IN
4/FT SECTION MODULUS (POSITIVE), Sp: 0.314 IN
3/FT SECTION MODULUS (NEGATIVE), Sn: 0.331 IN
3/FT SUPPORTS AND FASTENERS: METAL DECK SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM EXTERIOR/END SUPPORT BEARING LENGTH OF 2" AND A MINIMUM INTERIOR SUPPORT BEARING LENGTH OF 3". METAL DECK SHALL BE LAID OUT SUCH THAT ONLY A MAXIMUM OF TWO THICKNESS OF THE METAL SHALL LAP. METAL DECK SHALL BE ATTACHED TO THE SUPPORTING STEEL FRAMING WITH THE FOLLOWING FASTENERS: BASE STEEL MATERIAL THICKNESS (t ) FASTENER DESCRIPTION LIGHT GAGE FRAMING 20 GA < t S <= 10 GA SCREW: #12-14x
3 4" HWH, TEKS/3 TIPS "TEKS" STRUCTURAL STEEL: WELD: 3
4"Ø ARC SPOT WELD (PUDDLE WELD)
THE DIAMETER OF THE ARC SPOT WELDS (PUDDLE WELDS) SPECIFIED IS THE REQUIRED MINIMUM EFFECTIVE DIAMETER (de). ARC SPOT WELDS (PUDDLE WELDS) SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM VISIBLE DIAMETER (d) OF 1.82 x MINIMUM REQUIRED EFFECTIVE DIAMETER, WHERE d IS THE VISIBLE DIAMETER OF THE OUTER SURFACE OF THE ARCH SPOT WELD. FASTENERS SHALL BE SPACED AND INSTALLED IN 36/7 PATTERN (7 FASTENERS PER 36".
IN ADDITION THE THE SPACING REQUIREMENTS ABOVE, AT ALL SUPPORTING
MEMBERS, SUPPORTING INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR CMU WALLS WITH EMBEDDED PLATES, ANGLES, ETC., AND AT PERIMETER STEEL FRAMING WHERE SIDELAPS OCCUR, FASTENERS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT 6" O.C. MAX. THE DISTANCE FROM THE CENTERLINE OF AN ARC SPOT WELD TO THE END OR EDGE OF THE CONNECTED MEMBER SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 1.5". IN NO CASE SHALL THE CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN WELDS AND THE END OF EDGE OF THE MEMBER BE LESS THAN 1.0". ALL MEMBERS INDICATED TO TRANSFER SHEAR TO SUPPORTING WALLS SHALL BE FASTENED PER ZONE 3 PATTERN SHALL ALSO APPLY TO ALL DECK FASTENING WITHIN AN "a" DISTANCE FROM BOTH SIDE OF SHEAR TRANSFER MEMBER. SIDELAPS FASTENERS: THE SIDELAPS SHALL BE FASTENED WITH #10-16x 3 4" HWH, TEKS/3 TIP "TEKS" SCREWS AT 6" O.C. MAX FOR EACH SPAN. ALL SCREWS SHALL BE SELF-DRILLING "TEKS" WITH A "CLIMASEAL" FINISH AS MANUFACTURED BY ITW BUILDEX OR AN APPROVED EQUAL.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - S.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-S1.1 STRUCTURAL NOTES.dwg - Tab: STRUCTURAL NOTES - by rching on 06/18/21 at 8:59:32 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS
17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com
Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 S.B.S R.C. S.B.S SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 STRUCTURAL NOTES S1.1 25 9 INSPECTION & TESTING SERVICES 10 EQUIPMENT SIZE, WEIGHTS, & ANCHORAGE
THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT ACTUAL SIZE, SUPPORT SPACING, &
WEIGHT, INCLUDING WEIGHTS OF ANY INERTIA BASE, OF ALL MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING TANKS, TO BE USED IN THE PROJECT TO THE PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD AND SUBCONTRACTORS FOR VERIFICATION OF LOADS USED IN THE DESIGN, AND SHALL REPORT ANY CHANGES IN LOCATION, NUMBER OFPIECES, AND WEIGHTS OF EQUIPMENT AS SHOWN ON MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS AT LEAST TWO WEEKS PRIOR TO FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE SUPPORTING STRUCTURE COMPONENTS. ALL EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM ADEQUATE CAPACITY TO RESIST THE BASE SHEAR FORCES LISTED IN THE GENERAL NOTE ENTITLED "DESIGN LOADS & OTHER DESIGN INFORMATION". MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: PRIOR TO THE DETAILING OF ANY STRUCTURAL MATERIALS INVOLVED IN THE SUPPORT OF ANY EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO MECHANICAL ANDELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH THE PROFESSIONAL OFRECORD ALL INFORMATION RELATIVE TO LOADS, LOAD POINTS, DIMENSIONS, ETC. OF THE ACTUAL EQUIPMENT WHICH IS TO BE FURNISHED FOR THE PROJECT. ALL DETAILS AND MEMBERS SIZES SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ARE TENTATIVE UNTIL SUCH TIME THAT THIS INFORMATION IS REVIEWED BY THE PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD. LOCATION OF SUPPORT BEAMS FOR ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, PIPING, ETC. MUST BE COORDINATED WITH SIZE AND LOCATION OF THE ACTUAL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR. EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE: ALL EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE SHALL BE A DEFERRED SUBMITTAL BY THE CONTRACTOR. ANCHORAGE OF ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE DESIGNED BY A REGISTERED CIVIL ENGINEER LICENSED TO PRACTICE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA, COMMISSIONED AND PAID FOR BY THE CONTRACTOR. ALL DEFERRED EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS SHALL BEAR THE DESIGNING ENIGINEER'S SEAL AND SIGNATURE. ALL ANCHORAGE COMPONENTS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL THE NECESSARY ANCHORAGE SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO SUITE THE SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT THAT IS TO BE PROVIDED FOR THE PROJECT. EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE ON HOUSEKEEPING PAD: WHERE ANCHORING EQUIPMENT ON A CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD, ANCHORS SHALL EXTEND THROUGH ENTIRE THICKNESS OF PAD AND ADEQUATE EMBEDMENT INTO UNDERLYING SLAB SHALL BE ACHIEVED. ANCHOR EMBEDMENT SHALL BE MEASURED FROM THE TOP OF THE MAIN SLAB, NOT FROM THE TOP OF THE PAD. OWNER SHALL SELECT AND PAY FOR THE SERVICES OF AN INDEPENDENT INSPECTION & TESTING LABORATORY TO PERFORM THE TASKS LISTED UNDER THE "INSPECTION, TESTING, & QUALITY ASSURANCE" SECTION OF EACH OF THE ACCOMPANYING GENERAL NOTES AND ALL TASKS LISTED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS: SPECIAL INSPECTIONS SHALL BE PERFORMED FOR THE FOLLOWING ASPECTS OF THE PROJECT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS OF CBC 2019: CONSTRUCTION TYPE CODE SECTION 1. STRUCTURAL STEEL 1705.2 & 1705.12.1 2. CONCRETE 1705.3 3. REINFORCED MASONRY 1705.4 4. METAL ROOF DECK 1705.2.2.1 5. SOIL 1705.6 6. POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION REPORTING REQUIREMENTS: SPECIAL INSPECTORS SHALL KEEP RECORDS OF INSPECTIONS. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL FURNISH INSPECTION REPORTS TO THE BUILDING OFFICIAL, AND TO THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE. REPORTS SHALL INCLUDE THAT WORK INSPECTED WAS OR WAS NOT COMPLETED IN CONFORMANCE TO APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION OF THE CONTRACTOR FOR CORRECTION. IF THEY ARE NOT CORRECTED, THE DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE BUILDING OFFICIAL AND TO THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE PRIOR TO THE COMPLETION OF THAT PHASE OF THE WORK. A FINAL REPORT DOCUMENTING REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND CORRECTIONS OF ANY DISCREPANCIES NOTED IN THE INSPECTIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED AT A POINT IN TIME AGREED UPON PRIOR TO THE START OF WORK BY THE APPLICANT AND THE BUILDING OFFICIAL. 9 INSPECTION & TESTING SERVICES - CONTINUED
9 INSPECTION & TESTING SERVICES - CONTINUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 17 OF THE 2019 CBC, SPECIAL INSPECTION IS REQUIRED AS NOTED BELOW 1705.2.1 & 1705.2.1.2 - REQUIRED VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCED STANDARD IBC REFERENCE 1. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS: A. IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS TO CONFORM TO ASTM STANDARDS SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. - X AISC 360, SECTION A3.3 & APPLICABLE ASTM MATERIAL STANDARDS B. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE REQUIRED. - X - - 2. INSPECTION OF HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTING: A. SNUG-TIGHT JOINTS. - X AISC 360, SECTION M2.5 1704.3.3 B. PRETENSIONED AND SLIP-CRITICAL JOINTS USING TURN-OF-NUT WITH MATCHMARKING, TWIST-OFF BOLT OR DIRECT TENSION INDICATOR METHODS OF INSTALLATION. - X C. PRETENSIONED AND SLIP-CRITICAL JOINTS USING TURN-OF-NUT WITHOUT MATCHMARKING OR CALIBRATED WRENCH METHODS OF INSTALLATION.
X - 3. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL AND COLD-FORMED STEEL DECK: A. FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL, IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS TO CONFROM TO AISC 360. - X AISC 360, SECTION M5.5 B. FOR OTHER STEEL, IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS TO CONFORM TO ASTM STANDARDS SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. - X APPLICABLE ASTM MATERIAL STANDARDS C. MANUFACTURER' SCERTIFIED TEST REPORTS. - X 4. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF WELD FILTER MATERIALS: A. IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS TO CONFORM TO AWS SPECIFICATION IN THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. - X AISC 360, SECTION A3.5 AND APPLICABLE AWS A5 DOCUMENTS - B. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE REQUIRED. - X - - 5. INSPECTION OF WELDING: A. STRUCTURAL STEEL AND COLD-FORMED STEEL DECK: 1. COMPLETE AND PARTIAL JOINT PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS X - AWS D1.1 1704.3.1 2. MULTIPASS FILLET WELDS.X - 3. SINGLE-PASS FILLET WELDS > 516" X - 4. PLUG AND SLOT WELDSX - 5. SINGLE-PASS FILLET WELDS ≤ 516"
- X 6. FLOOR AND ROOF DECK WELDS. - X AWS D1.3 B. REINFORCING STEEL: 1. VERIFICATION OF WELDABILITY OF REINFORCING STEEL OTHER THAN ASTM A706. - X AWS D1.4 ACI 318: SECTION 3.5.2 2. REINFORCING STEEL RESISTING FLEXURAL AND AXIAL FORCES IN INTERMEDIATE AND SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES, AND BOUNDARY ELEMENTS OF SPECIAL STRUCTURAL WALLS OF CONCRETE AND SHEAR REINFORCEMENT.
X - 3. SHEAR REINFORCEMENT.X - 4. OTHER REINFORCING STEEL. - X 6. INSPECTION OF STEEL FRAME JOINT DETAILS FOR COMPLIANCE: A. DETAILS SUCH AS BRACING ADN STIFFENING. - X B. MEMBER LOCATIONS. - X 1704.3.2 C. APPLICATION OF JOINT DETAILS AT EACH CONNECTION. - X 1705.6 - REQUIRED VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION OF SOILS VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION CONTINUOUS PERIODIC 1. VERIFY MATERIALS BELOW SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS ARE ADEQUATE TO ACHIEVE THE DESIGN BEARING CAPACITY. - X 2. VERIFY EXCAVATIONS ARE EXTENDED TO PROPER DEPTH AND HAVE REACHED THE PROPER MATERIAL. - X 3. PERFORM CLASSIFICATION AND TESTING OF COMPACTED FILL MATERIALS. - X 4. VERIFY PROPER USE OF MATERIALS, DENSITIES, AND LIFT THICKNESSES DURING PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION OF COMPACTED FILL.
X - 5. PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF COMPACTED FILL, OBSERVE SUBGRADE AND VERIFY THAT SITE HAS BEEN PREPARED PROPERLY. - X 1705.3 - REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTS OF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION TYPE CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCED STANDARD IBC REFERENCE 1. INSPECT REINFORCEMENT, INCLUDING PRESTRESSING TENDONS, AND VERIFY PLACEMENT. - X ACI318: CH. 20, 25.2, 25.3, 26.5.1 - 26.5.3 1908.4 2. REINFORCING BAR WELDING: A. VERIFY WELDABILITY OF REINFORCING BARS OTHER THAN ASTM A706. - X AWSD 1.4 ACI318: 17.8.2 - B. INSPECT SINGLE-PASS FILLET WELDS, MAXIMUM 516"
- X C. INSPECT ALL OTHER WELDS
X - 3. INSPECT ANCHORS CAST IN CONCRETE. - X ACI318: 17.8.2 - 4. INSPECT ANCHORS POST-INSTALLED IN HARDENED CONCRETE MEMBERS PER ESR/ICC REPORT. A. ADHESIVE ANCHORS INSTALLED IN HORIZONTALLY OR UPWARDLY INCLINED ORIENTATIONS TO RESIST SUSTAINED TENSION LOADS.X - ACI318: 17.8.2.4 ACI318: 17.8.2 - B. MECHANICAL ANCHORS AND ADHESIVE ANCHORS NOT DEFINED IN 4.A - X 5. VERIFYING USE OF REQUIRED DESIGN MIX. - X ACI318: CH. 19, 26.4.3, 26.4.4 1904.1, 1904.2, 1908.2, 1908.3 6. PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT, FABRICATE SPECIMENS FOR STRENGTH TESTS, PERFORMSLUMP AND AIR CONTENT TESTS, AND DETERMINE THE TEMPARATURE OF THE CONCRETE.
X - ASTMC172 ASTMC31 ACI318: 26.4, 26.12 1908.10 7. INSPECT CONCRETE AND SHOTCRET PLACEMENT FOR PROPER APPLICATION TECHNIQUES.X - ACI318: 26.4.5 1908.6,1908.7, 1908.8 8. VERIFY MAINTENANCE OF SPECIFIED CURING TEMPARATURE AND TECHNIQUES. - X ACI318: 26.4.7 - 26.4.9 1908.9 9. INSPECTION OF PRESTRESSED CONCRETE: A. APPLICATION OF PRESTRESSING FORCES.X - ACI318: 26.9.2.1, 26.9.2.3 - B. GROUTING OF BONDED PRESTRESSING TENDONS.
X - 10. ERECTION OF PRECAST CONCRETE MEMBERS. - X ACI318: CH. 26.8 - 11. VERIFICATION OF IN-SITU CONCRETE STRENGTH, PRIOR TO STRESSING OF TENDONS IN POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE AND PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF SHORES AND FORMS FROM BEAMS AND STRUCTURAL SLABS. - X ACI318: 26.10.2 - 12. INSPECT FORMWORK FOR SHAPE, LOCATION AND DIMENSIONS OF THE CONCRETE MEMBER BEING FORMED. - X ACI318: 26.10.1(b) - 1705.4 - REQUIRED VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION OF MASONRY CONSTRUCTION VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCE FOR CRITERIA CBC SECTION TMS402 / ACI530 / ASCE5 TMS602 / ACI530.1 / ASCE6 1. COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIRED INSPECTION PROVISIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND THE APPROVED SUBMITTALS. - X - - ART. 1.5 2. VERIFICATION OF f'm AND f'aac PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND EVERY 5,000 SQUARE FEET DURING CONSTRUCTION. - X - - ART 1.4B 3. VERIFICATION OF PROPORTIONS OF MATERIALS IN PREMIXED OR PREBLENDED MORTAR AND GROUT AS DELIVERED TO THE SITE. - X - - ART. 1.5B 4. VERIFICATION OF SLUMP FLOW AND VSI AS DELIVERED TO THE SITE FOR SELF-CONSOLIDATING GROUT.
X - - - ART. 1.5B.1.b.3 5. THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE VERIFIED TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE: A. PROPORTIONS OF SITE-PREPARED MORTAR, GROUT AND PRESTRESSING GROUT FOR BONDED TENDONS. - X - - ART. 2.6A B. PLACEMENT OF MASONRY UNITS AND CONSTRUCTION OF MORTAR JOINTS. - X - - ART. 3.3B C. PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT, CONNECTORS AND PRESTRESSING TENDONS AND ANCHORAGES. - X - SEC. 1.15 ART. 3.4, 3.6A D. GROUT SPACE PRIOR TO GROUT.X - - - ART. 3.2D E. PLACEMENT OF GROUT.X - - - ART. 3.5 F. PLACEMENT OF PRESTRESSING GROUT.X - - - ART. 3.6C G. SIZE AND LOCATION OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS. - X - - ART. 3.3F 1705.4 - REQUIRED VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION OF MASONRY CONSTRUCTION VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCE FOR CRITERIA CBC SECTION TMS402 / ACI530 / ASCE5 TMS602 / ACI530.1 / ASCE6 H. TYPE, SIZE AND LOCATION OF ANCHORS, INCLUDING OTHER DETAILS OF ANCHORAGE OF MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, FRAMES OR OTHER CONSTRUCTION.
X - - SEC. 1.2.2(e), 1.16.1
- I. SPECIFIED SIZE, GRADE AND TYPE OF
REINFORCEMENT, ANCHOR BOLTS, PRESTRESSING TENDONS AND ANCHORAGES. - X - SEC. 1.15 ART. 2.4, 3.4 J. WELDING OF REINFORCING BARS.
X - - SEC. 2.197.2,
3.3.3.4(b)
- K. PREPARATION, CONSTRUCTION AND PROTECTION OF MASONRY DURING COLD WEATHER (TEMPERATURE BELOW 40°F) OR HOT WEATHER (TEMPERATURE ABOVE 90°F)
- X SEC. 2104A.3, 2104A.4
- ART. 2.4, 3.4 L. APPLICATION AND MEASUREMENT OF PRESTRESSING FORCE.
X - - - ART. 1.8C, 1.8D 6. PREPARATION OF ANY REQUIRED GROUT SPECIMENS AND/OR PRISMS SHALL BE OBSERVED.X - SEC. 2105A.2.2, 2105A.3 - ART. 3.6B 7. POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS.
X - 1615A.1.14 (DSA-SS, 16151.12 (DSA-SS /
CC)
- - 11 DESIGN LOADS & OTHER DESIGN INFORMATION ALL COMPONENTS OF THIS PROJECT SHALL BE ABLE TO WITHSTAND THE LOADING CRITERIA SET FORTH IN THE CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE (CBC), 2019 EDITION, AND ASCE 7-16. THE FOLLOWING DESIGN INFORMATION HAS BEEN DEVELOPED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE, 2019 EDITION, ALONG WITH ASCE 7-16. 1. ROOF LIVE LOADS: Lr: 20 PSF (REDUCIBLE IN ACCORDANCE WITH PROVISIONS OF CBC 2019) 2. SNOW LOADS: N/A 3. WIND DESIGN DATA: A. MAIN WIND FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM: STEEL ORDINARY MOMENT RESISTING FRAME B. ULTIMATE DESIGN WIND SPEED, VULT: 110 mph C. RISK CATEGORY: IV D. WIND IMPORTANCE FACTOR, I W: 1.00 E. WIND EXPOSURE: B F. BUILDING ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION: OPEN. G. COMPONENTS AND CLADDING PRESSURES: (PER ASCE 7-16 CHAPTER 30) 6. SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA: A. SEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR, I E: 1.5 B. RISK CATEGORY: IV C. MAPPED SPECTRAL RESPONSE ACCELERATIONS: S S: 1.822 g
S1: 0.648 g D. SITE CLASS: D E. SITE COEFFICIENTS: F
A: 1.0
F
V: 1.7 F. MCE SPECTRAL RESPONSE PARAMETERS: SMS: 1.822 g SM1: 1.102 g G. DESIGN SPECTRAL RESPONSE PARAMETERS: SDS: 1.215 gSD1: 0.735 g H. SITE-MODIFIED MCE G PEAK GROUND ACCELERATION : PGA
M = 0.857 g I. LONG PERIOD TRANSITION-PERIOD: TL = 8 SEC J. SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY: D K. BASIC SEISMIC FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM: STEEL ORDINARY MOMENT RESISTING FRAME L. DESIGN BASE SHEAR: V = 2.19 KIPS M. SEISMIC RESPONSE COEFFICIENT: C S = 0.209 P. RESPONSE MODIFICATION FACTOR: R = 3.5 Q. ANALYSIS PROCEDURE: EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE ANALYSIS 7. FLOOD LOAD: N/A 8. SPECIAL LOADS: N/A 9. SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS REQUIRING SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR SEISMIC RESISTANCE: SPECIAL INSPECTIONS SHALL BE PERFORMED FOR THE VARIOUS ASPECTS OF THE PROJECT PER THE REQUIREMENTS STIPULATED IN CBC 2019.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - S.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-S1.2 STRUCTURAL NOTES.dwg - Tab: STRUCTURAL NOTES - by rching on 06/18/21 at 8:59:43 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS
17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com
Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 S.B.S R.C. S.B.S SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 STRUCTURAL NOTES S1.2 26 1 2"=1'-0" FOUNDATION PLAN FOUNDATION NOTES (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE): 1. TOP OF CONCRETE SLAB AT EL. VARIES - SEE CIVIL PLAN FOR AREAS OF SLOPING CONCRETE. 2. FLOOR PENETRATIONS: CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE NUMBER, LOCATION, AND SIZE OF ALL FLOOR PENETRATIONS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO FLOOR DRAINS, WITH MEP DRAWINGS. 3. ELECTRICAL STUB-UPS TO BE SECURED IN PLACE PRIOR TO CONCRETE POUR. INDICATES AREA OF 12" CONCRETE SLAB WITH MICROSYNTHETIC FIBERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. SEE SECTIONS AND DETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL REINFORCEMENT. INDICATES SLOPING SURFACE WITH THE ARROW POINTING DOWN SLOPE. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE / VERIFY DIMENSIONS, EXTENT, AND DEGREE OF SLOPING SURFACE WITH ARCHITECTURAL DOCUMENTS. SEE ELEVATIONS INDICATED ON PLAN FOR DEGREEE OF SLOPE. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED WITHIN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, SLOPING SURFACES SHALL TRANSITION UNIFORMLY. DPETHS OF ALL CONCRETE MEMBERS SHALL BE MAINTAINED ACROSS ENTIRE SLOPED AREA. ALL REINFORCING STEEL, INCLUDING SLAB AND BEAM REINFORCING, SHALL BE BENT AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN SPECIFIED CONCRETE COVER AND TO AVOID CONFLICT WITH CONCRETE SURFACES. LEGENDS: 30'-0" 15'-0"
13'-0" 20'-0"9'-0" 10'-6"±9" ±7'-9" 8'-6"
7'-0" 5'-0" SLOPE FF +0.67' 2'-6" 8'-4" 2'-6"
8"
1'-10" 8'-4" 8'-4"8'-8"
2'-6" 8'-8" 1'-10"
8" 2'-6" #5 @ 8" O.C. TOP AND BOTTOM, EACH WAY
5'-0" 1'-9" 1'-9" 2'-6" 2'-6"1'-0" 1'-0"
2'-6" 2'-6"
11 1/2" 11 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 11 1/2" 1/2" 11 1/2" 1/2" CENTER OF EXISTING 18" CASING N 1821722.64 E 6495577.71 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: S1 2'Ø CIDH PILE, 8 TYP. PER DETAIL 'A' ON SHEET S4.0 S2 WELL HEAD STRUCTURE PER DETAIL 'F' ON SHEET S4.0 S1 S2 5'-0" OVER EXCAVATE EXISTING 18" FF 0.0' (DATUM) SEE CIVIL PLAN WELL CASING EXISTING 36" CONDUCTOR CASING EXISTING 48" CONDUCTOR CASING 4.8% 4.8%
8.3% 8.3%
CIDH PILE P1 - 20'(L) CIDH PILE P1 - 20'(L) CIDH PILE P1 - 20'(L) CIDH PILE P2 - 18'(L) CIDH PILE P3 - 15'(L) CIDH PILE P2 - 18'(L) CIDH PILE P3 - 15'(L) 0.67' 0.67'
0.67' 1.9' 1.9' FF +2.0'
1.9' 1.9' SEWER LINE BELOW FILL 1
2" GAP WITH NON COMPRESSIBLE NEOPRENE PAD INDICATES 8" FULLY GROUTED CMU WALL. SEE S6.0 FOR REINFORCING DETAILS. 8" CMU WALL OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT PAD. COORDINATE WITH MEP DRAWINGS, TYP. FIBER REINFORCED BUILDING PER MECHANICAL PLANS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626 - Foundation and Framing.dwg; B626 - Construction Notes.dwg; B626-36x24v - S.dwg w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-S2.0 FOUNDATION PLAN.dwg - Tab: FOUNDATION PLAN - by rching on 08/19/21 at 2:29:33 PM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS
17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com
Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 S.B.S R.C. S.B.S SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 FOUNDATION PLAN S2.0 27 1"=1'-0" ROOF FRAMING PLAN ROOF FRAMING NOTES (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE): LEGENDS: 1. COORDINATE ALL DIMENSIONS AND OR ELEVATIONS WITH MEP DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THESE DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH ANY AFFECTED WORK. 2. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBER, AS WELL AS ALL ATTACHED ITEMS, THAT SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION (HDGAF). ALL ASSOCIATED CONNECTIONS ELEMENTS, FASTENERS, ETC. SHALL RECEIVE APPROPRIATED GALVANIZED COATINGS AS NEEDED. SEE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS AND GENERAL NOTES ON SHEET S1.0 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. INDICATES HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTION INDICATES METAL DECK. SEE METAL ROOF DECK NOTES ON SHEET S1.1 AND DETAIL F ON SHEET S5.1 FOR ATTACHMENT TYP. HSS 1"=1'-0" BASE FRAMING PLAN HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 SLOPE ±4'X4' OPENING. COORDINATE W/ ROOF VENT/HATCH
1 A
2 B 9'-6 1/2"
8'-0 1/2" HSS 4 x 4 x 3
8 HSS 4 x 4 x 3
8 HSS 4 x 4 x 3 HSS 4 x 4 x 8
3 8
1 A
2 B HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 6 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 14 HSS 6 x 4 x 14 HSS 4 x 4 x 14 HSS 4 x 4 x 1 4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 ROOF VENT/HATCH SEE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PLAN SEE DETAIL A ON SHEET S5.0, TYP. SEE DETAIL E ON SHEET S5.1, TYP. T.O.S. +12'-0" T.O.S. +11'-10" SEE DETAIL D N SHEET S5.1, TYP.
SLOPE
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626 - Foundation and Framing.dwg; B626-36x24v - S.dwg w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-S2.1 ROOF FRAMING PLAN.dwg - Tab: ROOF FRAMING PLAN - by rching on 06/18/21 at 9:00:07 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS
17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com
Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 S.B.S R.C. S.B.S SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S2.1 28
FRAMING SECTIONS NTS
F GRIDLINE A GRIDLINE B GRIDLINE 1 GRIDLINE 2
1 2
1 2
A
B
A
B HSS 6 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 14 9'-6 1/2"
8'-0" 4'-0" 1'-6" TYP.
1'-6"
TYP.
HSS 4 x 4 x 3
8 HSS 4 x 4 x 3
8 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 8'-0" 3'-10"
HSS 4 x 4 x 3
8 HSS 4 x 4 x 3
8 1'-6" TYP.
1'-6"
TYP. HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 6 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 8'-0" 4'-0"
8'-0" 3'-10"
HSS 4 x 4 x 3
8 HSS 4 x 4 x 3
8 1'-6" TYP.
1'-6"
TYP. HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 8'-0" 4'-0"
8'-0" 3'-10"
HSS 4 x 4 x 3
8 HSS 4 x 4 x 3
8 1'-6" TYP.
1'-6"
TYP. HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 HSS 4 x 4 x 1
4 SEE DETAIL D ON SHEET 5.1, TYP. SEE DETAIL A ON SHEET 5.1, TYP. SEE DETAIL B ON SHEET 5.1, TYP. SEE DETAIL C ON SHEET 5.1, TYP.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626 - Structural Sections.dwg; B626-36x24v - S.dwg w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-S3.0 ELEVATIONS.dwg - Tab: ELEVATIONS - by rching on 06/18/21 at 9:00:14 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS
17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com
Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 S.B.S R.C. S.B.S SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 ELEVATIONS S3.0 29
TYPICAL CIDH PILE DETAIL NTS
A WELL HEAD STRUCTURE NTS
F PLAN SECTION (11) #6 EQUALLY SPACED VERTICAL BARS #3 CLOSED STIRRUPS, TYP. 3" CLR
COVER
3" PER PLAN PER PLAN
3" CLR.
COVER
TYP.
3"
3"
3"
3"
3'-0" OVERLAP #3 CLOSED STIRRUPS @ 6" O.C., TYP.
SLAB
PER
PLAN
(11) #6 EQUALLY SPACED VERTICAL BARS (6) #4 DOWEL BARS EQUALLY SPACED 24"Ø PILE SECTION A SECTION B PLAN VIEW - WELL HEAD BLOCK PLAN VIEW - PEDESTAL 3" CLR.
COVER TYP.
2" CLR.
COVER TYP. 11 1/2" 2" CLR. COVER TYP. 7'-0"1/2" SEPARATION GAP, TYP. #6 VERT. REINFORCING BAR, TYP. #6 HORIZ. REINFORCING BAR EQUALLY SPACED, TYP. #6 CROSSTIES W/ 90° HOOKS AT EACH ENDS, TYP. 5'-0" 11 1/2" 7'-0" 11 1/2" #6 VERT. REINFORCING BAR, TYP. #6 VERT. REINFORCING BAR EQUALLY SPACED, TYP. #6 HORIZ. CLOSED TIES, TYP. #6 CROSSTIES W/ 90° HOOKS AT EACH ENDS, TYP. 3 4"Ø x 10" NELSON STUD FUSION WELDED TO 1
2" THICK EXISTING PIPE, TYP. (12 LOCATION TOTAL)
8'-6" 11 1/2" 11 1/2" 1/2" SEPARATION GAP, TYP.
10'-6" 9'-0" 2" CLR. COVER TYP.
3" CLR.
COVER TYP.
2" CLR.
COVER TYP. 2" CLR. COVER TYP.
5'-0" 11 1/2" 1/2" SEPARATION GAP, TYP. #6 VERT. REINFORCING BAR, TYP. #6 HORIZ. REINFORCING BAR EQUALLY SPACED, TYP. #6 CROSSTIES W/ 90° HOOKS AT EACH ENDS, TYP. #6 HORIZ. CLOSED TIES, TYP. #6 CROSSTIES W/ 90° HOOKS AT EACH ENDS, TYP. #6 HORIZ. REINFORCING BAR, TYP. 2" CLR. COVER TYP. 2" CLR.
COVER TYP.
6" EQ EQ 6" EQ EQ
5'-0" 5'-0" #6 VERT. REINFORCING BAR EQUALLY SPACED, TYP. #6 TIES TYP. SEE SECTION VIEW #6 HORZ. REINFORCING BAR W/ 90° HOOKS AT EACH ENDS, TYP. 3 4"Ø x 10" NELSON STUD FUSION WELDED TO 516" MIN. THICKNESS PIPE / EXTENDER, TYP. (8 LOCATION TOTAL)
2" CLR.
COVER TYP.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: DET XX CONC DETAIL 1.dwg; B626-36x24v - S.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-S4.0 CONCRETE DETAILS.dwg - Tab: CONCRETE DETAILS - by rching on 06/18/21 at 9:00:33 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS
17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com
Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 S.B.S R.C. S.B.S SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 CONCRETE DETAILS S4.0 30 11 1/2"
11 1/2" 1 1/2" TYP.
1 1/2" TYP. 2" TYP.
1/2"
TYP.
2"
TYP. 1" TYP. 1" TYP.
1 4 3
4" PL HSS POST HEADED STUD BELOW, TYP.
4" MIN.
1" MAX
10"
3 4"Ø x 10" AWS, TYPE B,
HEADED STUD TYP. (4 TOT.)
1" TYP.
3 4" PL SS316 EMBED P , 1
1 L 2"
1 4 HSS PER PLAN
3 4"Ø STAINLESS STEEL (SS316) THREADED
BOLT, W/ STAINLESS STEEL NUTS AND WASHER TO MATCH IN OVERSIZED HOLE AT BASE PLATE AND THREADED INTO EMBED PLATE TYP. (4 TOT.) APPLY LOCTITE ANTI-SEIZE LUBRICANT TO NUTS/BOLTS THREADED C TYPICAL HSS POST TO CONCRETE CONNECTION N.T.S.
A
E NOT USED N.T.S.
F PLAN SECTION NOT USED N.T.S. NOT USED N.T.S. NOT USED N.T.S.
B
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: Base Plate.dwg; B626-36x24v - S.dwg
W:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-S5.0 STEEL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: STEEL DETAILS - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 5:36:16 PM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS
17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com
Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 S.B.S R.C. S.B.S SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 STEEL DETAILS S5.0 31 PARTIAL PLAN TYPICAL METAL DECK ATTACHMENT SCHEDULE LOCATION PLB-36 PERIMETER FRAMING PARALLEL TO DECK SPAN 3 4"Ø PUDDLE WELDS @18" O.C. PERIMETER FRAMING PERPENDICULAR TO DECK SPAN (4)- 3 4" PUDDLE WELDS PER PANEL SUPPORT FRAMING PARALLEL TO DECK SPAN 3 4"Ø PUDDLE WELDS @18" O.C. SUPPORT FRAMING PERPENDICULAR TO DECK SPAN (4)- 3 4" PUDDLE WELDS PER PANEL ATTACHMENT AT NESTED EDGE VERCO SIDE LAP CONNECTION @18" O.C. NOTE: 1. WHERE TWO METAL DECK UNITS ABUT, EACH UNIT SHALL BE WELDED TO THE STEEL FRAMING. PERIMETER SUPPORTS
INTERMEDIATE
SUPPORTS INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS
PERIMETER
SUPPORTS WELD TO SUPPORT PARALLEL TO DECK SPAN DECK TO DECK SIDE LAP ATTACHMENT WELD TO SUPPORT PARALLEL TO DECK SPAN WELD TO SUPPORT PERPENDICULAR TO DECK SPAN WELD TO SUPPORT PERPENDICULAR TO DECK SPAN SECTION ℄
℄ PLAN HSS BEAM PER PLAN / ELEVATION
1 TYP
4 BOTH SIDES TYP HSS BEAM PER PLAN / ELEVATION
℄
℄
1 TYP
4 TYP
℄ SECTION PLAN
℄
℄
1 TYP
4 HSS BEAM PER PLAN / ELEVATION HSS BEAM PER PLAN / ELEVATION 1" HSS POST (BELOW) PER PLAN / ELEVATION 1 2" CAP PLATE W/ 2"Ø HOLE FOR LIFTING
℄
℄
1 2" CAP PLATE W/ 2"Ø HOLE FOR LIFTING TYP BOTH SIDES TYP 1 TYP
4 HSS BEAM (BEYOND) PER PLAN / ELEVATION TYP 1
4 HSS POST PER PLAN / ELEVATION CAP PLATE (FRONT) 5"
11"
1/2" 1/2" TYP. 2" Ø
1"
1 4HSS BEAM PER HSS BEAM PER PLAN / ELEVATION PLAN / ELEVATION SECTION ℄
℄
1 TYP
4 HSS BEAM PER PLAN / ELEVATION BOTH SIDES TYP
PER
ELEVATION HSS KNEE BRACE PER ELEVATION SECTION
℄
℄
℄
1 TYP
4 HSS KNEE BRACE PER ELEVATION BOTH SIDES TYP HSS KNEE BRACE PER ELEVATION PER
ELEVATION
PER
ELEVATION HSS POST PER PLAN / ELEVATION SECTION
℄
℄ HSS POST PER PLAN / ELEVATION HSS BEAM PER PLAN / ELEVATION 1 TYP
4 TYP HSS KNEE BRACE TO HSS POST CONNECTION NTS
C TYP HSS POST TO HSS BEAM CONNECTION NTS
D TYP HSS BEAM TO HSS BEAM CONNECTION NTS
E NTS
F TYP HSS POST TO HSS BEAM CONNECTION NTS
A TYP HSS KNEE BRACE TO HSS BEAM CONNECTION NTS
B TYP METAL DECK ATTACHMENT PATTERN
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - S.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-S5.1 STEEL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: STEEL DETAILS - by rching on 06/18/21 at 9:00:58 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS
17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com
Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 S.B.S R.C. S.B.S SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 STEEL DETAILS S5.1 32 CONTROL JOINT SHALL BE PROVIDED AT EVERY 30' CONTROL JOINT AT BOND BEAM PREFORMED CONTROL JOINT GASKET - COORD. W/ PROJECT SPEC. REINF. AND GROUT SOLID TWO CELLS ON EACH SIDE OF CONTROL JOINT - TYP. CONTROL JOINT SHALL BE PROVIDED AT EVERY 30' PROVIDE 180° HOOK AT ALL TERMINATED HORIZ. REINF. BARS. ROTATE HOOK AS REQUIRED TO FIT IN CMU BLOCK - TYP. GROUT CMU SOLID - TYP. TYPICAL WALL VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT PER WALL DETAIL CMU PER WALL DETAIL TYPICAL END OF WALL TYPICAL END OF WALL AT BOND BEAM EQ REINF. EA. CELLEQ W/ 2 - #5 VERT. CMU PER WALL DETAIL CMU PER WALL DETAIL REINF. EA. CELL W/ 2 - #5 VERT.EQ HORIZ. REINFOR. W/EQ 180° HOOKS AT EA. BOND BEAM, TYP. N.T.S. F TYPICAL CMU WALL N.T.S. C MASONARY WALL N.T.S. D 12'-0" NOTES: 1. PROVIDE A MINIMUM SURFACE ROUGHNESS OF 18" ON CONCRETE AT INTERFACE W/ CMU WALL - TYP. 2. VERTICAL REINFORCING STEEL OF WALL SHALL EXTEND TO REST ON TOP OF BOTTOM REINFORCING OF FOOTING - TYP. MORTAR MASONRY CAP 2" CLR.
TYP.#5 @ 8" O.C. TOP & BOTTOM, TYP.
4'-0" LAP 3" CLR. TYP.
3" CLR.
TYP.
EASTERLY
PROPERTY LINE PER PLAN STRUCTURAL PILE PER
PER PLAN 1'-0" 8" FULLY GROUTED SPLIT FACE CMU WALL 2 - #5 HORIZONTAL BAR @ 24" O.C. MAX, TYP. #5 VERTICAL BAR @ 8" O.C., TYP. CMU SPLIT FACE "U"-BLOCK W/ 2 - #5 CONT. BOT. #5 DOWEL BARS TO MATCH VERTICAL BAR, TYP. NOT USED N.T.S. E NOT USED #5 @ 8" O.C. TOP & BOTTOM, TYP. 3" AS4.0 NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF CMU BLOCK CONSTRUCTION. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL CMU SHALL BE SPLIT FACE BLOCK. COORDINATE WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AS NEEDED. 2. CONSTRUCTION BRACING: CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ADEQUATE HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL SUPPORT AND BRACING FOR ALL CMU WALLS AND CMU WALL OPENINGS DURING CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED UNTIL CMU WALLS HAVE GAINED SPECIFIED STRENGTH TO SUPPORT APPLICABLE LOADS. 3. TERMINATION OF VERTICAL REINFORCING: ALL VERTICAL CMU WALL REINFORCING SHALL EXTEND SIX (6) INCHES INTO THE UPPER MOST "U"-BLOCK AT THE TOP OF THE CMU WALL. ALL VERTICAL CMU WALL REINFORCING SHALL BE TERMINATED WITH A STANDARD HOOK IN THE "U"-BLOCK. - TYPICAL. 4. REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT TOLERANCE: TOLERANCE FOR THE PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT STEEL IN WALLS AND FLEXURAL ELEMENTS SHALL BE ±12", WHICH SHALL BE ACHIEVED WITH ADEQUATELY SPACED BAR POSITIONERS.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - Structural Sections.dwg; B626 - Foundation and Framing.dwg; B626-36x24v - S.dwg w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-S6.0 MASONRY DETAILS.dwg - Tab: MASONRY DETAILS - by rching on 08/11/21 at 9:16:27 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS
17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com
Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 S.B.S R.C. S.B.S SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 MASONRY DETAILS S6.0 33
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - E.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E0.0 ELECTRICAL NOTES.dwg - Tab: ELECTRICAL NOTES - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 4:51:09 PM Dimscale = 20; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 ELECTRICAL NOTES E0.0 34 ELECTRICAL NOTES: 1. ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (2020), CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE (2019), BUILDING ENERGY EFFICIENCY STANDARDS TITLE 24 (2019), FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL JURISDICTION CODES. 2. ALL WORK SHALL BE DONE IN A NEAT, WORKMANLIKE, FINISHED AND SAFE MANNER, ACCORDING TO THE LATEST PUBLISHED NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S ASSOCIATION STANDARDS OF INSTALLATION, UNDER COMPETENT SUPERVISION. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION TO BECOME FAMILIAR WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS AND ALL OTHER FACTORS WHICH MAY AFFECT THE EXECUTION OF THIS WORK. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGE TO EXISTING WALKS, WALLS, DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, ETC. DAMAGES SHALL BE REPAIRED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE CITY AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE CITY. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL PAY FOR LOCAL FEES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS AS MAY BE REQUIRED AND PROVIDE A CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION TO THE CITY. 6. LEAVE THE SITE CLEAN, REMOVE ALL DEBRIS, EMPTY CARTONS, TOOLS, CONDUIT, WIRE SCRAPS AND ALL MISCELLANEOUS SPARE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS USED IN THE WORK DURING CONSTRUCTION. 7. IT IS THE OBLIGATION OF THE CONTRACTOR TO ORGANIZE HIS WORK SO THAT A COMPLETE ELECTRICAL, INSTRUMENTATION, AND/OR CONTROL SYSTEM FOR THE FACILITY WILL BE PROVIDED AND SUPPORTED BY ACCURATE SHOP AND RECORD DRAWINGS, AND ALL O&M MANUALS. 8. ALL CABLES SHALL BE NEW, COPPER, RATED FOR 600V AND LISTED FOR ITS LOCATION WITH A MINIMUM TEMPERATURE RATING OF 75 DEG C WET AND 90 DEG C DRY; POWER CABLES SHALL BE TYPE XHHW-2 FOR UNDERGROUND/ABOVE GROUND, 2000 VOLT VFD RATED CABLE FOR VFD MOTOR LEADS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 9. MINIMUM SIZE CONDUIT ABOVE GROUND SHALL BE 3/4" AND MINIMUM SIZE CONDUIT BELOW GROUND SHALL BE 1" UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ALL CONDUITS FOR POWER AND LIGHTING SHALL CONTAIN A GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. 10. MINIMUM SIZE POWER CONDUCTORS SHALL BE #12 AWG UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 11. ALL TERMINAL RATINGS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM TEMPERATURE RATING OF 75 DEG C. CABLES SHALL BE DE-RATED PER NEC 110.14 (C). 12. CONDUIT SIZE SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED IN THE PLANS OR DETAILS. UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SHALL BE SCH 40 PVC ENCASED IN CONCRETE WITH PVC COATED GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL BENDS, ELBOWS AND TURN-UPS. EXPOSED CONDUIT IN THE CHEMICAL ROOM AND OUTDOORS SHALL BE PVC COATED GRS. ALL OTHER EXPOSED ABOVE-GROUND CONDUIT SHALL BE GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL. 13. EQUIPMENT AND WIRING METHODS IN THE CHEMICAL ROOM SHALL BE RATED FOR CORROSIVE LOCATIONS, ENCLOSURES SHALL BE NEMA 4X. EQUIPMENT IN THE ELECTRICAL ROOM SHALL BE NEMA 1 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. OUTDOOR EXPOSED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEMA 3R; UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 14. GROUND AND BOND ALL EQUIPMENT AND ENCLOSURES PER NEC ARTICLE 250 AND MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. 15. CONTRACTOR SHALL PLAN AND INSTALL WORK IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO CONFORM TO THE STRUCTURE, AVOID OBSTRUCTIONS, PRESERVE HEADROOM AND KEEP OPENINGS AND PASSAGEWAYS CLEAR. 16. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL LABOR, MATERIAL, ETC. NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE AND WORKABLE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM WHETHER OR NOT THESE ITEMS ARE SPECIFICALLY NOTED ON THESE DRAWINGS. INCIDENTAL ITEMS NOT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS, NOR MENTIONED IN SPECIFICATIONS THAT CAN BE LEGITIMATELY AND REASONABLY INFERRED TO BELONG TO THE WORK DESCRIBED OR BE NECESSARY IN GOOD PRACTICE TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE SYSTEM, SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED AS THOUGH ITEMIZED HERE IN EVERY DETAIL. 17. ALL TRENCHING, CONDUITS, ETC. SHALL BE ROUTED AND INSTALLED IN SUCH A MANNER THAT WILL NOT DAMAGE EXISTING FACILITIES OR UNDERGROUND UTILITIES. SHOULD DAMAGE OCCUR, IT WILL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR DAMAGE TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE CITY OR INSPECTOR. 18. ALL CONDUIT RUNS SHOWN ON THIS PLAN ARE SCHEMATIC IN NATURE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE SURE THAT ALL CONDUIT MEETS LOCAL AND STATE CODES. 19. WHEN CROSSING PATHWAYS OR SIDEWALKS, CONTRACTOR SHALL BORE UNDER EXISTING CONCRETE WALKS AND SAWCUT ASPHALT WALKS. ASPHALT WALKS AND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS TO BE REPLACED IN KIND. 20. CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE WORK INSTALLED UNDER THE CONTRACT TO BE FREE FROM DEFECTIVE WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS, USUAL WEAR EXPECTED, AND SHOULD ANY SUCH DEFECTS DEVELOP WITHIN A PERIOD OF ONE YEAR ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT BY THE CITY, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REPAIR AND/OR REPLACE ANY DEFECTIVE ITEMS AND DAMAGE RESULTING FROM FAILURE OF THESE ITEMS, AT NO EXPENSE WHATSOEVER TO THE CITY. 21. ALL CIRCUITS SHALL BE LEGIBLY IDENTIFIED AT THE PANEL, JUNCTION BOXES AND AT ALL EQUIPMENT IN A PERMANENT MANNER (I.E. ETCHED PLATES, CONDUCTOR TAG, PERMANENT MARKER, ETC.). THE LABELING SHALL INCLUDE PANEL CIRCUIT NUMBER, "TO" AND "FROM" IDENTIFICATION, AND MARKED "SPARE" WHERE APPLICABLE. 22. CONTRACTOR SHALL TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM FOR SHORT CIRCUITS AND MEGGER TEST FEEDERS AND BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING. INSURE LOW IMPEDANCE GROUND PATH SYSTEM. PERFORM HIPOT TESTING WHEN REQUIRED BY LOCAL JURISDICTION. 23. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS WITH EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND CONTROLS IF OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OR CONTROLS ARE NOT INTEGRAL WITH UNITS. 24. FULL LOAD AMPS (FLA) SIZES, AS NOTED IN THESE DRAWINGS, ARE BASED ON SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT DATA. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY NAMEPLATE FLA OF EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED AND COORDINATE ACCORDINGLY PER EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND CODE REQUIREMENTS. 25. CONDUITS OR RACEWAYS INSTALLED IN AREAS WHERE ELEVATION CHANGES MAY CAUSE WATER OR MOISTURE TO ENTER THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT THROUGH THE CONDUIT SHALL BE SEALED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC 300.5 (G). 26. MATERIALS SHALL BE NEW AND OF THE BEST QUALITY WITH MANUFACTURER'S NAME PRINTED THEREON. MATERIALS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEMA, ANSI, UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY OR OTHER APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND RATED FOR HEAVY DUTY SERVICE. 27. SELECTION OF MATERIALS SHALL BE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE DRAWINGS AND/OR SPECIFICATIONS. 28. THE SUBMITTALS SHALL BE NEATLY GROUPED AND ORGANIZED. PERTINENT INFORMATION SHALL BE HIGHLIGHTED, AND THE SPECIFIC PRODUCT SHALL BE IDENTIFIED. ALL SUBMITTALS SHALL BE COMPLETE, AND PRESENTED IN ONE PACKAGE. THE SUBMITTAL SHALL INCLUDE A COMPLETE LIST OF THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS, INCLUDING THE MANUFACTURER'S NAME, PRODUCT SPECIFICATION, DESCRIPTIVE DATA, TECHNICAL LITERATURE, PERFORMANCE CHARTS, CATALOG CUTS, INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION, AND SPARE PART RECOMMENDATIONS FOR EACH DIFFERENT ITEM OF THE EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED. 29. VERIFY ALL CONDUIT FILL RATIOS, BOX FILLS, AND CONDUIT BENDS (MAX 360 DEGREES) ARE MET PER NEC REQUIREMENTS. INSTALL PULL BOXES AND DE-RATE CABLE AMPACITY AS NECESSARY. 30. CONTRACTOR TO READ ALL THE DRAWINGS IN THIS SET TO BECOME FAMILIARIZED WITH THE FULL ELECTRICAL SCOPE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MECHANICAL, INSTRUMENTATION AND CIVIL DRAWINGS. 31. THESE DRAWINGS AND THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS ARE COMPLEMENTARY. WHERE THERE IS OVERLAP, THE MORE STRINGENT REQUIREMENT WILL TAKE PRECEDENCE. 32. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL CIRCUITS CONTAIN LESS THAN 5% VOLTAGE DROP. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND ARC FLASH STUDY, AS REQUIRED. 33. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE AND PERFORM WORK TO THE STANDARDS OF ALL APPLICABLE UTILITY COMPANIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL LINES, GAS LINES AND WATER LINES. WHEN AN ISSUE OR DISCREPANCY ARISES, NOTIFY THE CITY AND ENGINEER IMMEDIATELY. 34. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE REQUIREMENTS FOR NFPA 70E, AS REQUIRED. 35. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER AND THE CITY WITH ANY DISCREPANCIES FOUND DURING INSTALLATION OR REVIEW.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - E.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E0.1 ELECTRICAL LEGEND.dwg - Tab: ELECTRICAL LEGEND - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 4:51:13 PM Dimscale = 20; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 MANUAL MOTOR STARTER 120V, 20A SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE 120V, 20A SPST SWITCH FENCE EXISTING CONDUIT EXPOSED CONDUIT UNDERGROUND CONDUIT DUCTBANK UTILITY CONDUIT DUCTBANK CONDUIT RUN CONCEALED IN CEILING, FLOOR, TRENCH OR IN WALLS GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR 120V, 20A 3-WAY SWITCH 120V, 20A 4-WAY SWITCH 120V, 20A DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 120V, 20A QUADRAPLEX RECEPTACLE 480V SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE (NUMBER DENOTES CIRCUIT AMPS) TELEPHONE OUTLET (RJ-11) 240V SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE (NUMBER DENOTES CIRCUIT AMPS) ETHERNET (10/100) OUTLET (RJ-45) COMBINATION TELEPHONE/ETHERNET (10/100) OUTLET (RJ-11 & RJ-45) ABOVE GROUND JUNCTION BOX FLOAT SWITCH LEVEL ELEMENT DISCONNECT SWITCH SOLENOID VALVE (ENERGIZED TO CLOSE) BUTTERFLY VALVE PUSHBUTTON CONTROL STATION CONDUIT SEAL-OFF FITTING LEVEL PROBES FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER SOLENOID VALVE (ENERGIZED TO OPEN) HANDHOLE FLOOR MOUNTED ETHERNET (10/100) OUTLET (RJ-45) CONDUCTIVITY SWITCH EXISTING OVERHEAD ELECTRIC EXISTING UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC PLUG VALVE GATE VALVE MOTOR STARTER ANALYZER TRANSMITTER PRESSURE SWITCH TEMPERATURE SWITCH UNDERGROUND JUNCTION BOX INTRUSION ALARM SWITCH THERMOSTAT MANHOLE PLAN LEGEND SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM AND SCHEMATIC LEGEND SSS SR SS SP SPD SV SWBD TB TR TC TM TS TSP TWP TYP UG V VM VFD WP TR,XFMR XP A, AMP AM AC AIC BAT C CB CNTL CPT CP CR CT DC DR (E) EC EF ETM F FB (F) FLTR FS FVNR FVR G, GND GFCI HPS HS ICP ISR I, IND INST KV KVA KW LED LCD LA LCP LPU LOS LR LS MA MB MCC MCP MOT MMS MS N NA (N) N.I.C. NP OT O/L PB PCB PC PLC PL-1 PFR PNL POT PPM PR PS PT PTT PVC PWR RR RV ABBREVIATION LIST LEVEL TRANSPONDER PHOTOCELL FIELD WIRING PANEL WIRING COMMUNICATIONS WIRING H PUSH-TO-TEST PILOT LIGHT (LETTER DENOTES COLOR) PILOT LIGHT (LETTER DENOTES COLOR) CONTROL RELAY PRESSURE SWITCH (N.O.) CLOSES ON RISING PRESSURE PRESSURE SWITCH (N.C.) OPENS ON RISING PRESSURE TIMING RELAY, (N.O.) CONTACT TIME TO CLOSE (ON DELAY TIMER) TIMING RELAY, (N.C.) CONTACT TIME TO OPEN (ON DELAY TIMER) TIMING RELAY, (N.O.) CONTACT TIME TO OPEN (OFF DELAY TIMER) FLOAT SWITCH (N.C.) OPENS ON RISING LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH (N.O.) CLOSES ON RISING LEVEL LIMIT SWITCH (N.C.) LIMIT SWITCH (N.O.) TEMPERATURE SWITCH (N.C.) OPENS ON RISING TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE SWITCH (N.O.) CLOSES ON RISING TEMPERATURE TIMING RELAY, (N.C.) CONTACT TIME TO CLOSE (OFF DELAY TIMER) LIMIT SWITCH (N.O.) HELD CLOSED LIMIT SWITCH (N.C.) HELD OPEN SAIL SWITCH (N.C.) OPENS ON FLOW SAIL SWITCH (N.O.) CLOSES ON FLOW CABLE (MULTICONDUTOR SHIELDED) CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH DOOR OPERATED HANDLE CONTACT (N.O.) CONTACT (N.C.) PUSHBUTTON (N.O.) MOMENTARY CLOSE PUSHBUTTON (N.C.) MOMENTARY OPEN 2-POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH 3-POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH (HAND-OFF-AUTO) LOCKOUT STOP PUSHBUTTON DISCONNECT SWITCH (N.C.) DISCONNECT SWITCH (N.O.) EARTH GROUND CONNECTION GROUND ROD AND WELL THERMAL OVERLOAD FUSED TERMINAL BLOCK NEUTRAL BUS TERMINAL BLOCK FIELD TERMINATION MAIN LUG ONLY POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCK HEATER MOTOR STARTER CONTACTOR COIL GROUND BUS COIL/INDUCTOR POWER TRANSFORMER BUZZER HORN PUSH-PULL EMERGENCY STOP PUSHBUTTON ELAPSED TIME METER METER & CURRENT TRANSFORMER WATT HOUR METER AND SOCKET PHASE FAILURE RELAY TIME DELAY RELAY LATCHING RELAY CONTROL RELAY INTERNAL CONTACT (N.O.) SOLENOID RESISTOR DIODE METAL OXIDE VARISTOR INDICATING FUSE HOLDER AMPERE SIZE SHOWN LIGHTNING ARRESTER DRAWING REFERENCE LOCATION SYMBOL SHEET NOTE TAG EDGE CONNECTOR CONDUIT DESIGNATION INSTRUMENTATION I/O POINT REFERENCE PLC, I/O RACK, OR ENUNCIATOR PANEL EQUIPMENT TAG REFERENCE INTERNAL CONTACT (N.C.) EDGE CONNECTORS CAPACITOR BATTERY RVAT INTRINSICALLY SAFE RELAY MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH THERMAL TRIP, UNO AT CS FS
JLELPLTPCPSTS
TZSJBMHHH DS VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SPD SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER INV 2 10 AMPERES AMMETER ALTERNATING CURRENT AMPS INTERRUPTING CAPACITY BATTERY BC BATTERY CHARGER COMMON CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER CONTROL PANEL CONTROL RELAY, CORROSION RESISTANT CURRENT TRANSFORMER DIRECT CURRENT DUPLEX RECEPTACLE EXISTING EDGE CONNECTOR EXHAUST FAN ELAPSED TIME METER FUSE FUSE BLOCK FUTURE FILTER FLOAT SWITCH FULL VOLTAGE NON REVERSING FULL VOLTAGE REVERSING GROUND GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM HAND SWITCH INSTRUMENTATION CONTROL PANEL INTRINSICALLY SAFE RELAY INDICATOR INSTANTANEOUS KILOVOLT KILOVOLT AMPERES KILOWATT LIGHT EMITTING DIODE LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY LIGHTNING ARRESTER LOCAL CONTROL PANEL LIGHTNING PROTECTION UNIT LOCK OUT STOP LATCH RELAY LOAD SPLITTER MILLIAMPERES MAIN BREAKER MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTOR MOTOR OVERTEMPERATURE MOTOR MOISTURE SENSOR MOTOR STARTER NEUTRAL NON AUTOMATIC NEW NOT IN CONTRACT NAMEPLATE OVERTEMPERATURE OVERLOAD DEVICE PUSHBUTTON PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER DISCONNECT SWITCH SOLID-STATE STARTER RECEPTACLE SELECTOR SWITCH, SOFT STARTER SURGE PROTECTOR SURGE PROTECTOR DEVICE SOLENOID VALVE SWITCHBOARD TERMINAL BLOCK TIME DELAY RELAY TIMECLOCK THERMAL MAGNETIC TEMPERATURE SWITCH TWISTED SHIELDED PAIR TWISTED PAIR TYPICAL UNDERGROUND VOLTS, VOLTAGE VOLTMETER VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE WEATHERPROOF TRANSFORMER EXPLOSION PROOF PILOT LIGHT 1 PHASE/POWER FAIL RELAY PANEL POTENTIOMETER POWER PHASE MONITOR PAIR CABLE PRESSURE SWITCH POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER PUSH TO TEST POLYVINYL CHLORIDE POWER RUN RELAY REDUCED VOLTAGE RV AUTO-TRANSFORMER 3 PHASE MOTOR, INDICATING 10 HORSEPOWER NOTE: GENERAL LEGEND, PROJECT MAY NOT INCLUDE ALL SYMBOLS, REFERENCE SHEETS AND DETAILS FOR SUPPLEMENTAL LEGENDS. CONDUIT TURNED DOWN (INTO PAGE) CONDUIT STUB UP CONDUIT TURNED UP (TOWARDS READER) R COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER INDICATING MOTOR STARTER SIZE 2 UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ELECTRICAL LEGEND E0.1 35 UTILITY COMPARTMENT SES (SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION) 480V, 800A, 3Ø, 4W, 65 KAIC, NEMA 1 PULL SECTION M DRIVEN GROUND ROD UFER GROUND MAIN BKR, 3P, LSIG 800AF 800AT 600AF 600ATVFD 350 WELL PUMP (PMP-022100) (414 FLC) GND #4/0 GND 3P PORTABLE STANDBY GENERATOR 480V, 3Ø, 4W, 400 KW, 500 KVA, 600 A, 0.8 PF GENERATOR GND HMI OIL HTR #4/0 GND C 70A3P PANEL "A" 150A, 120/240V, 1Ø, 3W, 30 CKTS. XFMR "T1" 25KVA, 480- 120/240V PUMP STATION PLC PANEL P103 P200 100A3PSPD 120KA/Ø PHASE 20A3PSPARE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM NTS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - E.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E1.0 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM.dwg - Tab: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM - by mmills on 12/06/21 at 11:38:52 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 NEW VERNON POWER UTILITY TRANSFORMER PER ALL POWER CO. REQUIREMENTS MCC-PS (MOTOR CONTROL CENTER) 480V, 800A, 3Ø, 3W, 65 KAIC, NEMA 1 15A3P GENERATOR TAP BOX MCC LOAD SUMMARY EQUIPMENT NAME AMPS WELL 22 PUMP (350 HP) 414.0 25 KVA TRANSFORMER (MAX LOAD) 52.1 25% OF THE LARGEST MOTOR LOAD 103.5 TOTAL AMPS @ 480V 569.6 PERCENT CAPACITY 71.2 SPARE BUS BRACING CALCULATION (WORST CASE SCENARIO) MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER - 800 AMPS ASSUME 750 KVA UTILITY TRANSFORMER BUS BRACING SHALL BE MINIMUM 65 KAIC FROM EATON, SHORT CIRCUIT CALCULATIONS, TABLE 1 - 750 KVA TRANSFORMER EQUALS 28,672 SHORT CIRCUIT AMPS. ADD MOTOR CONTRIBUTION 28,672 + 4 x 414 = 30,328 AMPS ADD 10% FOR VOLTAGE FLUCTUATIONS. 30,580 x 1.10 = 33,361 AMPS COLD WATER GROUND BUILDING STEEL OR REBAR NEU GND 600 A GENERAL NOTES 1. NOT ALL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING ARE SHOWN ON THIS DIAGRAM. REFERENCE DRAWINGS IN THE ELECTRICAL SET AND ENTIRE PROJECT TO COMPLETELY UNDERSTAND THE SCOPE OF ELECTRICAL WORK. 2. DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND DO NOT REFLECT ACTUAL ROUTING. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL PULLPOINTS WHERE REQUIRED FOR PULLING TENSION AND MAINTAINING LESS THEN (4) 90 DEGREE BENDS. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND NOTIFY THE ENGINEER AND THE CITY OF ANY DISCREPANCIES FOUND. 4. EQUIPMENT AND WIRING METHODS IN THE CHEMICAL ROOM OR PUMP VAULT SHALL BE RATED FOR CORROSIVE LOCATIONS. EXPOSED EQUIPMENT IN THE CHEMICAL ROOM OR PUMP VAULT SHALL BE NEMA 4X OR CORROSION RESISTANT (PVC COATED OR STAINLESS STEEL). EXPOSED EQUIPMENT IN THE ELECTRICAL ROOM SHALL BE NEMA 1 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. OUTDOOR EXPOSED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEMA 3R UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM SAFE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH CAL/OSHA AND NFPA 70E STANDARDS. 6. FIBER OPTIC WIRING METHODS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC 770. 7. WHEN REQUIRED CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE STRUCTURAL DESIGN CALCULATIONS FOR MOUNTING AND ANCHORING OF FABRICATED ASSEMBLIES AND SUPPORT STRUCTURES, SIGNED AND SEALED BY A REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER (CIVIL/STRUCTURAL) CURRENTLY LICENSED IN THE SAME STATE AS THE FINAL INSTALLATION. CALCULATIONS SHALL INCLUDE SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS FOR THE LOCATION OF INSTALLATION. 8. ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL HAVE ARC-FLASH HAZARD WARNING LABELS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC 110.16. 9. VFD SHALL MEET ALL REQUIREMENTS OF IEEE 519 WITH USE OF EQUIPMENT SUCH AS ACTIVE FRONT END TECHNOLOGY OR FILTERS AS REQUIRED. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. NEU #4/0 BARE COPPER SYSTEM BONDING JUMPER BY UTILITY BY CONTRACTOR #4/0 GND GND #4/0 GND #4/0 GND INV #4/0 BARE COPPER GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION, "SES", 480V, 800A, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE, NEMA 1, 66" W x 90" H x 24" D. CONSTRUCTION NOTES: E1 E3 PORTABLE STANDBY GENERATOR 480V, 3Ø, 4W, 400 KW, 500 KVA, 600 A, 0.8 PF, CAMLOCK CONNECTIONS, TIER 4F, TOWABLE, ON TRAILER HITCH, CUMMINS OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 288" L x 102" W. E4 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER "MCC-PS", 480V, 800A, 3 PHASE, 3 WIRE, NEMA 1, TYPE ALLEN BRADLEY CENTERLINE 2100, EATON FREEDOM OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 60" W x 90" H x 20" D. E5 PUMP STATION PLC PANEL, PAINTED STEEL, HEAVY DUTY, FREESTANDING, NEMA 12, TYPE HUBBELL OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 36" W x 90" H x 20" D. E6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE, FOR WELL PUMP, 480V, 350 HP, ACTIVE FRONT END DRIVE, IP 54, TYPE ALLEN BRADLEY 755TL OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 63" W x 90" H x 28" D. E7 25 KVA DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER, 480-120/240V, 1 PHASE, 3 WIRE, WITH PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CIRCUIT PROTECTION, #6 INSULATED GROUND TO GROUND BUS, MOUNTED INSIDE MCC-PS. E8 PANELBOARD "A", 120/240V, SINGLE PHASE, 3 WIRE, 30 CIRCUITS, 225 AMP FRAME, 150 AMP MAIN BREAKER, BOLT ON TYPE, MOUNTED INSIDE MCC-PS. E9 GENERATOR TAP BOX, 800 AMP, 600 V, 3 PHASE, 3 POLE, NEMA 3R, STANCHION MOUNTED, CAMLOCK, TYPE SQUARE D SPQTB608RS OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. E10 POWER QUALITY METER, ETHERNET, TYPE ALLEN-BRADLEY POWER MONITOR 1000, 1408-EM3A-ENT OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. E11 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE, MINIMUM 120 KA PER PHASE, INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. E12 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR, #4/0 BARE COPPER, CONNECT TO GROUND RING THROUGH APPROVED MEANS, SEE DETAILS AND GROUNDING PLAN. E13 GROUND AND BOND EQUIPMENT OR ENCLOSURE PER DETAILS AND GROUNDING PLAN, SEE SHEET E3.0 AND E7.0. E15 E13 E13 E13 E13 E15 E15 E13 E14 E11 E13 E16 REFERENCE UTILITY DRAWINGS FOR INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ON CABLING/CONDUIT, JUNCTION BOXES, ETC. FROM THE EXISTING UTILITY POLE TO THE SERVICE ENTRANCE. E17 UTILITY TRANSFORMER, PER CITY OF VERNON REQUIRMENTS, 480V, PAD MOUNTED, SEE DETAIL "A" - SHEET E7.2, FOR REFERENCE. E18 BOOSTER PUMP "PMP-022100" PER MECHANICAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. GROUND PUMP MOTOR CASING. E18 E19 STUB UP CONDUIT 6" ABOVE GROUND, MOUNT TO CONCRETE PAD. E19 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM E1.0 36 E16 E12 E9 E3 E1 UPS E4 P100 P102 E6 E5 P110 SEE CONDUIT SCHEDULE, PLAN LAYOUTS, AND PANEL LOAD FOR ADDITIONAL CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN ON THIS DIAGRAM. P111 E20 TEMPORARY CABLE FOR USE WITH PORTABLE GENERATOR. E20 PUTIL E15 P111A "A-1" #4/0 GND METAL FENCING #4/0 BARE COPPER GROUND RING M E10 EXISTING UTILITY COMPANY POLE SEE UTILITY REFERENCE SHEET REF1 E17 #4/0 BARE COPPER MAIN BONDING JUMPER P101 GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER SHALL BE LOCKABLE IN THE OPEN POSITION, IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC 445.18(B). E14 E7 E8 800A3P MAIN BKR E2 CONDUIT STUB UP LOCATION. STUB UPS SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN 28" x 14" AREA CENTERED ON 38" x 24" CONCRETE PAD. E2
1. BREAKERS SHALL BE SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT. WHERE A FULLY RATED SYSTEM IS NOT POSSIBLE, THE PANELBOARD SHALL BE SERIES RATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC 110.22(C) AND 240.86(B). 2. PROVIDE UPDATED, COMPLETE, AND ACCURATE TYPED PANELBOARD CIRCUIT DIRECTORIES AT THE COMPLETION OF WORK. 3. CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE THERMAL MAGNETIC, TRIP INDICATING. 4. MULTI-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL COMMON TRIP MECHANISM. 5. CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER AS THE PANELBOARD. 6. PANELBOARDS SHALL BE BOLT-ON TYPE. 7. BREAKER SHALL HAVE FIXED LOCKS WHEN REQUIRED BY NEC CODE. 8. PANELBOARDS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SPARE BREAKERS AS INDICATED. 9. BOTH ENDS OF CONDUCTORS SHALL BE LABELED WITH THE PANEL NAME AND CIRCUIT. 10. EQUIPMENT FED FROM PANELBOARDS SHALL BE LABELED WITH THEIR CIRCUIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC 110.22 (A). NOTES:
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - E.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E1.1 PANEL SCHEDULE.dwg - Tab: PANEL SCHEDULE - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 4:50:47 PM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 PANEL SCHEDULE E1.1 37 PANEL "A" VOLTAGE: 120/240 VAC VOLT AMPS MAIN BKR: 150 A SCCR: 10 KAIC PANEL BUS: 225A LOAD DESCRIPTION VA CB BKR PHASE A PHASE B BKR CB VA LOAD DESCRIPTION PLC PANEL 2400 30/1 1 3900 2 20/2 1500 OUTDOOR AIR CONDITIONER CHLORINE ROOM EXHAUST FAN 600 15/2 3 2100
4 1500 600
5 1400
6 15/2 800 MOTOR OPERATED GATE CATHODIC PROTECTION 600 20/1 7 1400
8 800 SPARE 15/1
9 180 10 20/1 180 OUTDOOR GFCI RECEPTACLE (FENCE) MOTOR OPERATED VALVE "V-022123" (FIXED LOCK) 600 15/2 11 850 12 20/1 250 ELECTRICAL ROOM LIGHTS* 600 13 780 14 20/1 180 ELECTRICAL ROOM RECEPTACLE MOTOR HEATER (VIA VFD PANEL) 600 20/1 15 780 16 20/1 180 OUTDOOR GFCI RECEPTACLE (BLDG) OUTDOOR BUILDING LIGHTS* 45 20/1 17 170 18 20/1 125 CHLORINE ROOM LIGHTS* CHEMICAL INJECTION PUMP RECEP. 400 20/1 19 580 20 20/1 180 CHLORINE ROOM RECEPTACLE OUTDOOR WELL LIGHT* 44 15/1 21 44 22 20/1 SPARE SPARE 20/1 23 0 24 20/1 SPARE SPARE 20/1 25
0 26 20/1 SPARE SPARE 15/1 27
0 28 15/1 SPARE SPARE 15/1 29
0 30 15/1 SPARE PHASE A PHASE B VA/PHASE SUBTOTAL 6474 5710 1Φ, 3W A/LEG (SUBTOTAL) 54.0 47.6 10,000 AIC BREAKERS VA (SUBTOTAL) 12184 NEMA 1 25% OF LARGEST INDUCTIVE LOAD 375 375 GRAND TOTAL (AMPS) 53.9 * INDICATES LOAD CALCULATED AT 125% PERCENT CAPACITY 35.9% MOUNTED IN MCC 10'-0" 8'-0"
2'-0" 2'-0" 2'-0"
3'-0"
SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS S 27'-0" JB JB JB JB JB JB EXISTING POWER POLE CHEMICAL INJECTION PUMPS, PMP-022101 AND PMP-022102, PER MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS, 120V, PLUG INTO RECEPTACLE, SEE LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE PLAN. FLOW METER "FIT-022140", PER MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS, 120 VAC, 4-20mA, REMOTE TRANSMITTER FIELD MOUNTED ON STANCHION NEAR PIPE. ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVE, V-022123, 240V, SINGLE PHASE, INSTALL WARNING LABEL ON VALVE ACTUATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY GIVING THE LOCATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER PROVIDING POWER. MOTOR STARTER FOR EXHAUST FAN, 240 VAC, 1 HP, SINGLE PHASE, NEMA 4X, WALL MOUNTED, TYPE GREENHECK, PART NUMBER MS-1P, OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. FLOW METER "FIT-022141", PER MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS, PROVIDED BY CITY, COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH DEVICE SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS. AIR CONDITIONER, OUTDOOR UNIT, 240V, SINGLE PHASE, COORDINATE TYPE WITH BUILDING MANUFACTURER. CONNECT TO NEMA 3R, OUTDOOR DISCONNECT SWITCH. MOTORIZED GATE OPERATOR, 240V, SINGLE PHASE, HEAVY DUTY, INDUSTRIAL, COMPATIBLE WITH KEY PADS, AUX. RELAY CONTACTS. CONSTRUCTION NOTES: WELL #22 POWER PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG; B626-36x24v - E.dwg w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E2.0 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN.dwg - Tab: E2.0 - by mmills on 12/06/21 at 11:50:12 AM Dimscale = 96; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN E2.0 38 E1 E3E4E5E6E8E9 E16 E17 E18 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P2", 11" X 18", MAINTAIN 6" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM FENCE, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1. UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P3", 11" X 18", MAINTAIN 6" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM FENCE, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1. E27 E28 P101 PUTIL E9 P102 E17 P103 P110 P203 E21 P200 "A-1" P201 "A-2, A-4" E29 P211 P212 "A-6, A-8" E22 E31 E6 E26 E18 E3 E5 E25 P111 P203A P111A E24 P210A P206 P207 P204 P210 E4 P211A E27 P209 E23 P208 P209A "A-11, A-13" P202 "A-3, A-5" "A-15" SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION, "SES", 480V, 800A, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE, NEMA 1, 66" W x 90" H x 24" D. PORTABLE STANDBY GENERATOR 480V, 3Ø, 4W, 400 KW, 500 KVA, 600 A, 0.8 PF, CAMLOCK CONNECTIONS, TIER 4F, TOWABLE, ON TRAILER HITCH, CUMMINS OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 288" L x 102" W. MOTOR CONTROL CENTER "MCC-PS", 480V, 800A, 3 PHASE, 3 WIRE, NEMA 1, TYPE ALLEN BRADLEY CENTERLINE 2100, EATON FREEDOM OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 60" W x 90" H x 20" D. PUMP STATION PLC PANEL, PAINTED STEEL, HEAVY DUTY, FREESTANDING, NEMA 12, TYPE HUBBELL OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 36" W x 90" H x 20" D. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE, FOR WELL PUMP, 480V, 350 HP, ACTIVE FRONT END DRIVE, IP 54, TYPE ALLEN BRADLEY 755TL OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 63" W x 90" H x 28" D. PANELBOARD "A", 120/240V, SINGLE PHASE, 3 WIRE, 30 CIRCUITS, 225 AMP FRAME, 150 AMP MAIN BREAKER, BOLT ON TYPE, MOUNTED INSIDE MCC-PS. GENERATOR TAP BOX, 800 AMP, 600 V, 3 PHASE, 3 POLE, NEMA 3R, STANCHION MOUNTED, CAMLOCK, TYPE SQUARE D SPQTB608RS OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. REFERENCE UTILITY DRAWINGS FOR INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ON CABLING/CONDUIT, JUNCTION BOXES, ETC. FROM THE EXISTING UTILITY POLE TO THE SERVICE ENTRANCE. UTILITY TRANSFORMER, PER CITY OF VERNON REQUIRMENTS, 480V, PAD MOUNTED, SEE DETAIL "A" - SHEET E7.2, FOR REFERENCE. BOOSTER PUMP "PMP-022100" PER MECHANICAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. GROUND PUMP MOTOR CASING. E19 STUB UP CONDUIT 6" ABOVE GROUND, MOUNT TO CONCRETE PAD. E30 E31 E8 E19 EXHAUST FAN, SINGLE PHASE, NEMA 4X, PER MECHANICAL PLANS. NOTES:
4 2
0 4
8 E30 E28 E29 UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P1", 11" X 18", MAINTAIN 6" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM FENCE, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1. 1. DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY. THE EXACT LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT, MOUNTING HEIGHTS, METHODS OF SUPPORT AND CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE COORDINATED AND DETERMINED IN THE FIELD. 2. AS SURVEYED CONDUIT RUNS SHOULD BE COMPLETED WITHIN THE CODE REQUIRED 360 DEGREE BEND LIMIT. IF FOR ANY REASON THIS CANNOT BE ACHIEVED, A PULL OR JUNCTION BOX MUST BE INSERTED IN THE IMPACTED CONDUIT RUN BY THE CONTRACTOR. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE BUILDING CIRCUITS, AND UNDERGROUND VS ABOVEGROUND CONDUIT ROUTING WITH BUILDING MANUFACTURER FOR STUB UP LOCATIONS AND ABOVE GROUND CONDUIT ROUTING OPTIONS. 4. GATE MOTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. INSTALL LOOPS, PHOTO SENSORS, AND ENTRY/EXIT KEYPAD PER PLANS AND MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL MOUNT MCC AND SES AT LEAST 42" APART, IN ACCORDANCE WITH WORKING SPACE REQUIREMENTS OF NEC TABLE 110.26(A)(1). 6. TOWABLE GENERATOR SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE CITY AND BE EQUIPPED WITH DETACHABLE TRAILER HITCH TO ALLOW FOR CLEARANCES WHILE PARKED. 7. TEMPORARY CABLES TO THE GENERATOR SHALL BE INSTALLED AND PROTECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS AND NEC 590. P204A E48 P205 "A-7" CATHODIC PROTECTION RECTIFIER APPROXIMATE LOCATION. SEE SHEETS CP1.0 - CP1.5 FOR DETAILS. E48 E16 SEE UTILITY REFERENCE SHEET REF2 STUB OUT PER VERNON UTILITY PLAN (SEE SHEET REF 2) STUB OUT PER VERNON UTILITY PLAN (SEE SHEET REF 2) E1 P100 E2 CONDUIT STUB UP LOCATION. STUB UPS SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN 28" x 14" AREA CENTERED ON 38" x 24" CONCRETE PAD. E2 10'-0" 8'-0"
2'-0" 2'-0" 2'-0"
3'-0"
SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS S ZS 27'-0" ZS J
J JB JB JB JB JBJB JB JB EXISTING POWER POLE CHEMICAL INJECTION PUMPS, PMP-022101 AND PMP-022102, PER MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS, 120V, PLUG INTO RECEPTACLE, SEE LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE PLAN. FLOW METER "FIT-022140", PER MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS, 120 VAC, 4-20mA, REMOTE TRANSMITTER FIELD MOUNTED ON STANCHION NEAR PIPE. ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVE, V-022123, 240V, SINGLE PHASE, INSTALL WARNING LABEL ON VALVE ACTUATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY GIVING THE LOCATION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER PROVIDING POWER. FLOW METER "FIT-022141", PER MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS, PROVIDED BY CITY, COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH DEVICE SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS. MOTORIZED GATE OPERATOR, 240V, SINGLE PHASE, HEAVY DUTY, INDUSTRIAL, COMPATIBLE WITH KEY PAD, AUX. RELAY CONTACTS. CONSTRUCTION NOTES: WELL #22 CONTROL PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG; B626-36x24v - E.dwg w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E2.1 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PLAN.dwg - Tab: E2.1 - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 4:51:04 PM Dimscale = 96; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PLAN E2.1 39 E1 E3E4E5E6 E16 E18 E22 E25 E26 E27 E28 C001 C002 C101 E41 E25 C121 C118 E22 E33 E34 E6 E26 E18 E3 E24 C114A E10 C119 E27C116B E23 C116A C120A SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION, "SES", 480V, 800A, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE, NEMA 1, 66" W x 90" H x 24" D. PORTABLE STANDBY GENERATOR 480V, 3Ø, 4W, 400 KW, 500 KVA, 600 A, 0.8 PF, CAMLOCK CONNECTIONS, TIER 4F, TOWABLE, ON TRAILER HITCH, CUMMINS OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 288" L x 102" W. MOTOR CONTROL CENTER "MCC-PS", 480V, 800A, 3 PHASE, 3 WIRE, NEMA 1, TYPE ALLEN BRADLEY CENTERLINE 2100, EATON FREEDOM OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 60" W x 90" H x 20" D. PUMP STATION PLC PANEL, PAINTED STEEL, HEAVY DUTY, FREESTANDING, NEMA 12, TYPE HUBBELL OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 36" W x 90" H x 20" D. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE, FOR WELL PUMP, 480V, 350 HP, ACTIVE FRONT END DRIVE, IP 54, TYPE ALLEN BRADLEY 755TL OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 63" W x 90" H x 28" D. REFERENCE UTILITY DRAWINGS FOR INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ON CABLING/CONDUIT, JUNCTION BOXES, ETC. FROM THE EXISTING UTILITY POLE TO THE SERVICE ENTRANCE. BOOSTER PUMP "PMP-022100" PER MECHANICAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. GROUND PUMP MOTOR CASING. UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C1", 11" X 18", MAINTAIN 6" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM FENCE, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1. E32 NOTES: 1. DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY. THE EXACT LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT, MOUNTING HEIGHTS, METHODS OF SUPPORT AND CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE COORDINATED AND DETERMINED IN THE FIELD. 2. AS SURVEYED CONDUIT RUNS SHOULD BE COMPLETED WITHIN THE CODE REQUIRED 360 DEGREE BEND LIMIT. IF FOR ANY REASON THIS CANNOT BE ACHIEVED, A PULL OR JUNCTION BOX MUST BE INSERTED IN THE IMPACTED CONDUIT RUN BY THE CONTRACTOR. 3. GATE MOTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. INSTALL LOOPS, PHOTO SENSORS, AND ENTRY/EXIT KEYPAD PER PLANS AND MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE BUILDING CIRCUITS, AND UNDERGROUND VS ABOVEGROUND CONDUIT ROUTING WITH BUILDING MANUFACTURER FOR STUB UP LOCATIONS AND ABOVE GROUND CONDUIT ROUTING OPTIONS. 4 2
0 4
8 E10 POWER QUALITY METER, ETHERNET, TYPE ALLEN-BRADLEY POWER MONITOR 1000, 1408-EM3A-ENT OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. E11 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE, MINIMUM 120 KA PER PHASE, INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. E33 E34 UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C2", 11" X 18", MAINTAIN 6" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM FENCE, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1. UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C3", 11" X 18", MAINTAIN 6" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM FENCE, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1. E23 E24 MOTOR STARTER FOR EXHAUST FAN, 240 VAC, 1HP, SINGLE PHASE, NEMA 4X, WALL MOUNTED, TYPE GREENHECK, PART NUMBER MS-1P, OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. EXHAUST FAN, SINGLE PHASE, NEMA 4X, PER MECHANICAL PLANS. E35 E36 PUMP PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, "PIT-022150", 24 VDC, 4-20mA, TYPE ROSEMOUNT, PART NUMBER 3051CG4A22A1AM5, OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. PUMP DISCHARGE HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH, "PSH-022151", NC/NO CONTACT, 5-250 PSI OPERATING RANGE, TYPE SQUARE D, PART NUMBER 9012G, OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. SYSTEM PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, "PIT-022152", 24 VDC, 4-20mA, TYPE ROSEMOUNT, PART NUMBER 3051CG4A22A1AM5, OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. E37 E38 E39 NAOCL TANK LEVEL TRANSMITTER, "LIT-022181", 24 VDC, 4-20mA, TYPE ROSEMOUNT SERIES 3100 OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. INTRUSION SWITCH "NS-022171A", ELECTRICAL ROOM DOOR, NEMA 4, NC/NO CONTACT, TYPE EATON, OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. E40 INTRUSION SWITCH "NS-022171B", CHEMICAL ROOM DOOR, NEMA 4X, NC/NO CONTACT, TYPE EATON OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. E42 E43 E44 E45 E46 UNDERGROUND FIBER PULL BOX "PB-F2", 11" X 17", MAINTAIN 12" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM POWER CONDUIT, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1, PER VPU APPROVAL. GATE KEYPAD, STANCHION MOUNTED, TYPE DOORKING 1500 SEREIS OR VPU APPROVED EQUAL. CONTROL JUNCTION BOX "JB-C2", NEMA 4X, STAINLESS STEEL, 16" H X 12" W X 6" D, PADLOCKABLE, STUB UP 6" ABOVE GROUND, MOUNT TO CONCRETE PAD. WELL LEVEL TRANSDUCER, "LT-022180", 4-20mA, TYPE DRUCK PTX 1230 OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, SEE MECHANICAL PLANS. EMERGENCY STOP PUSH BUTTON, LOCKABLE, OUTDOOR RATED, STANCHION MOUNTED TO CONCRETE PAD. C003 C104 C105 CONTROL FIBER CONDUIT C102 C103 E40 C119A C119B E43 E28 E43 C108 C107A C107 C115A C117A C109 C110 C111 C117B E37 C113A C112 C112A E36 C113 E46 E4 E11 E38 E16 E42 C114B E45 C114C C115B E47 CONTROL JUNCTION BOX "JB-C1", NEMA 4X, STAINLESS STEEL, 16" H X 12" W X 6" D, PADLOCKABLE, STANCHION MOUNTED. C120 C117 C116 C115 C114 E35 C100 E44 C106 C100A E16 SEE UTILITY REFERENCE SHEET REF2 OUTDOOR RATED CABLE (TEMPORARY) INSTALL 1-1.5" CONDUIT TO EXISTING POWER POLE W/ PULL ROPE FOR FUTURE CABLE. EXISTING POWER POLE E41 UNDERGROUND FIBER PULL BOX "PB-F1", 11" X 17", MAINTAIN 12" MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM POWER CONDUIT, SEE DETAIL "B" AND "C", SHEET E7.1, PER VPU APPROVAL. E1 E32 E47 E5 E39 E16 E2 CONDUIT STUB UP LOCATION. STUB UPS SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN 28" x 14" AREA CENTERED ON 38" x 24" CONCRETE PAD. E2
SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS S NOTES: 1. CONDUCTORS FOR HOME RUN CIRCUITS FOR LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLES SHALL BE #10 AWG MINIMUM SIZE. 2. COORDINATE LIGHTING WITH BUILDING MANUFACTURER. 3. COORDINATE RECEPTACLES WITH BUILDING MANUFACTURER. 4. RECEPTACLES WITH GFCI PROTECTION SHALL BE PROTECTED BY INTEGRAL RECEPTACLE GFCI PROTECTION OR GFCI CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PANEL A. 5. ALL LIGHTING AND AND RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS SHALL HAVE A GROUND WIRE AND BE IN MINIMUM 3/4" CONDUIT. 6. EQUIPMENT AND WIRING METHODS IN THE CHEMICAL ROOM SHALL BE RATED FOR CORROSIVE LOCATIONS, ENCLOSURES SHALL BE NEMA 4X. EQUIPMENT IN THE ELECTRICAL ROOM SHALL BE NEMA 1 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. OUTDOOR EXPOSED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEMA 3R; UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG; B626-36x24v - E.dwg w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E2.2 LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE PLAN.dwg - Tab: E2.2 - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 3:07:20 PM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE PLAN E2.2 40 LEGEND: HASH MARKS INDICATING NUMBER OF #12 CURRENT CARRYING CONDUCTORS. GROUND CONDUCTOR(S) NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY, ALL CONDUITS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM #12 GROUND AND SIZED PER CODE REQUIREMENTS. 120V, 20A GFCI DUPLEX WEATHER-RESISTANT RECEPTACLE MOUNTED AT 18" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. WP = WEATHERPROOF WHILE IN USE COVER, EXTRA DUTY CR = CORROSION RESISTANT RECEPTACLE cr LINEAR WASHDOWN 8FT, 100W, 5000K LED, 120-277V, 0-10V DIMMER. MF'R: RAB, PN SHARK 8-100W/D10 (OR APPROVED EQUAL). DIAGONAL LINE INDICATES W/ BATTERY BACKUP. OUTDOOR FLOODLIGHT, 35W, 5000K LED, 120V, TYPE RAB X17FA35 OR APPROVED EQUAL. 120 VAC, 20 AMP, WALL-MOUNTED LIGHT SWITCH @ 42" AFF. CR = CORROSION RESISTANT SWITCH S LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE PLAN A-10 A-12
S
S cr wp wp A-19 A-20 A-12 A-18 cr wp A-18 A-12 wpA-16 A-21 A-17 A-17 wp MOUNT LIGHT TO POST A-14 cr OUTDOOR LIGHT, WALL-MOUNTED, 18W, 5000K LED, 120V, TYPE LITHONIA TWS LED 150K 120PE OR APPROVED EQUAL. COORDINATE WITH BUILDING MANUFACTURER. cr
SD SD SD SD SD SD SS SS SS SS
S
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626 - Grounding Plan.dwg; B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG; B626-36x24v - E.dwg w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E3.0 GROUNDING PLAN.dwg - Tab: GROUNDING PLAN - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 4:46:52 PM Dimscale = 60; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 GROUNDING PLAN E3.0 41 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: EXOTHERMIC WELD PER DETAIL "A" - E7.0. #4/0 BARE GROUND RING, MINIMUM 30" BELOW GRADE. GROUND INSPECTION ROD PER DETAIL "E" - E7.0. GROUND ROD PER DETAIL "B" - E7.0. EQUIPMENT GROUND BAR. GROUND TO REBAR PER DETAIL "C" - E7.0. NOTES: 1. GROUND FLOW METER PER MANUFACTURER. 2. GROUND AND BOND ALL EQUIPMENT AND ENCLOSURES PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS AND NEC 250. 3. ALL METALLIC PIECES INCLUDING RAILINGS, FENCES, MOTOR FRAMES, DOORS, OR OTHER METAL PERSONNEL MAY COME IN CONTACT WITH, SHALL BE EFFECTIVELY GROUNDED. GROUND WATER PIPES. GROUND TO FENCELINE PER DETAIL "H" - E7.0. GROUND MOTOR FRAME, PROTECT GROUND CABLE IN 1" SCH 80 PVC. #2/0 BARE COPPER, EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR (TYP). E60 TYP. E60 E61 E62 E63 E64 E65 E66 E67 E68 E69 E62 E69 TYP. E67 E61 TYP. E63 E68 E66 E64 E65 E67 TYP. TYP. GROUNDING PLAN SCALE: 1" = 5'-0" 5 2.5
0 5 10 TYP. TYP.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - E.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E4.0 CABLE & CONDUIT SCHED.dwg - Tab: CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 2:54:11 PM Dimscale = 20; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 CABLE AND CONDUIT SCHEDULE E4.0 42 NOTES: 1. ALL CONDUIT LOCATED UNDERGROUND SHALL BE CONCRETE ENCASED IN PVC SCHEDULE 40, MINIMUM 24" COVER, AND ALL ABOVE GROUND CONDUIT SHALL BE PVC COATED RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL. 2. ALL CONDUIT & BENDS TRANSITIONING FROM ABOVE GROUND TO BELOW SHALL BE PVC COATED RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL. 3. LFMC (LIQUID FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT) SHALL NOT EXCEED THE LENGTHS AS SPECIFIED IN NEC 350.30(A) EXCEPTION NO. 2. 4. AS SURVEYED CONDUIT RUNS SHOULD BE COMPLETED WITHIN THE CODE REQUIRED 360 DEGREE BEND LIMIT. IF FOR ANY REASON THIS CANNOT BE ACHIEVED A PULL BOX MUST BE INSERTED IN THE IMPACTED CONDUIT RUN BY THE CONTRACTOR. POWER CONDUIT WIRE SCHEDULE CONDUIT WIRE* FROM TO REMARKS NO . SIZE POWER GROUND PUTIL TBD TBD TBD UTILITY TRANSFORMER SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION "SES" INSTALLED AND SIZED PER UTILITY P100 (3) 2.5" 3 - 300 kcmil 1 - #4/0 SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION "SES" MCC-PS P101 (3) 2.5" - - SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION "SES" CONDUIT STUB UP AREA NORTH WALL CAP END WITH PULL STRING P102 (3) 2.5" - - GENERATOR TAP BOX CONDUIT STUB UP AREA NORTH WALL CAP END WITH PULL STRING P103 (3) 2.5" - - CONDUIT STUB UP AREA NORTH WALL MCC-PS CAP END WITH PULL STRING P110 (2) 2.5" 3 - 350 kcmil 1 - #1 MCC-PS VFD BREAKER VFD - PUMP 1 (PMP-022100) P111 (2) 3" 3 - 350 kcmil 3 - #2 VFD - PUMP 1 (PMP-022100) PUMP 1 (PMP-022100) 480V STUB UPS 2000 V VFD CABLE P111A (2) 3" 3 - 350 kcmil 3 - #2 PUMP 1 (PMP-022100) 480V STUB UPS PUMP 1 (PMP-022100) 2000 V VFD CABLE; LFMC TO MOTOR P200 1" 2 - #10 1 - #10 PANEL A, CIRCUIT 1 PLC CONTROL PANEL P201 1" 2 - #10 1 - #10 PANEL A, CIRCUITS 2 AND 4 AIR CONDITIONER DISCONNECT SWITCH P202 1" 2 - #12 1 - #12 PANEL A, CIRCUIT 15 VFD - PUMP 1 (PMP-022100) MOTOR HEATER P203 1" 6 - #12 1 - #12 VFD - PUMP 1 (PMP-022100) PUMP 1 (PMP-022100) 120V STUB UP 2-#12 FOR HEATER, 4-#12 OVERTEMP P203A 1" 6 - #12 1 - #12 PUMP 1 (PMP-022100) 120V STUB UP PUMP 1 (PMP-022100) LFMC TO MOTOR P204 1" 2 - #10 1 - #10 PANEL A, CIRCUITS 3 AND 5 MOTOR STARTER - CHEMICAL ROOM EXHAUST FAN P204A 1" 2 - #10 1 - #10 MOTOR STARTER - CHEMICAL ROOM EXHAUST FAN CHEMICAL ROOM EXHAUST FAN LFMC TO EXHAUST FAN P205 1" 2 - #12 1 - #12 PANEL A, CIRCUIT 7 CATHODIC PROTECTION RECTIFIER SEE CATHODIC PROTECTION PLANS P206 1.5" 2 - #12 1 - #12 PANEL A, CIRCUITS 11, 13 UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P1" P207 1" - - UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P1" FLOW METER "FIT-022141" STUB UP STUB UP AND CAP END WITH PULL STRING; FOR FUTURE 120V FLOWMETER POWER P208 1" - - UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P1" FLOW METER "FIT-022140" STUB UP STUB UP AND CAP END WITH PULL STRING; FOR FUTURE 120V FLOWMETER POWER P209 1" 2 - #12 1 - #12 UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P1" ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVE "V-022123" STUB UP FROM PANEL A CIRCUITS 11 AND 13 P209A 0.75" 2 - #12 1 - #12 ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVE "V-022123" STUB UP ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVE "V-022123" LFMC TO MOTOR VALVE ASSEMBLY P210 2" - - MCC-PS PANEL A SECTION UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P1" CAP END WITH PULL STRING P210A 2" - - UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P1" UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P2" CAP END WITH PULL STRING P211 1.5" 2 - #10 1 - #10 PANEL A, CIRCUITS 6 AND 8 UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P3" P211A 1.5" 2 - #10 1 - #10 UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P3" MOTORIZED GATE OPERATOR P212 2" - - MCC-PS PANEL A SECTION UNDERGROUND POWER PULL BOX "PB-P3" CAP END WITH PULL STRING CONTROL CONDUIT WIRE SCHEDULE CONDUIT WIRE* FROM TO REMARKS NO . SIZE CONTROL C001 3" FIBER OPTIC EXISTING POLE WITH NEW UTILITY TRANSFORMER UNDERGROUND FIBER PULL BOX "PB-F1" C002 3" FIBER OPTIC UNDERGROUND FIBER PULL BOX "PB-F1" UNDERGROUND FIBER PULL BOX "PB-F2" C003 3" FIBER OPTIC UNDERGROUND FIBER PULL BOX "PB-F2" PLC CONTROL PANEL C100 1.5" 1 - #18 TSP, 10 - #14 PLC CONTROL PANEL CONTROL JUNCTION BOX "JB-C1" FOR GENERATOR STATUS C100A - 1 - #18 TSP, 10 - #14 CONTROL JUNCTION BOX "JB-C1" PORTABLE STANDBY GENERATOR TEMPORARY OUTDOOR RATED CABLE, SPLICE TO WIRES IN JUNCTION BOX C101 1" - CONDUIT STUB UP AREA NORTH WALL PLC CONTROL PANEL CAP END WITH PULL STRING C102 1.5" 2 - #18 TSP, 16 - #14 VFD - PUMP 1 (PMP-022100) PLC CONTROL PANEL FOR VFD HARDWIRE STATUS C103 1" 1 - ETHERNET VFD - PUMP 1 (PMP-022100) PLC CONTROL PANEL FOR VFD COMMUNICATION C104 1.5" 8 - #14 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE, IN MCC-PS PLC CONTROL PANEL C105 1" 1 - ETHERNET POWER QUALITY METER, IN MCC-PS PLC CONTROL PANEL VFD METER C106 0.75" 2 - #14 ELECTRICAL ROOM INTRUSION SWITCH "NS-022171A" PLC CONTROL PANEL WIRE IN SERIES W/ CHEM. ROOM INTRUSION SWITCH C107 1" 1 - #18TSP NAOCL TANK LEVEL TRANSMITTER, "LIT-022181" NAOCL TANK LEVEL TRANSMITTER, "LIT-022181" STUB UP C107A 0.75" 1 - #18TSP NAOCL TANK LEVEL TRANSMITTER, "LIT-022181" STUB UP PLC CONTROL PANEL C108 0.75" 2 - #14 CHEMICAL ROOM INTRUSION SWITCH "NS-022171B" PLC CONTROL PANEL WIRE IN SERIES W/ ELEC. ROOM INTRUSION SWITCH C109 1" 6 - #14 MOTOR STARTER - CHEMICAL ROOM EXHAUST FAN PLC CONTROL PANEL C110 1.5" 4 - #18 TSP, 12 - #14 CHEMICAL PUMP INJECTION PUMP CONTROL BOX PLC CONTROL PANEL FOR CHEMICAL PUMP STATUS C111 1" 2 - #14 MOTOR EMERGENCY STOP PLC CONTROL PANEL C112 1" 2 - #14 PLC CONTROL PANEL HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH, "PSH-022151" STUB UP C112A 0.75" 2 - #14 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH, "PSH-022151" STUB UP HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH, "PSH-022151" LFMC TO SWITCH C113 1" 1 - #18TSP PLC CONTROL PANEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, "PIT-022150" STUB UP C113A 0.75" 1 - #18TSP PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, "PIT-022150" STUB UP PUMP PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, "PIT-022150" LFMC TO TRANSMITTER C114 1" 2 - #18TSP, 2 - #14 PLC CONTROL PANEL UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C1" C114A 1" 2 - #18TSP, 2 - #14 UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C1" CONTROL JUNCTION BOX "JB-C2" C114B 0.75" 1 - #18TSP CONTROL JUNCTION BOX "JB-C2" WELL LEVEL TRANSDUCER "LT-022180" LFMC TO LEVEL TRANSMITTER C114C 0.75" 1 - #18TSP, 2 - #14 CONTROL JUNCTION BOX "JB-C2" FLOW METER "FIT-022141" LFMC TO FLOW METER, INCLUDES 24VDC FLOWMETER POWER C115 1" 1 - #18TSP, 4 - #14 PLC CONTROL PANEL UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C1" C115A 1" 1 - #18TSP, 4 - #14 UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C1" FLOW METER "FIT-022140" STUB UP INCLUDES 24VDC FLOWMETER POWER C115B 0.75" 1 - #18TSP, 4 - #14 FLOW METER "FIT-022140" STUB UP FLOW METER "FIT-022140" LFMC TO FLOWMETER, INCLUDES 24VDC FLOWMETER POWER C116 1" 8 - #14 PLC CONTROL PANEL UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C1" C116A 1" 8 - #14 UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C1" ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVE "V-022123" STUB UP C116B 0.75" 8 - #14 ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVE "V-022123" STUB UP ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVE "V-022123" LFMC TO MOTOR VALVE ASSEMBLY C117 1" 1 - #18TSP PLC CONTROL PANEL UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C1" C117A 1" 1 - #18TSP UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C1" SYSTEM PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, "PIT-022152" STUB UP C117B 0.75" 1 - #18TSP SYSTEM PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, "PIT-022152" STUB UP SYSTEM PRESSURE TRANSMITTER, "PIT-022152" LFMC TO TRANSMITTER C118 1.5" 10 - #14 PLC CONTROL PANEL UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C3" C119 1.5" 10 - #14 UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C1" MOTORIZED GATE OPERATOR C119A 1" 4 - #14 MOTORIZED GATE OPERATOR GATE ENTRY KEYPAD C119B 1" 4 - #14 MOTORIZED GATE OPERATOR GATE EXIT KEYPAD C120 (2) 1.5" - PLC CONTROL PANEL UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C1" CAP END WITH PULL STRING C120A (2) 1.5" - UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C1" UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C2" CAP END WITH PULL STRING C121 (2) 1.5" - PLC CONTROL PANEL UNDERGROUND CONTROL PULL BOX "PB-C3" CAP END WITH PULL STRING DO1DO2DO5DO6DO3DO4 DI 18 AO7AO8 DIGITAL INPUT MODULE DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE AO1AO2AO5AO6AO3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE AO4 DO7DO8DO9DO10 ANALOG INPUT MODULE DO11 DI 19DI 20DI 21DI 22DI 23DI 24 DO12 DO13 DO14 DO15 DO16 DI 1DI 2DI 3DI 4DI 5DI 6DI 7DI 8DI 9DI 10DI 11 TOTAL FAIL FLOW METER (FE-022140) INTRUSION INTRUSION ALARM (YAS-022171) DI 12DI 13DI 14DI 15DI 16DI 17 OPENED CLOSED FAIL ALARM FAIL OPENED P-TO-W VALVE POSITION SENSOR (V-022123) CL2 DOSING PUMP (PMP-022101) CLOSE OPEN FLUSH FLOW METER (FE-022141) LEVEL TRANSMITTER (LT-022180) PUMP PRESSURE GAUGE (PIT-022150) VFD TEMPERATURE SENSOR (TE-022172) SYSTEM PRESSURE GAUGE (PIT-022152) FLOW METER (FE-022140) GPM WELL LEVEL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE PRESSURE GPM FEET NaOCL ULTRASONIC LEVEL INDICATOR (LI-022181) SPEED CL2 DOSING PUMP (PMP-022102) 24VDC POWER SUPPLY CLOSED POWER METER GATE MOTOR CONTROLLER (LS-022310) UPS ON UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY FAIL FAULT OFF/RUNNING FUEL LOW E-STOP PORTABLE EMERGENCY GENERATOR RUN CL2 DOSING PUMP (PMP-022102) RUN P-TO-W VALVE (V-022123) PORTABLE EMERGENCY GENERATOR RUN PORTABLE EMERGENCY GENERATOR FUEL LEVEL SPEED CL2 DOSING PUMP (PMP-022101) AI 1AI 2AI 5AI 6AI 3AI 4AI 7AI 8AI 9AI 10AI 11AI 12AI 13AI 14AI 15AI 16 NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY FACTORY-WIRED I/O AND WIRE IN FIELD I/O. 2. PROVIDE MINIMUM 20% SPARE ON ALL I/O CARDS. 3. ALL I/O SHALL BE PROTECTED WITH FUSES AND INTERPOSING RELAYS. CL2 DOSING PUMP (PMP-022101) CL2 DOSING PUMP (PMP-022102) DI 26DI 27DI 28DI 29DI 30DI 31DI 32DI 25 VFD HIGH MOTOR WINDING TEMP HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE VFD FAULT RUNNING E-STOP SPEED VFD VFD SPEED REF.
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626 - I_O Diagram.dwg; B626-36x24v - E.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E5.0 PLC IO DIAGRAM.dwg - Tab: PLC IO DIAGRAM - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 9:50:27 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 PLC IO DIAGRAM E5.0 43
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - E.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E6.0 CONTROL SCHEMATIC I.dwg - Tab: CONTROL SCHEMATIC I - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 3:22:19 PM Dimscale = 20; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 TERMINAL IN PLC TERMINAL ON VFD TERMINAL IN MCC LEGEND: TERMINAL IN FIELD 480V M ELAPSED TIME METER RUNNING LIGHT FAULT RELAY VFD FAULT LIGHT RUNNING RELAY MOTOR CØBØAØ BKR 3CR
L
2CR
L ETM
1 1CR START RELAY
5 6
7 8910 F1A F2A F3A VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD)
W
VU L3L2L1RUNNING CONTACT 11 FAULT CONTACT 13141516171812 CONTROL PWR THERMOSTAT FAN 2 FAN 1 L
N TO PLC VFD FAULT CR3 CONTINUED ON LINE 19 @ RIGHT CONTINUED ON LINE 19 @ RIGHT PTT PTT TYPICAL VFD CONTROL WIRING SCHEMATIC 19202122232425273031282932333436 CONTINUED FROM LINE 18 @ LEFT 3526 OPTIONAL AUX I/O TO PLC: CONTINUED FROM LINE 18 @ LEFT P111 TO PLC COMM CABLE SEE NETWORK DIAGRAM FOR REQUIREMENTS PLC START TO PLC RUNNING RELAY CR2 (+24 V DC OUT) AUTO OFF HANDLOCAL HS START (D IN) IN HAND (D IN) 4 3
2 CR1 TO PLC MOTOR WINDING TEMP CR6 TO PLC HIGH DISCH. PRESS. CR4 NOTES: 1. ALL VFD WIRING SHALL BE MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS AND/OR RECOMMENDATIONS. 2. VFD SHALL MEET IEEE519 HARMONIC REQUIREMENTS THROUGH USE OF ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 3. ALL RELAYS SHALL BE HEAVY DUTY AND PER THE SPECIFICATIONS. ACOM AO1 RESET CR3 2TD4CR CR4 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE LIGHT
L PTT HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE RELAY
1TD RUN ENABLE TIME DELAY HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH5CR MOTOR HIGH TEMP WINDING RELAY CR56CR MOTOR HIGH TEMP WINDING RELAY RESET CR6 MOTOR HIGH TEMP WINDING LIGHT L PTT COMM CABLE DOOR MOUNT HIM CR2 MOTOR SPACE HEATER ACOM AI2 AR
G
R TD2 373938 ( + ) 24 V DC ( - ) 24 V DC IN AUTO (D IN) HIGH PRESS (D IN) 24 V DC FROM PLC PANEL "A - 15" N FROM PANELBOARD A 120VAC ENCLOSURE TEMP TRANSM. TO PLC ENCLOSURE TEMP AO1 ACOM TD1 WINDING TEMP CONTROL SCHEMATIC I E6.0 44 SEE SHEET E6.1 PRESSURE SWITCH HAND TO VFD INPUT DOOR MOUNTED POT + 10 VAI1 COM ~ 5 KOHM~ HIGH TEMP (D IN) E-STOP (D IN) HAND AUTO CR4 CR5 AUTO TO VFD INPUT TO PLC E-STOP CR7 TO PLC 4-20mA SPEED REFERENCE TO PLC 4-20mA SPEED CMD FIELD E-STOP 7CR RUN ENABLE TIME DELAY CR7 CR7
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - E.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E6.1 CONTROL SCHEMATIC II.dwg - Tab: CONTROL SCHEMATIC II - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 3:22:23 PM Dimscale = 20; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 TERMINAL IN PLC TERMINAL ON VFD TERMINAL IN MCC LEGEND: TERMINAL IN FIELD 1 5
6 78910
4 3
2 CLOSE COMMAND DISCHARGE VALVE OPEN COMMAND PLC CLOSE RELAY PLC OPEN RELAY MOTOR OPERATED VALVE WIRING SCHEMATIC A-11 15 AMPS L1 (120V) 24 VDC + COMM FULLY OPEN 1CR VALVE OPEN STATUS FULLY CLOSED2CR VALVE CLOSED STATUS TO PLC VALVE CLOSED CR2 TO PLC VALVE OPEN CR1 MOTOR OPERATED VALVE EXHAUST FAN CONTROL SCHEMATIC 24 V DC POWER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC 1 5
6 4
3 2
1 5
6 4
3 2 1Ø AC INPUT 50/60 Hz "A-3, A-5" L1 L2
7 FAULT OUTPUT TO PLC STATUS OUTPUT TO PLC DRY INPUT (AUTO RUN) NORMALLY OPEN FROM PLC M T1 T2GND L2 (120V) A-13 15 AMPS 1. REDUNDANT POWER SYSTEM SHOWN FOR REFERENCE. 2. POWER SUPPLIES SHALL BE (2) ALLEN BRADLEY 1606-XL120DR POWER SUPPLY XL12, 120 W. 3. REDUNDANCY MODULE SHALL BE ALLEN BRADLEY 1606-XLSRED80 OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. 4. PLC SHALL MONITOR POWER SUPPLY FAILURES. NOTES: CONTROL SCHEMATIC II E6.1 45 5A POWER SUPPLY ALLEN BRADLEY 1606-XL120DR L1 N 5A LOAD PE + + - - + - + - DC- OK 5A POWER SUPPLY ALLEN BRADLEY 1606-XL120DR L1 N PE + + - - DC- OK FAILURE MONITOR 1606-XLSRED80 REDUNDANCY MODULE INPUT 1 INPUT
2 L1
N PE L1
N PE FROM PANEL "A" FROM UPS 1. VALVE ACTUATOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY SHALL BE MARKED WITH WARNING LABEL IDENTIFYING THE LOCATION OF THE DISCONNECTING MEANS. 2. CIRCUIT BREAKERS (CKTS. 11, 13) SHALL BE LOCKABLE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC 110.25. NOTES: 8 - #14 (C116) 6 - #14 (C109) 2 - #10, 1 - #10 GND (P204) 2 - #10, 1 - #10 GND (P204A) FROM PANEL "A" FROM PLC PANEL FROM PANEL "A" FROM PLC PANEL 2 - #12, 1 - #12 GND (P209) J GROUNDING ROD CONNECTION DETAIL N.T.S.
C CONDUIT MARKING DETAIL N.T.S.
G GROUND TO FENCE DETAIL GROUNDING CONNECTION N.T.S.
A N.T.S.
B GROUND TO REBAR 1. STRIP BACK INSULATION TO MAKE CONNECTION. NOTES: WELD BY EXOTHERMIC PROCESS 2/0 CU GROUND CABLE 2 GROUND ROD CONNECTOR (5/8"-3/4", 2/0 SOL-250) BURNDY #GAR6429 OR EQUAL. 11 GROUND ROD, 3/4" DIA. x 10', COPPER-CLAD STEEL 1 BILL OF MATERIALS NO. DESCRIPTION QTY3 GROUND ROD CONNECTOR (5/8"-3/4", #4 SOL-2/0) BURNDY #GAR6426 OR EQUAL. 14 GROUND CABLE CONNECTOR (#2/0-250 TO #4-#2/0) BURNDY #GX2926 OR EQUAL. 1 30"
MIN.
4 EQ. GND. TAP (#2/0 BARE CU) ALTERNATIVE TAP CONNS. MAIN GND. LOOP (#4/0 BARE CU) 1 2 3
1 #4 RE-BAR, 1/2" DIA. - USE GND. CONN. BURNDY #GAR1126 1 BILL OF MATERIALS NO. DESCRIPTION QTY
2 #5 OR #6 RE-BAR, 5/8" OR 3/4"DIA. - USE GND. CONN. BURNDY #GAR6426 1 3 #7 OR #8 RE-BAR, 7/8" OR 1"DIA. - USE GND. CONN. BURNDY #GAR1426 1 OR OR SELECT GROUND CONNECTOR BASED ON RE-BAR SIZE
1 2
2 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR (#2/0 MIN) CONCRETE FOUNDATION REBAR 6.1M 51mm MIN. PROVIDE 1" PVC SCH80 SLEEVE
1 SERVIT POST CONNECTOR, 2/C, 1/2"-13 LONG STUD, #2-#2/0 W/ NUT & LOCKWASHER, BURNDY#K2C25B1 1 BILL OF MATERIALS NO. DESCRIPTION QTY
2 GROUND CLIP, MILD STEEL, 5" x 3" x 1/4" FIELD FABRICATE - SEE DET-A 1 DET-A GND CLIP
152mm 38mm STEEL COLUMN OR EQUIP. SKID DRILL & TAP HOLD FOR 1 2"-13 BOLT BREAK EDGES AT CORNERS DRILL HOLE FOR 1/2"-13 BOLT EQ. GND. TAP (#2 INSUL. CU) TO GND SYSTEM 9 5/8" 13 13/16" 10 3/8" 1 3/16" 12" BODY 30" CONCRETE GROUND ROD BOX, CHRISTY G03 OR APPROVED EQUAL CAST IRON COVER 3/4" x 10' COPPER GROUND ROD COPPER GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR SHALL BE MIN. #4/0 GRAVEL BASE 18" THK. COVER TO BE MARKED "GROUNDING ELECTRODE" GROUND ROD/ELECTRODE CONNECTOR. CADWELD OR APPROVED EQUAL FINISH GRADE 1" CHAMFER ALONG EDGE ANCHOR BOLT AS REQUIRED BY EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER (TYP) ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT NOTES: 1. EQUIPMENT BASE TOP SHALL BE LEVEL. 2. PRIOR TO EQUIPMENT BASE INSTALLATION, COMPACT SOIL UNDER AND 6" BEYOND THE BASE TO 95% RELATIVE COMPACTION. 3"
MIN
3"
MIN
2'-0" 6" MIN (TYP.) 4" MIN (TYP.) #4 @ 6" OC #4 @6" OC T&B STEEL COLUMN OR EQUIPMENT SKID GROUNDING N.T.S.
D CONCRETE GROUND ROD INSPECTION DETAIL N.T.S.
E EQUIPMENT PAD DETAIL N.T.S.
F
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - E.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E7.0 ELECTRICAL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: ELECTRICAL DETAILS - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 4:30:24 PM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 N.T.S.
H N.T.S. N.T.S. LEAVE SUFFICIENT SLACK IN CABLE FOR GATE SWING. NOTES:1. OR OR SELECT GND CONN BASED ON POLE SIZEOR ELECTRICAL DETAILS E7.0 46 TYPICAL CONDUIT TRENCH DETAIL CTRL SP PWR PWR #2/0 BARE CU GROUNDING CONDUCTOR VFD 350 HP 800A MAIN CB SPD PULL SECTION UTILITY MAIN MCC SECTION (EAST WALL) FACING WALL EXIT BAY MCC SECTION (SOUTH WALL) CONC. PAD FOR CONDUIT STUB UPS (NORTH WALL) SES (NORTH WALL) FACING WALL PANEL "A" VFD MAIN BREAKER 600A PLC PLC (WEST WALL) FACING WALL 25 KVA XFMR METER SPARE SPARE SPACE SPACE FACING WALL FACING WALL SWITCH GEAR, CONDUIT STUB UP CONCRETE PAD, VFD, AND MCC ELEVATION N.T.S.
D UNDERGROUND PULL BOX DETAIL - CONTROL AND POWER UNDERGROUND PULL BOX CONDUIT DETAIL N.T.S.C
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - E.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E7.1 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 2.dwg - Tab: ELECTRICAL DETAILS 2 - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 4:50:55 PM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 2 E7.1 47 SIDE VIEW E-STOP MOUNT N.T.S.
A N.T.S.
B
UTILITY TRANSFORMER PAD DETAILS N.T.S.
A CHRIS NAJARIAN RYAN C. DUNCAN S. LEE JUNE 2020
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - E.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-E7.2 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 3.dwg - Tab: ELECTRICAL DETAILS 3 - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 9:45:46 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 3 E7.2 48 ₂
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626 - P&ID.dwg; B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-I0.0 P&ID LEGEND AND SYMBOLS.dwg - Tab: P&ID LEGEND AND SYMBOLS - by mmills on 09/03/21 at 3:37:11 PM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" P&ID LEGEND AND SYMBOLS
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626 - P&ID.dwg; B626-36x24v.dwg; B626 - I_O Diagram.dwg w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-I1.0 NETWORK DIAGRAM.dwg - Tab: NETWORK DIAGRAM - by mmills on 09/03/21 at 3:36:40 PM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" 50
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626 - P&ID.dwg; B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-I2.0 WELL 22 P&ID.dwg - Tab: WELL 22 P&ID - by mmills on 09/22/21 at 10:47:15 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" WELL 22 P&ID 51
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626 - P&ID.dwg; B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-I2.1 SES, ATS AND GENERATOR.dwg - Tab: SES AND GENERATOR - by mmills on 12/06/21 at 11:49:58 AM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" 52 48'-0"
12'-0" 27'-0" 37'-0"
34'-6"
W W W W
SD SD
SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SS SS SS SS SS
S
A
A
A A
SD SD SD
A
A
W W SD SD SD SD
A
A 1'-3" 5'-11" 1'-3" 2'-4" WELL #22 CATHODIC PROTECTION SITE PLAN SCALE: 1" = 10'-0" EXISTING PROPERTY LINE 100% PLANS - ISSUED FOR REVIEW
Xrefs: B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG; Well 22 Title Block - CP Aug 2021.dwg; Well 22 Mech Sections.dwg; Sarvjits Stamp with Signature.dwg C:\Users\ejohnson\Aegion\Job Folders - Los Angeles\340162248 - PACE - City of Vernon CP Design - Los Angeles, CA\15 - CAD Drawings\Well 22\Well 22 Cathodic Protection Aug 2021.dwg - Tab: CP1.0 - by ejohnson on 08/16/21 at 1:20:56 PM Dimscale = 96; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS OF 58 E. J. E. J. S.S. AUGUST 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 CATHODIC PROTECTION DETAILS I CEPS
ON
T I PROTEC
I C
OHT AC ECAN
N A C E I N T E R N AT I O HG
VJ
SIN
RAS No. 6125
D
T SI L A
IT
N A L CP SYMBOL LEGEND PROPOSED RECTIFIER, SEE DETAIL NEGATIVE STRUCTURE CONNECTION PIN BRAZED ON PIPE PROPOSED CPJUNCTION BOX, SEE DETAIL (+) (5) #8 AWG HALAR ANODE CABLES (-) #6 AWG HMWPE NEGATIVE STRUCTURE (-) CABLE PROPOSED DEEP ANODE GROUNDBED, SEE DETAIL AC AC POWER PANEL (TYP.) 32-LB H-1 STANDARD POTENTIAL MAGNESIUM ANODE PROPOSED FLUSH TEST STATION, SEE DETAIL SEE ENLARGED VIEW THIS SHEET AC (+) (+) (-) (-) INSTALL INSULATING FLANGE KIT (IFK) COMPLIANT WITH PROJECT PIPING 12" DI WELL DISCHARGE PIPING SCALE: NONE ROUTE CABLES TO TEST STATION BEHIND CURB NOTES: 1. ASSUMES FULL CONTINUITY AND NULL RESISTANCE BETWEEN PIPELINE SECTIONS. ASSUMED EITHER END OF THE PIPELINE IS ISOLATED (IE. AT CUT-IN VALVE ASSEMBLY). 2. ANODES TO BE INSTALLED DURING PIPELINE INSTALLATION, THREE FEET BELOW PIPE BOTTOM DEPTH AND THREE FEET PERPENDICULAR TO PIPELINE. ANODES TO BE INSTALLED VERTICALLY, SPACED HORIZONTALLY FIVE FEET APART WITH INDIVIDUAL ANODE CABLES TO TERMINATED IN TEST STATION. 3. Cu/CuSO4 PERMANENT REFERENCE ELECTRODES #14 AWG HMWPE CABLE (YELLOW) TO BE INSTALLED ON OPPOSITE SIDE OF PIPELINE THAN ANODES, ONE FOOT AWAY FROM PIPE AT PIPE BOTTOM DEPTH. PERMANENT REFERENCE CELL CABLE TO BE TERMINATED IN TEST STATION. 4. TEST STATION TO INCLUDE 0.01 OHM SHUNT. 5. PIPELINE LEAD AND PIPELINE TEST CABLES (2) #8 AWG HMWPE (BLACK) TO BE INDEPENDENTLY EXOTHERMICALLY WELDED/PIN BRAZED ONTO PIPELINE. PIPELINE CONNECTIONS TO BE TERMINATED IN TEST STATION. 6. INSTALL DC DECOUPLER(S) AT ELECTRICAL GROUND FOR PUMP AND WELL CASING. (+) 3' (TYP) FLUSH G5 TEST STATION WITH INTERNAL PANEL BOARD. SEE DETAIL 2/CP1.2 AND 3/CP1.2 Cu/CuSO4 PERMANENT REFERENCE ELECTRODE SEE NOTE 3 3' (TYP) PIPELINE LEAD AND PIPELINE TEST LEAD, SEE NOTE 5 12" DI WELL DISCHARGE - CP TEST STATION 1 SCALE: NONE 12" DI WELL DISCHARGE - CP TEST STATION 2 SCALE: NONE SEE ENLARGED VIEW THIS SHEET, CP TEST STATION 1 SEE ENLARGED VIEW THIS SHEET, CP TEST STATION 2 INSTALL INSULATING FLANGE KIT (IFK) COMPLIANT WITH PROJECT PIPING Cu/CuSO4 PERMANENT REFERENCE ELECTRODE SEE NOTE 3 5' (TYP) 5' (TYP) PIPELINE LEAD AND PIPELINE TEST LEAD SEE NOTE 5 1CP1.1 1CP1.1 1CP1.2 3CP1.1
1CP1.1 SEE DETAIL 2/CP1.1 FLUSH G5 TEST STATION WITH INTERNAL PANEL BOARD. SEE DETAIL 2/CP1.2 AND 4/CP1.2 A COPPER/COPPER-SULFATE REFERENCE ELECTRODE (+) (+) (+) (+) ROUTE AC CABLE FROM AC POWER TO RECTIFIER THROUGH CONDUIT (NOT SHOWN, TO BE FIELD DETERMINED) 53 INSTALL INSULATING FLANGE KIT (IFK) COMPLIANT WITH PROJECT PIPING (-) ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 53 OF 60
100% PLANS - ISSUED FOR REVIEW
Xrefs: B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG; Well 22 Title Block - CP Aug 2021.dwg; Well 22 Mech Sections.dwg; Sarvjits Stamp with Signature.dwg C:\Users\ejohnson\Aegion\Job Folders - Los Angeles\340162248 - PACE - City of Vernon CP Design - Los Angeles, CA\15 - CAD Drawings\Well 22\Well 22 Cathodic Protection Aug 2021.dwg - Tab: CP1.1 - by ejohnson on 08/16/21 at 1:20:56 PM Dimscale = 96; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS OF 58 E. J. E. J. S.S. AUGUST 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 CATHODIC PROTECTION DETAILS I CEPS
ON
T I PROTEC
I C
OHT AC ECAN
N A C E I N T E R N AT I O HG
VJ
SIN
RAS No. 6125
D
T SI L A
IT
N A L GRADE 300' 55' COKE BREEZE 245' ALL VENT (SOLID) ALL VENT (PERFORATED) BACKFILLTYPE: LORESCO RS-3 CENTRALIZER (TYP. OF 15, 3 PER ANODE) CENTRALIZERS NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY 5' 5' (TYP.) M124 MMO ANODES 1.25" DIAMETER QTY: 5 LENGTH: 48" CABLE TYPE: HALAR CENTERED IN DRILLED HOLE PVC CAP CP JUNCTION BOX, SEE DETAIL 1"Ø PVC VENT PIPE (SOLID) 5 - #8 AWG COPPER HALAR CABLE LEADS TO ANODE JUNCTION BOX, SEE DETAIL 10" Ø 12" 18" MIN. 5' CONCRETE SLURRY, 244' BURIED CABLE WARNING TAPE G5 TRAFFIC RATED BOX WITH CAST IRON LID LABELED 'ANODE' CONDUIT CLAMP, (TYP.) LOCATE CONDUIT ENTRIES TO SUIT EACH LOCATION FOR POSITIVE, NEGATIVE AND AC FEED CABLES, (TYP.) 24" (MIN) 24" 18" 4" GALVANIZED STEEL CHANNEL SUPPORT, (TYP.) RECTIFIER, HOT DIP GALVANIZED STEEL ENCLOSURE, 115/230 VAC, 1 PHASE AC, 24A/24V DC OUTPUT CONCRETE FOUNDATION, 18" Ø x 24" GRADE 1CP1.1 RECTIFIER AND CP JUNCTION BOX SCALE: NTS 48" (MIN) 1"Ø PVC VENT PIPE FROM ANODE GROUNDBED 4CP1.1 ANODE VENTRALIZER SCALE: NTS
3CP1.1 DEEP ANODE GROUNDBED DETAIL SCALE: NTS ANODE CLAMP (NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY) VENT PIPE CLAMPS ANODE CLAMP VENT PIPE CLAMP (TYP. OF 2) 1CP1.2
1CP1.1 1CP1.2
3 2 CP1.1 CP1.1 WELL CASING BONDING DETAILS SCALE: NTS GROUND SURFACE EL. 190.60'± TOP OF EXISTING 18" CASING 3" GRAVEL FEED 48" CONDUCTOR CASING 4" CAMERA TUBE 2" SOUNDING TUBE CASING SECTION A 36" CONDUCTOR CASING #6 AWG HMWPE NEGATIVE CABLE ROUTED BACK TO CP JUNCTION BOX, SEE DETAIL 1CP1.2 #6 AWG HMWPE BONDING CABLES, EXOTHERMICALLY WELDED OR PIN BRAZED NOTES: 1. #6 AWG HMWPE NEGATIVE CABLE TO BE EXOTHERMICALLY WELDED OR PIN BRAZED TO 48" CONDUCTOR CASING. 2. 48" CONDUCTOR CASING, 36" CONDUCTOR CASING AND 18" CASING SHALL BE BONDING TOGETHER WITH #6 AWG HMWPE BONDING CABLES AND EXOTHERMIC WELDING OR PIN BRAZING AT WIRE TO CASING CONNECTION. 54 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 54 OF 60
100% PLANS - ISSUED FOR REVIEW
Xrefs: B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG; Well 22 Title Block - CP Aug 2021.dwg; Well 22 Mech Sections.dwg; Sarvjits Stamp with Signature.dwg C:\Users\ejohnson\Aegion\Job Folders - Los Angeles\340162248 - PACE - City of Vernon CP Design - Los Angeles, CA\15 - CAD Drawings\Well 22\Well 22 Cathodic Protection Aug 2021.dwg - Tab: CP1.2 - by ejohnson on 08/16/21 at 1:20:56 PM Dimscale = 96; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS OF 58 E. J. E. J. S.S. AUGUST 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 CATHODIC PROTECTION DETAILS I CEPS
ON
T I PROTEC
I C
OHT AC ECAN
N A C E I N T E R N AT I O HG
VJ
SIN
RAS No. 6125
D
T SI L A
IT
N A L
2CP1.2 G5 TEST STATION SCALE: NTS G5 CONCRETE BOX GRADE 24" x 24" x 6" CONCRETE PAD (IF LOCATED IN UNPAVED AREA) NOTES: 1. SEE ENLARGED VIEWS ON SHEET CP1.0 FOR CATHODIC PROTECTION INSTALLATION LAYOUTS 2. TEST STATION SHALL BE INSTALLED BEHIND THE SIDEWALK CURB. 3. IF TEST STATION IS INSTALLED IN AN UNPAVED AREA, INSTALL ONE BOLLARD ADJACENT TO THE TEST STATION CONCRETE PAD. TERMINAL BOARD SEE DETAIL 3/CP1.2 AND 4/CP1.2 1CP1.2 CP JUNCTION BOX SCALE: NTS POSA1 COPPER BUS BAR 1" WIDE NEMA 3R METAL ENCLOSURE 1 4" MICARTA OR PHENOLIC PANEL (5) #8 AWG HALAR ANODE CABLES (1) AWG #6 POSITIVE CABLE TO RECTIFIER (1) AWG #6 NEGATIVE CABLE TO RECTIFIER A2A3A4A5 0.001 OHM SHUNT (TYP) CONDUIT TO RECTIFIER PIPE A1 A2 REF PIPE TYPE RS 0.01 OHM SHUNT (TYP), 6 AMPS 1 8" THK COPPER BUS BAR ENGRAVED LABEL (TYP) #14 AWG HMPWE REFERENCE CABLE (YELLOW) #8 AWG HMPWE TEST STRUCTURE LEAD (BLACK) #12 AWG THHN ANODE LEADS (BLACK) #8 AWG HMWPE DRAIN STRUCTURE LEAD (BLACK) COPPER OR BRASS HARDWARE (TYP) RING CONNECTOR (TYP) 1 4" MICARTA OR PHENOLIC PANEL 6" x 6"
3CP1.2 TERMINAL BOARD FOR CP TEST STATION 1 SCALE: NTS PIPE A1 A2REF PIPE TYPE RS 0.01 OHM SHUNT (TYP), 6 AMPS 1 8" THK COPPER BUS BAR ENGRAVED LABEL (TYP) #14 AWG HMPWE REFERENCE CABLE (YELLOW) #8 AWG HMPWE TEST STRUCTURE LEAD (BLACK) #12 AWG THHN ANODE LEADS (BLACK) #8 AWG HMWPE DRAIN STRUCTURE LEAD (BLACK) COPPER OR BRASS HARDWARE (TYP) RING CONNECTOR (TYP) 1 4" MICARTA OR PHENOLIC PANEL 6" x 6"
4CP1.2 TERMINAL BOARD FOR CP TEST STATION 2 SCALE: NTS ISOL ISOL #10 AWG THHN EXISTING PIPE LEADS (WHITE) 55 OF 60 55
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
C
D
B BURIED RUBBER GASKET RIGID JOINT BONDING DETAIL NOTES: 1. WELDER SHOWN IS FOR HORIZONTAL SURFACES ONLY. FOR VERTICAL SURFACES, A SIDE WELDER IS REQUIRED WHILE PIN BRAZING IS ALLOWED. 2. ALL WIRE WELDS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3" APART. 3. STANDARD WELD CARTRIDGES SHALL BE USED FOR STEEL SURFACES. FOR DUCTILE IRON, THE WELD SHALL BE XF-19 ALLOY OR EQUIVALENT. USE APPROPRIATE SIZED CHARGES AND MOLDS FOR THE WIRE GAGE AND POSITION. 4. EXTEND ROYBOND 747 COATING 3" ONTO PIPE COATING OR AROUND WELD AREA. 5. USE COPPER SLEEVES AS RECOMMENDED BY THE EXOTHERMIC WELD MANUFACTURED FOR THE WIRE TO BE WELDED. 6. USE THE APPROPRIATE WELD MOLDS FOR HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL APPLICATION. THIS DETAIL ILLUSTRATES THE USE OF A HORIZONTAL WELD CONFIGURATION. STEP 1 FILE OR GRIND SURFACE TO BRIGHT METAL, CLEAN STEP 2 STRIP INSULATION FROM WIRE STEP 3 HOLD WELDER FIRMLY WITH OPENING AWAY FROM THE OPERATOR AND IGNITE STARTING POWDER STEP 4 REMOVE SLAG FROM CONNECTION AND PEEN WELD FOR SOUNDESS STEP 5 COVER THE CONNECTION AND EXPOSED STRUCTURE WITH A BITUMINOUS COATING AND A ROYSTON HANDY CAP HANDLE GRAPHITE COVER METAL POWDER GRAPHITE MOLD PIPE STARTING POWDER METAL DISC WIRE EXOTHERMIC WELD WELDER SECTION NOTES: 1. BOND WIRE SHALL BE NO. 6 AWG STRANDED HMWPE WIRE INSULATION UNLESS OTHER WISE SPECIFIED. 2. ALUMINO-THERMIC WELDS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3" APART, AND 6" AWAY FROM RUBBER GASKET JOINTS. 3. BOND WIRE SHALL LAY FLAT WITH SLACK AGAINST THE PIPE, OR FITTING WITHOUT BRIDGING OVER FLANGES, COUPLINGS OR JOINTS. 4. FOR PIPE DIAMETERS 20" OR LESS, 2 BONDS CABLES ARE REQUIRED. 3 CABLE BONDS ARE REQUIRED FOR PIPE DIAMETERS LARGER THAN 20". 5. DO NOT BOND ACROSS INSULATING FLANGES OR ELECTRICAL ISOLATION DEVICES. 6. APPLY NO-OX-ID "A SPECIAL WW" GREASE AND WRAP ALL BURIED, NON-EPOXY COATED SURFACES I.E. FLANGES, COUPLINGS, ETC. DUCTILE IRON OR STEEL PIPE REFER TO EXOTHERMIC WELD DETAIL FLANGE COUPLING ADAPTOR NO. 6 AWG STRANDED BONDING WIRE WITH HMWPE INSULATION VALVE AND FLANGE COUPLING ADAPTER ASSEMBLY BEND OR REDUCER VALVE (TYP) CROSS OR TEE WITH OR WITHOUT VALVES EXOTHERMIC WELD DETAIL A CP TEST STATION BOX AND VALVE ASSEMBLY FOR STAND ALONE FITTINGS AND APPURTENANCES CAST IRON COVER NOTES: 1. TEST STATION BOX IS TO BE LOCATED BEHIND THE CURB, OFF THE PAVED ROADWAY OR AS SHOWN ON THE APPROVED PLANS. DO NOT PLACE IN PARKING SPACES OR DRIVEWAYS. 2. PROVIDE 24" X 24" X 6" THICK REINFORCED CONCRETE PAD AROUND TEST BOX AT UNPAVED SITES. 3. CATHODIC PROTECTION TEST BOX SHALL BE H-20 TRAFFIC RATED, CHRISTY G-5 OR EQUAL. 4. BODY WEIGHT SHALL BE 54 LB MINIMUM. COVER WEIGHT SHALL BE 12 LB MINIMUM. 5. TOP OF VALVE BOX SHALL BE FLUSH WITH TOP OF PAVEMENT WITH A MINUS 1 4" MAX TOLERANCE. 6. RADIO LOCATION TAPE OR COPPER WIRE SHALL BE SECURELY TAPED TO THE INSIDE OF VALVE BOX. CP TEST 2" 3"
3 1
4 " 14 1
2 " 12" 8"-RADIUS X 8" THICK CONCRETE COLLAR AND COLLAR SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR INSTALLATIONS LOCATED IN THE STREET, ALLEY OR ANY TRAVELWAY TOP OF ASPHALT PAVEMENT VALVE BOX COVER MARKED "WATER" 8" CONCRETE COLLAR NO.14 AWG SOLID COPPER WIRE, UF TYPE, WITH THHN-THWN, INSULATION AND 12" LAP INSIDE COVER FOR LOCATING NON-METALLIC PIPE 8" GROUND WIRE, NO.12 AWG STRANDED COPPER WIRE, W/ THHM-THWN. INSULATION AND 12" LAP INSIDE COVER MARK W/ WIRE NUT VARIES 8" P.V.C SDR 35 OR GREATER WALL THICKNESS PVC (ONE PIECE) SACRIFICIAL ANODE 6" 2" (MIN) 4" (MIN) NO. 4 REBAR TYPICAL, ALL FOUR SIDES CONCRETE PAD, FOR PARKWAY INSTALLATION, REFER TO NOTE 2 CATHODIC PROTECTION TEST STATION BOX VALVE BOX ASSEMBLY (FOR STAND ALONE FITTINGS AND APPURTANECES) NOTES: 1. BOND WIRE SHALL BE NO. 6 AWG STRANDED HMWPE WIRE INSULATION UNLESS OTHER WISE SPECIFIED. 2. ALUMINO-THERMIC WELDS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3" APART, AND 6" AWAY FROM RUBBER GASKET JOINTS. 3. BOND WIRE SHALL LAY FLAT WITH SLACK AGAINST THE PIPE, OR FITTING WITHOUT BRIDGING OVER FLANGES, COUPLINGS OR JOINTS. 4. DO NOT PLACE EXOTHERMIC OR PIN BRAZE WELD ON THE BELL OF THE PIPE. 5. FOR REMOVABLE PORTION OF MECHANICAL JOINT, SLEEVE COUPLING, GROOVED NED, AND OTHER FLEXIBLE JOINT, WELD BOND WIRE BEFORE INSTALLATION TO AVOID DAMAGING THE RUBBER GASKET. 6. FOR PIPE DIAMETERS OF 20" OR LESS, 2 CABLE BONDS ARE REQUIRED. 3 CABLE BONDS ARE REQUIRED FOR PIPE DIAMETERS LARGER THAN 20". 7. DO NOT BOND ACROSS INSULATING FLANGES OR ELECTRICAL ISOLATION DEVICES. 8. APPLY NO-OX-ID "A SPECIAL WW" GREASE AND WRAP ALL BURIED, NON EPOXY COATED SURFACES I.E. FLANGES, COUPLINGS, ETC. DUCTILE IRON OR STEEL PIPE NO. 6 AWG STRANDED BONDING WIRE WITH HMWPE INSULATION REFER TO EXOTHERMIC WELD DETAIL 3"
MIN 6" MIN SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLING MECHANICAL JOINT COUPLING VICTAULIC-TYPE COUPLING FLEXIBLE GASKET JOINT COUPLING SLEEVE-TYPE BONDING FLEXIBLE GASKET JOINT BONDING GROOVED END / VICTAULIC-TYPE BONDING GROOVED END MECHANICAL JOINT BONDING BURIED RUBBER GASKET FLEXIBLE JOINT BONDING DETAIL N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S NO. 4 REBAR
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-C2.0 CIVIL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: CATHODIC PROTECTION DETAILS 4 - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 10:22:30 AM Dimscale = 96; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" 56 C
D
A NOTES: 1. WIRES SHALL BE SLEEVED IN SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUITS. 2. CONNECT PIPE LEAD WIRES AND ANODE LEAD WIRES TO SEPARATE TERMINALS IN ANODE CP TEST STATION. 3. PROVIDE PVC SWEEP 90° BEND AT THE CP TEST STATION END. BURIED CP WIRES AND CONDUIT TRENCH 4" MIN. 12" (TYP.)
24" (TYP.) BACKFILL PER SECTION 306-1.2.1 OF STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS (GREEN BOOK) SAND EQUIVALENT 25% MIN WARNING TAPE, "CAUTION CATHODIC PROTECTION WIRE FOR WATER MAIN" 1.5" DIAMETER SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUIT CONTAINING PIPE LEAD WIRES SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUIT CONTAINING ANODE LEAD WIRES (DIAMETER WILL VARY BASED ON NUMBER OF WIRES) NOTES: 1. ANODE LEAD WIRES SHALL BE SLEEVED IN SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUITS. 2. CONNECT PIPE LEAD WIRES AND ANODE LEAD WIRES TO SEPARATE TERMINALS IN ANODE CP TEST STATION. 3. DO NOT LIFT OR HANDLE THE ANODE WITH THE ANODE LEAD WIRE. CHEMICAL COMPOSITION PER ASTM B843 ELEMENT CONTENT % Al 0.01 Mn 0.50 - 1.30 Cu 0.02 MAX Ni 0.001 MAX Fe 0.03 MAX Si 0.05 MAX OTHER 0.05 MAX TOTAL Mg REMAINDER HIGH POTENTIAL CAST MAGNESIUM INGOT INGOT SIZE: 17#, 17D3, 3.5" X 4" X 25" BACKFILL COMPOSTION 75% GYPSUM 20% BENTONITE 5% SODIUM SULFATE ANODE LEAD WIRE, NO. 12 AWG STRANDED COPPER WIRE WITH RED THHN-THWN INSULATION CHEMICAL COMPOSITION PER ASTM B-418 TYPE II ELEMENT CONTENT % Al 0.005 MAX Cd 0.003 MAX Cu 0.002 MAX Pb 0.003 MAX Fe 0.0014 MAX Zn REMAINDER SILVER SOLDERED CONNECTION SECURE WITH TIE WIRE EPOXY CLOTH BAG GALVANIZED STEEL CORE ZINC INGOT INGOT SIZE: 30# 2" X 2" X 30" SILVER SOLDERED CONNECTION W/ INSULATING ELECTRICAL TAPE, OR SHRINK SLEEVE HIGH POTENTIAL MAGNESIUM ANODE ZINC ANODE BURIED CP WIRES AND CONDUIT TRENCH B HIGH POTENTIAL MAGNESIUM ANODES AND ZINC ANODES BURIED INSULATING FLANGE FULL LENGTH BOLT ISOLATING SLEEVE, 132" THICK TUBE, LENGTH OF THE TUBE SHALL BE THE SUM THICKNESS OF BOTH FLANGES, BOTH INSULATING WASHERS AND ONE SS WASHER 316 SS BOLT OR STUD AND NUT INSULATING WASHER, 2-EACH TYPICAL, G10, 1 8 " THICK, ID OF WASHER SHALL FIT OVER OD OF ISOLATING SLEEVE 316 SS WASHER, 2-EACH TYPICAL, SAME OD AND ID AS THE INSULATING WASHERS 316 SS NUT ISOLATING GASKET, FULL FACED, TYPE E, G10 RETAINER, WITH A PRECISION TAPERED GROVE AND NITRILE SEALING ELEMENT NOTES: 1. WHITE AND BLACK WIRES SHALL BE SEPARATELY SLEEVED IN SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUITS. 2. CONNECT PIPE LEAD WIRES TO SEPARATE TERMINALS IN ANODE CP TEST STATION. 3. DO NOT COAT OR SPRAY INSULATING COMPONENTS WITH GREASE. 4. COAT FLANGES AND HARDWARE WITH WAX TAPE IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWWA C217, EXTEND THE WAX TAPE A MINIMUM OF 6" ONTO PIPE CYLINDER IN EACH DIRECTION. THE COATING SHALL BE 70 MIL MINIMUM OVER SMOOTH SURFACES AND 140 MIL MINIMUM OVER IRREGULAR OR SHARP SURFACES. 5. ALL WIRES AND CONDUITS SHALL BE PERPENDICULAR TO THE WATER MAIN AND TERMINATE AT THE CP TEST STATION BOX. CP TEST STATION BOX WIRES A & B ARE NO. 6 AWG STRANDED COPPER WIRE WITH WHITE HMWPE INSULATION WIRES C & D ARE NO. 6 AWG STRANDED COPPER WIRE WITH BLACK HWMPE INSULATION WAX TAPE COATING PER AWWA C217 BURIED INSULATING FLANGE AND TEST STATION BOX A
B
C
D WATER MAIN 2" SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY SLEEVE SACRIFICIAL ANODE CP TEST STATION WIRING DIAGRAM (3-WIRE CP TEST STATION ASSEMBLY) NOTES: 1. SACRIFICIAL ANODE CP TEST STATION IS NOT REQUIRED FOR STAND ALONE FITTINGS AND APPURTENANCES. 2. LEAD WIRES SHALL BE SLEEVED IN SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUITS. 3. ALL WIRES SHALL HAVE SLACK TO EXTEND 18" ABOVE THE RIM OF THE CP TEST STATION BOX. WIRES SHALL BE BUNDLED IN THE CP TEST STATION BOX. CAST IRON COVER MARKED "CP TEST" AND PIPELINE NUMBER CONCRETE BOX CHRISTY (H-20) OR APPROVED EQUAL ALL WIRES SHALL TERMINATE IN A FLUSH FINK TEST STATION WITHIN THE CONCRETE BOX 8" MINIMUM,
1 2
" GRAVEL ANODE LEAD WIRES QUANTINTY VARIES 0.01 OHM SHUNT 1.5" DIAMETER SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUIT WITH 90° SWEEP AT THE CP TEST STATION 2" DIAMETER SCHEDULE 40 PVC, EXTEND INTO NATIVE SOIL 5" AND 2" ABOVE GRAVEL, FILL WITH ROCK FREE NATIVE SOIL PIPE LEAD WIRES 2- NO. 6 AWG STRANDED COPPER WIRE WITH HMWPE INSULATION. (3 PIPE LEAD WIRES FOR PIPELINE DIAMETER GREATER THAN 20") SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUIT AND SWEEP. DIAMETER TO BE SIZED TO ALLOW PULLING OF ANODE LEAD WIRES CP TEST STATION WIRING DIAGRAM N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-C2.0 CIVIL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: CATHODIC PROTECTION DETAILS 5 - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 10:22:30 AM Dimscale = 96; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" 57 C
D BURIED INSULATING FLANGE CP TEST STATION WIRING DIAGRAM A
B CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR 6" TO 12" DUCTILE IRON OR STEEL PIPE NOTES: 1. LEAD WIRES SHALL BE SLEEVED IN SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUITS. 2. ALL WIRES SHALL HAVE SLACK TO EXTEND 18" ABOVE THE RIM OF THE CP TEST STATION BOX. WIRES SHALL BE BUNDLED IN THE CP TEST STATION BOX. 3. IF COLORED HMWPE IS UNAVAILABLE, COLORED HEAT SHRINK SLEEVES 2' LONG AND 3' ON CENTER SHALL BE APPLIED. ALL WIRES WITHIN CP TEST STATION BOX SHALL BE THE COLOR CODE DESIGNATED. BURIED INSULATING FLANGE CP TEST STATION WIRING DIAGRAM CAST IRON COVER MARKED "CP TEST" CONCRETE BOX CHRISTY (H-20) OR APPROVED EQUAL 8" MINIMUM,
1 2
" GRAVEL PIPE LEAD WIRES, 2-NO. 6 AWG STANDED COPPER WITH WHITE HMWPE INSULATION (WIRE A & B) 1.5" DIAMETER SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUIT WITH 90° SWEEP AT THE CP TEST STATION 2" DIAMETER SCHEDULE 40 PVC, EXTEND INTO NATIVE SOIL 5" AND 2" ABOVE GRAVEL, FILL WITH ROCK FREE NATIVE SOIL PIPE LEAD WIRES 2- NO. 6 AWG STRANDED COPPER WIRE WITH BLACK HMWPE INSULATION WIRE. (WIRE C & D. 3 PIPE LEAD WIRES FOR PIPELINE DIAMETER GREATER THAN 20" ) WIRES SHALL TERMINATE IN A FLUSH TEST STATION WITHIN THE CONCRETE BOX A
B
C
D 1.5" DIAMETER SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUIT WITH 90° SWEEP AT THE CP STATION NOTES: 1. CP TEST STATION NOT REQUIRED FOR STAND ALONE FITTINGS AND APPURTENANCES, BUT UTILIZES A VALVE BOX ASSEMBLY INSTEAD. 2. PROVIDE CONTINUITY JOINT BONDING FOR ALL CONTINUOUS SELECTIONS OF DUCTILE IRON OR STEEL FITTINGS AND APPURTENANCES. 3. SEE EXOTHERMIC WELD DETAIL FOR EXOTHERMIC WELD ANODE LEAD WIRE TO FITTING. 4. COVER ALL EXOTHERMIC WELDS WITH ROYBOND 747 AND A ROYSTON HANDY CAP. 5. ALL NUTS, BOLTS, AND WASHERS SHALL BE GRADE 316 STAINLESS STEEL. 6. APPLY NO-OX-ID "A SPECIAL WW" GREASE AND PROTECTIVE WRAP ON ALL BURIED FITTINGS. 7. FITTINGS, VALVES, AND RESTRAINED JOINT DEVISES, SHALL BE ENCASED IN POLETHYLENE PER AWWA C105. 8. EXOTHERMIC WELDS SHALL NOT DAMAGE LININGS OF PIPE, FITTINGS, OR APPURTENANCES. PRODUCT WITH DAMAGED LINING SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE JOB SITE. CONTINUITY JOINT BONDING GREASE AND WRAP FLANGES, FASTENERS, AND RESTRAINED JOINT DEVISES. SEE NOTE 6 NON-METALLIC PIPE (TYPICAL) DUCTILE IRON OR STEEL FITTING BEND, CROSS, TEE, CROSS, REDUCER, PLUG OR CAP 2' MIN. 2' MIN. NO. 12 AWG STRANDED RED THHN-THWN LEAD WIRE, PROVIDE 12" OF SLACK IN WIRE ALL VALVES INSTALL NO. 12 AWG STRANDED COPPER WIRE, WITH THHN-THWN INSULATION, AND 12" LAP INSIDE VALVE RISER MARK WITH WIRE NUT POLYETHYLENE ENCASE PER AWWA C105 (TYPICAL) IF RESISTANCE IS > 1500 OHM-CM, USE 17 LB Mg ANODE. IF RESISITANCE IS < 1500 OHM-CM, USE 30 LB Zn ANODE. BACKFILL WITH NATIVE SOIL 2' MIN. NON-METALLIC PIPE (TYPICAL) CP FOR STAND ALONE DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS SECTION A-A A
A CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR 6" TO 12" DUCTILE IRON OR STEEL PIPE CP FOR 6" TO 12" DUCTILE IRON OR STEEL PIPE SECTION A-A NOTES: 1. CP TEST STATION IS NOT REQUIRED FOR STAND ALONE FITTINGS AND APPURTENANCES OR FOR PIPE LENGTHS < 50'. 2. PROVIDE CONTINUITY JOINT BONDING FOR ALL CONTINUOUS SECTIONS OF DUCTILE IRON OR STEEL PIPE, FITTINGS AND APPURTENANCES. 3. LEAD WIRES SHALL BE SLEEVED IN SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUITS. 4. COVER ALL EXOTHERMIC WELDS WITH ROYBOND 747 AND ROYSTON HANDY CAP. 5. ALL NUTS, BOLTS, AND WASHERS SHALL BE GRADE 316 STAINLESS STEEL. 6. APPLY NP-OX-ID "A SPECIAL WW" GREASE PROTECTIVE WRAP ON ALL BURIED FITTINGS. 7. FITTINGS, VALVES, AND RESTRAINED JOINT DEVICES, SHALL BE ENCASED IN POLYETHYLENE PER AWWA C105. 8. FOR PIPE SIZES > 12" DIAMETER, OR LENGTHS > 250', THE CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM SHALL BE CUSTOM DESIGNED. CP TEST STATION BOX, AT GRADE (LOCATE IN PARKWAY IF POSSIBLE) INSTALL LEAD WIRES PERPENDICULAR TO WATER MAIN 2'
MIN 15' MINIMUM (TYPICAL) 17 LB. HIGH POTENTIAL PREPACKAGED MAGNESIUM ANODE OR 30 LB. ZINC ANODE. NUMBER OF ANODES VARIES, REFER TO TABLE ANODE AND PIPE LEAD WIRES SHALL BE SEPARATELY SLEEVED WITHIN SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUITS WITH SWEEPS 2'
MIN DUCTILE IRON OR STEEL WATER MAIN EXOTHERMIC WELD WITH ROYSTON HANDICAP (TYPICAL) IF RESISTANCE IS > 1500 OHM-CM, USE 17 LB Mg ANODE. IF RESISITANCE IS < 1500 OHM-CM, USE 30 LB Zn ANODE. BACK WITH NATIVE SOIL. CP TEST STATION BOX ANODE LEAD WIRES (TYPICAL) LENGTH OF PIPE (6"-12") # OF ANODES 20'-50' 1 51'-100' 2 101'-150'
3 151-200'
4 201'-250'
5 CONCRETE PAD DUCTILE IRON OR STEEL WATER MAIN PIPE LEAD WIRES (TYPICAL) A
A TABLE CONCRETE PAD 24" X 24" X 6" THICK 2-WIRE CP TEST STATION ASSEMBLY NOTES: 1. PROVIDE WIRE SLACK TO EXTEND EACH WIRE 18" ABOVE THE RIM OF THE CP TEST STATION BOX. WIRES SHALL BE BUNDLED IN THE CP TEST STATION BOX. 2. PROVIDE PVC 90° SWEEP AT CP TEST STATION BOX. CP TEST STATION BOX TWO WIRE CP TEST STATION ALL WIRES SHALL TERMINATE IN A FLUSH FINK TEST STATION WITHIN THE CONCRETE BOX 8" MINIMUM DEPTH 1 2" GRAVEL 2" DIAMETER SCHEDULE 40 PVC TEST CONDUIT, EXTEND 2" ABOVE TOP OF GRAVEL, AND 5" BELOW GRAVEL INTO NATIVE SOIL, OR A SPECIAL BACKFILL OF 50% BENTONITE, AND 50% GYPSUM 2-NO. 6 AWG STRANDED COPPER WIRE WITH BLACK HMWPE INSULATION (3 PIPE LEAD WIRES FOR PIPELINE DIAMETER GREATER THAN 20") 1.5" SCHEDULE 40 PVC GRAY CONDUIT. ALL WIRES AND CONDUITS SHALL BE PERPENDICULAR TO THE WATER MAIN. PROVIDE 90° SWEEP AT THE TEST STATION END OF THE CONDUIT A
B REFER TO EXOTHERMIC WELD DETAIL WATER MAIN N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-C2.0 CIVIL DETAILS.dwg - Tab: CATHODIC PROTECTION DETAILS 6 - by mmills on 11/29/21 at 10:22:30 AM Dimscale = 96; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS THESE DRAWINGS ARE THE PROPERTY OF P.A.C.E AND SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 D.S.L. M.S.A. / J.S. / R.C. D.S.L. SEPTEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058
FESS I A
NEER I
L
ENG
D No. C44825
O I F
R N I A
E
A T
VC
C I O F
I A
L
L Exp. 03-31-22N
PRO
O
S REG I T S T ERE DUNCAN
S . L EE
MANNER NOR USED FOR CONSTRUCTION UNLESS STAMPED "ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION" 58 EXISTING UTILITY COMPANY POLE UTILITY COMPARTMENT SES (SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION) 480V, 800A, 3Ø, 4W, 65 KAIC, NEMA 1 PULL SECTION M DRIVEN GROUND ROD UFER GROUND MAIN BKR, 3P, LSIG 800AF 800AT 600AF 600ATVFD 350 WELL PUMP (PMP-02100) (414 FLC) GND #4/0 GND 3P PORTABLE STANDBY GENERATOR 480V, 3Ø, 4W, 400 KW, 500 KVA, 600 A, 0.8 PF GENERATOR GND HMI OIL HTR #4/0 GND C 70A3P PANEL "A" 150A, 120/240V, 1Ø, 3W, 30 CKTS. XFMR "T1" 25 KVA, 480- 120/240V PUMP STATION PLC PANEL P200 100A3PSPD 120KA/Ø PHASE 20A3PSPARE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM NTS NEW VERNON POWER UTILITY TRANSFORMER PER ALL POWER CO. REQUIREMENTS MCC-PS (MOTOR CONTROL CENTER) 480V, 800A, 3Ø, 3W, 65 KAIC, NEMA 1 15A3P GENERATOR TAP BOX MCC LOAD SUMMARY EQUIPMENT NAME AMPS WELL 22 PUMP (350 HP) 414.0 25 KVA TRANSFORMER (MAX LOAD) 52.1 25% OF THE LARGEST MOTOR LOAD 103.5 TOTAL AMPS @ 480V 569.6 PERCENT CAPACITY 71.2 SPARE PME PAD BUS BRACING CALCULATION (WORST CASE SCENARIO) MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER - 800 AMPS ASSUME 750 KVA UTILITY TRANSFORMER BUS BRACING SHALL BE MINIMUM 65 KAIC FROM EATON, SHORT CIRCUIT CALCULATIONS, TABLE 1 - 750 KVA TRANSFORMER EQUALS 28,672 SHORT CIRCUIT AMPS. ADD MOTOR CONTRIBUTION 28,672 + 4 x 414 = 30,328 AMPS ADD 10% FOR VOLTAGE FLUCTUATIONS. 30,580 x 1.10 = 33,361 AMPS COLD WATER GROUND BUILDING STEEL OR REBAR NEU GND 600 A GENERAL NOTES 1. PRELIMINARY VERNON UTILITY PLANS. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WORK WITH UTILITY. THESE PLANS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 2. NOT ALL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING ARE SHOWN ON THIS DIAGRAM. REFERENCE DRAWINGS IN THE ELECTRICAL SET AND ENTIRE PROJECT TO COMPLETELY UNDERSTAND THE SCOPE OF ELECTRICAL WORK. 3. DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND DO NOT REFLECT ACTUAL ROUTING. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL PULLPOINTS WHERE REQUIRED FOR PULLING TENSION AND MAINTAINING LESS THEN (4) 90 DEGREE BENDS. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND NOTIFY THE ENGINEER AND THE CITY OF ANY DISCREPANCIES FOUND. 5. EQUIPMENT AND WIRING METHODS IN THE CHEMICAL ROOM OR PUMP VAULT SHALL BE RATED FOR CORROSIVE LOCATIONS. EXPOSED EQUIPMENT IN THE CHEMICAL ROOM OR PUMP VAULT SHALL BE NEMA 4X OR CORROSION RESISTANT (PVC COATED OR STAINLESS STEEL). EXPOSED EQUIPMENT IN THE ELECTRICAL ROOM SHALL BE NEMA 1 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. OUTDOOR EXPOSED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEMA 3R UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM SAFE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH CAL/OSHA AND NFPA 70E STANDARDS. 7. FIBER OPTIC WIRING METHODS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC 770. 8. WHEN REQUIRED CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE STRUCTURAL DESIGN CALCULATIONS FOR MOUNTING AND ANCHORING OF FABRICATED ASSEMBLIES AND SUPPORT STRUCTURES, SIGNED AND SEALED BY A REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER (CIVIL/STRUCTURAL) CURRENTLY LICENSED IN THE SAME STATE AS THE FINAL INSTALLATION. CALCULATIONS SHALL INCLUDE SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS FOR THE LOCATION OF INSTALLATION. 9. ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL HAVE ARC-FLASH HAZARD WARNING LABELS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC 110.16. 10. VFD SHALL MEET ALL REQUIREMENTS OF IEEE 519 WITH USE OF EQUIPMENT SUCH AS ACTIVE FILTERS AS REQUIRED. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. NEU #4/0 BARE COPPER SYSTEM BONDING JUMPER #4/0 GND GND #4/0 GND #4/0 GND INV #4/0 BARE COPPER GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR E13 E16 UTILITY REFERENCE SHEET I REF1 59 E17 UPS P110 P111 PUTIL P111A "A-1" #4/0 GND METAL FENCING #4/0 BARE COPPER GROUND RING CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL SWITCHGEAR UTILITY TO INSTALL 2-4" SCH40 CONDUIT UTILITY TO TERMINATE CONDUCTORS IN PULL SECTION METER INSTALL BY UTILITY UTILITY TO INSTALL XFRMR PAD & VAULT &XFRMR UTILITY TO INSTALL 2-5" CONDUITS &1/OAL 17KV CABLE UTILITY TO INSTALL 5 X 10 PME PAD & VAULT &PME SWITCH UTILITY TO INSTALL 4-5" SCH40 CONDUITS (2-5" TO EACH POLE) 1-4" TO WEST POLE (2)1/O 17KV CABLE FROM EACH POLE BY UTILITY BY CONTRACTOR
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626-36x24v - E.dwg
w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-REF1.0 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM.dwg - Tab: REF1 - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 2:54:25 PM Dimscale = 1; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 UPDATED PORTION BY UTLITY P103 P100 P102 P101 800A3P MAIN BKR #4/0 BARE COPPER MAIN BONDING JUMPER SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION, "SES", 480V, 800A, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE, NEMA 1, 66" W x 90" H x 24" D. CONSTRUCTION NOTES: E1 E3 PORTABLE STANDBY GENERATOR 480V, 3Ø, 4W, 400 KW, 500 KVA, 600 A, 0.8 PF, CAMLOCK CONNECTIONS, TIER 4F, TOWABLE, ON TRAILER HITCH, CUMMINS OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 288" L x 102" W. E4 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER "MCC-PS", 480V, 800A, 3 PHASE, 3 WIRE, NEMA 1, TYPE ALLEN BRADLEY CENTERLINE 2100, EATON FREEDOM OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 60" W x 90" H x 20" D. E5 PUMP STATION PLC PANEL, PAINTED STEEL, HEAVY DUTY, FREESTANDING, NEMA 12, TYPE HUBBELL OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 36" W x 90" H x 20" D. E6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE, FOR WELL PUMP, 480V, 350 HP, ACTIVE FRONT END DRIVE, IP 54, TYPE ALLEN BRADLEY 755TL OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL, 63" W x 90" H x 28" D. E7 25 KVA DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER, 480-120/240V, 1 PHASE, 3 WIRE, WITH PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CIRCUIT PROTECTION, #6 INSULATED GROUND TO GROUND BUS, MOUNTED INSIDE MCC-PS. E8 PANELBOARD "A", 120/240V, SINGLE PHASE, 3 WIRE, 30 CIRCUITS, 225 AMP FRAME, 150 AMP MAIN BREAKER, BOLT ON TYPE, MOUNTED INSIDE MCC-PS. E9 GENERATOR TAP BOX, 800 AMP, 600 V, 3 PHASE, 3 POLE, NEMA 3R, STANCHION MOUNTED, CAMLOCK, TYPE SQUARE D SPQTB608RS OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. E10 POWER QUALITY METER, ETHERNET, TYPE ALLEN-BRADLEY POWER MONITOR 1000, 1408-EM3A-ENT OR ENGINEER APPROVED EQUAL. E11 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE, MINIMUM 120 KA PER PHASE, INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. E12 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR, #4/0 BARE COPPER, CONNECT TO GROUND RING THROUGH APPROVED MEANS, SEE DETAILS AND GROUNDING PLAN. E13 GROUND AND BOND EQUIPMENT OR ENCLOSURE PER DETAILS AND GROUNDING PLAN, SEE SHEET E3.0 AND E7.0. E15 E13 E13 E13 E13 E15 E15 E13 E14 E11 E13 E16 REFERENCE UTILITY DRAWINGS FOR INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ON CABLING/CONDUIT, JUNCTION BOXES, ETC. FROM THE EXISTING UTILITY POLE TO THE SERVICE ENTRANCE. E17 UTILITY TRANSFORMER, PER CITY OF VERNON REQUIRMENTS, 480V, PAD MOUNTED, SEE DETAIL "A" - SHEET E7.2, FOR REFERENCE. E18 BOOSTER PUMP "PMP-022100" PER MECHANICAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. GROUND PUMP MOTOR CASING. E18 E19 STUB UP CONDUIT 6" ABOVE GROUND, MOUNT TO CONCRETE PAD. E19 E12 E9 E3 E1 E4 E6 E5 SEE CONDUIT SCHEDULE, PLAN LAYOUTS, AND PANEL LOAD FOR ADDITIONAL CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN ON THIS DIAGRAM. E20 TEMPORARY CABLE FOR USE WITH PORTABLE GENERATOR. E20 E15 E10 GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER SHALL BE LOCKABLE IN THE OPEN POSITION, IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC 445.18(B). E14 E7 E8 E2 CONDUIT STUB UP LOCATION. STUB UPS SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN 28" x 14" AREA CENTERED ON 38" x 24" CONCRETE PAD. E2 10'-0" 8'-0"
2'-0" 2'-0" 2'-0"
3'-0"
SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SD SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS S 27'-0" JB JB JB JB JB JB JBJB 3' LOC. 3 8 X 10 XFRMR PAD W/ 4 X 7 SLAB BOX GROUNDING PER COV ESR 2' LOC. 2 5 X 10.5 X 7 DEEP PME VAULT GROUND PER COV ESR 3'
R12.5' 19.06' 1.20'
1 4"
4 6"
2 5"
2 4"
1 4" 1 4"
2 6"
2 6"
R6.25'
8.1' LOC. 1 17" X 30" X 24" SPLICE BOX
1 4"R2' LOC. 4 ELECTRICAL ROOM STUB UP WITH FACTORY 90s VERIFY STUB UP LOCATION 1 4" EXISTING POWER POLE Xref ..\..\taskbase\B626-36x24v - E.dwg UTILITY REFERENCE SHEET II REF2 60 PUTIL P101 P110 P203 P200 "A-1" P201 "A-2, A-4" P211 P212 "A-6, A-8" P111 P203A P111A P210A P206 P207 P204 P210 P211A P209 P208 P209A "A-11, A-13" P202 "A-3, A-5" "A-15" P204A P205 "A-7"
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Xrefs: B626 - Well 22.dwg; Existing Basefile.dwg; B626 - Civil Site.dwg; B626 - Utility Alignment.dwg; B626 - Well Mech..dwg; B626 - YARD PIPING.dwg; b626 - Vernon Parcels.dwg; B626 - FRP Building.DWG; B626-36x24v - E.dwg; B626-C1.0 PROPOSED SITE PLAN.dwg; B626-36x24v - E.dwg w:\B626\engineering\b626 well 22\sheets\B626-REF2.0 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN.dwg - Tab: REF2 - by mmills on 11/30/21 at 2:54:19 PM Dimscale = 96; LTscale = 1; PSltscale = 1; ACAD Ver. = 23.0s (LMS Tech); Visretain = 1 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS FRP No.1192-19 WELL NO. 22 EQUIPMENT AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS 17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200 | Fountain Valley, CA 92708 P: (714) 481-7300 | www.pacewater.com Advanced Water Engineering OF 60 G.T. N.C. C.N. NOVEMBER 2021 4305 SANTA FE AVENUE VERNON, CA. 90058 GENERAL NOTES 1. PRELIMINARY VERNON UTILITY PLANS. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WORK WITH UTILITY. THESE PLANS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. P101 P103 P100 E9 E17 E21 E29 E22 E31 E6 E26 E18 E3 E5 E25 E24 E4 E27 E23 E8 E19 E30 E28 E48 E16 E1 E2
V2264
TYPICAL TRENCH
PAVING SECTION
REVISIONS
V2264
TYPICAL TRENCH PAVING SECTION
FOR SEWER LATERAL
REVISIONS